Garmin | Embraer Prodigy 100 | Garmin Embraer Prodigy 100 Embraer Prodigy Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide

Garmin Embraer Prodigy 100 Embraer Prodigy Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
Embraer
Phenom 100
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100
Pilot’s Guide
Embraer Phenom 100
System Software 0734.19 or later
www.garmin.com
190-00728-02
Revision A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Engine & Airframe Systems
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Automatic Flight Control System
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2008, 2009 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software version 0734.19 or later for the Embraer Phenom 100. Some differences in
operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200
Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411
Fax 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd, Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
Tel: 44/0870.8501241
Fax: 44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199
Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Web Site Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or stored
in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission to download
a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to be viewed for
personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of this copyright notice
and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly prohibited.
Prodigy™ is a trademark of Embraer-Empresa Brasileira de Aeronautica S.A.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. WATCH®, FliteCharts®, and SafeTaxi® are trademarks of Garmin Ltd.
or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell International, Inc.; Becker® is a registered trademark of Becker
Flugfunkwerk GmbH; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; XM® is a registered trademark of XM Satellite Radio, Inc.
September, 2009
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
Printed in the U.S.A.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Limited Warranty
LIMITED WARRANTY
This Garmin product is warranted to be free from defects in materials or workmanship for two years from the date of purchase. Within this
period, Garmin will, at its sole option, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or replacement will be made
at no charge to the customer for parts and labor, provided that the customer shall be responsible for any transportation cost. This warranty
does not cover failures due to abuse, misuse, accident, or unauthorized alterations or repairs.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM STATE TO
STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply to you.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace the unit or software, or to offer a full refund of the purchase price, at its sole
discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating a Service Center near you, visit
the Garmin Web site at “http://www.garmin.com” or contact Garmin Customer Service at 800-800-1020.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
i
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by the GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level and
could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74B Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data is
intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid to
enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Traffic information shown on system displays is provided as an aid in visually acquiring traffic.
Pilots must maneuver the aircraft based only upon ATC guidance or positive visual acquisition of conflicting
traffic.
WARNING: XM Weather should not be used for hazardous weather penetration. Weather information
provided by the GDL 69 is approved only for weather avoidance, not penetration.
Warning: NEXRAD weather data is to be used for long-range planning purposes only. Due to inherent
delays in data transmission and the relative age of the data, NEXRAD weather data should not be used for
short-range weather avoidance.
WARNING: The Prodigy™ Integrated Flight Deck, as installed in the Embraer Phenom 100 aircraft, has a very
high degree of functional integrity. However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or
self-test capability for all conceivable system failures is not practical. Although unlikely, it may be possible
for erroneous operation to occur without a fault indication shown by the system. It is thus the responsibility
of the pilot to detect such an occurrence by means of cross-checking with all redundant or correlated
information available in the cockpit.
WARNING: For safety reasons, system operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
ii
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy and
performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the system utilize GPS as a precision electronic NAVigation
AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be misused or
misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the
Prodigy™ Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Embraer Phenom 100 Airplane Flight Manual. Thoroughly
practice basic operation prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the
system to all available navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings,
charts, etc. For safety purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: The illustrations in this guide are only examples. Never use the system to attempt to penetrate
a thunderstorm. Both the FAA Advisory Circular, Subject: Thunderstorms, and the Aeronautical Information
Manual (AIM) recommend avoiding “by at least 20 miles any thunderstorm identified as severe or giving an
intense radar echo.”
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes. South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes. North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada). North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia).
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand).
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
CAUTION: The system does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an
authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
nOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the panel and
displays, are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and databases. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
iii
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
iv
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Revision Information
Record of Revisions
Part Number
190-00728-00
Revision
Date
A
July, 2008
Page Range
Description
Production release
190-00728-01
A
March, 2009
All
Added ADF
Added ChartView and FliteCharts
Added TAS
Added flight plan import/export
Added other GDU 9.14 parameters
190-00728-02
A
September, 2009
All
Added Synthetic Vision System
TAWS-A
TCAS I
TCAS II
ADF Tuning
Radar Altimeter
Added AOPA Airport Directory
Added Iridium Satellite Telephone and Data Link Services
Electronic checklists
Added dual navigation database capability
Added database synchronization
Added other GDU 10.00 parameters
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
v
Revision Information
Blank Page
vi
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Table of Contents
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
1.8
Section 1 System Overview
System Description.................................................. 1
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).................................. 2
Prodigy™ Controls.................................................... 7
MFD/PFD Controls......................................................... 7
MFD Control Unit.......................................................... 9
AFCS Controls............................................................. 10
Audio Panel Controls................................................... 12
Softkey Function. ........................................................ 14
Secure Digital Cards.............................................. 24
System Power-up.................................................... 25
System Operation................................................... 26
Normal Operation. ...................................................... 26
Reversionary Mode. .................................................... 27
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 28
Prodigy™ System Annunciations. .................................. 29
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 30
Accessing System Functionality........................... 34
Menus. ...................................................................... 34
MFD Page Groups. ...................................................... 35
MFD System Pages...................................................... 39
Display Backlighting.............................................. 53
Automatic Adjustment................................................. 53
Manual Adjustment..................................................... 53
Section 2 Flight Instruments
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 58
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 58
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 61
Altimeter.................................................................... 63
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI). ...................................... 67
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 67
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 68
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 73
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 81
Temperature Displays. ................................................. 81
Wind Data.................................................................. 82
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications. .......................... 83
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 84
Prodigytm System Annunciations. .................................. 84
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 85
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Traffic Annunciations................................................... 85
TAWS Annunciations. .................................................. 86
Altitude Alerting. ........................................................ 86
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 87
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 87
Radar Altimeter........................................................... 89
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 91
Altitude Alerting. ........................................................ 91
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 91
Unusual Attitudes. ...................................................... 92
Section 3 Engine and Airframe systems
3.1 Engine Indication System (EIS)............................. 96
Takeoff Data Set Window............................................. 97
Engine Indications....................................................... 98
Fuel and Electrical Indications. ................................... 100
Cabin Pressurization.................................................. 101
Landing Gear............................................................ 102
Flaps and Trim. ......................................................... 102
3.2 Synoptics............................................................... 103
System Status........................................................... 103
Environmental Control System (ECS)........................... 104
Electrical. ................................................................. 106
Fuel. ........................................................................ 107
Ice Protection System. ............................................... 108
Engine Maintenance.................................................. 110
3.3 Crew Alerting System (CAS)................................ 111
CAS Message Prioritization........................................ 111
CAS Messages.......................................................... 112
3.4 Abnormal Operations.......................................... 117
Engine. .................................................................... 117
Cabin Pressurization.................................................. 117
Flaps........................................................................ 118
Trim......................................................................... 118
Section 4 Audio Panel and CNS
4.1 Overview............................................................... 119
Audio Panel Volume Control....................................... 119
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display.................... 120
Audio Panel Controls................................................. 122
4.2 COM Operation..................................................... 124
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation. .................. 124
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 125
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
vii
Table of Contents
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz. ................. 126
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency. ............................... 127
Frequency Spacing. ................................................... 131
Automatic Squelch.................................................... 132
Volume. ................................................................... 132
4.3 NAV Operation...................................................... 133
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 133
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning. .................................... 134
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD. .............. 136
Marker Beacon Receiver. ........................................... 141
ADF/DME Tuning....................................................... 142
4.4 Mode S Transponder............................................ 146
GTX 33/33D Transponder Controls. ............................. 147
GTX 33/33D Transponder Mode Selection.................... 148
TCAS II Transponder Controls (optional). ..................... 150
TCAS II Transponder Mode Selection (optional)............ 150
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 152
IDENT Function......................................................... 153
Flight ID Reporting.................................................... 154
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 155
Power-Up. ................................................................ 155
Mono/Stereo Headsets. ............................................. 155
Speaker.................................................................... 155
Intercom. ................................................................. 156
Passenger Address (PA) System. ................................. 157
Simultaneous COM Operation.................................... 157
Clearance Recorder and Player................................... 158
Entertainment Inputs................................................. 159
4.6 Audio Panels Preflight Procedure....................... 160
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 162
Stuck Microphone..................................................... 162
COM Tuning Failure................................................... 162
PFD Failure, Dual System............................................ 163
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 164
Reversionary Mode. .................................................. 164
Section 5 Flight Management
5.1 Introduction.......................................................... 165
Navigation Status Box............................................... 167
5.2 Using Map Displays.............................................. 168
Map Orientation. ...................................................... 168
Map Range............................................................... 170
Map Panning............................................................ 173
Measuring Bearing and Distance. ............................... 178
viii
Topography. ............................................................. 179
Map Symbols............................................................ 182
Airways.................................................................... 188
Track Vector.............................................................. 190
Wind Vector.............................................................. 191
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 192
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 193
Field of View (SVS). ................................................... 194
5.3 Waypoints.............................................................. 195
Airports.................................................................... 196
Intersections............................................................. 203
NDBs. ...................................................................... 205
VORs........................................................................ 207
User Waypoints......................................................... 209
5.4 Airspaces............................................................... 215
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation . ......................................... 220
5.6 Flight Planning...................................................... 226
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 227
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................ 232
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 234
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 236
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 243
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 245
Along Track Offsets. .................................................. 249
Parallel Track. ........................................................... 250
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 253
Inverting a Flight Plan. .............................................. 254
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 255
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 257
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 258
Altitude Constraints. ................................................. 260
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 264
Departures. .............................................................. 264
Arrivals . .................................................................. 267
Approaches . ............................................................ 269
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 275
Trip Planning. ........................................................... 275
Weight Planning. ...................................................... 279
Weight Caution And Warning Conditions..................... 281
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 282
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 286
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 315
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Table of Contents
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
Section 6 Hazard Avoidance
XM Satellite Weather........................................... 317
Activating Services.................................................... 318
Using XM Satellite Weather Products.......................... 319
Airborne Color Weather Radar........................... 346
System Description.................................................... 346
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar................ 346
NEXRAD and Airborne Weather Radar ........................ 347
Antenna Beam Illumination........................................ 347
Safe Operating Distance. ........................................... 350
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup. ........................................... 351
Weather Mapping and Interpretation.......................... 353
Ground Mapping and Interpretation. .......................... 365
TAWS-B.................................................................. 366
Displaying TAWS-B Data. ........................................... 367
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 370
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 372
System Status........................................................... 378
TAWS-A.................................................................. 380
TAWS-A Page............................................................ 382
TAWS-A Alerts. ......................................................... 384
System Status........................................................... 396
TAWS-A Abnormal operations. ................................... 397
Traffic Information Service (TIS)......................... 400
Displaying TRAFFIC Data............................................ 401
Traffic Map Page....................................................... 403
TIS Alerts.................................................................. 404
System Status........................................................... 406
TCAS I TRAFFIC..................................................... 408
Theory of operation................................................... 408
TCAS I Alerts............................................................. 411
System Test............................................................... 412
Operation................................................................. 413
TCAS II Traffic........................................................ 420
TCAS II Symbology.................................................... 420
TCAS II Alerts............................................................ 421
System Test............................................................... 424
Operation................................................................. 425
System Status.......................................................... 431
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Section 7 Automatic Flight Control System
7.1 AFCS Controls....................................................... 434
7.2 Flight Director Operation.................................... 436
Activating the Flight Director...................................... 436
AFCS Status Box. ...................................................... 437
Flight Director Modes................................................ 438
Flight Director Selection............................................. 438
Command Bars......................................................... 439
7.3 Vertical Modes...................................................... 440
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)................................................ 441
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS). ...................... 442
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)........................................... 442
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)........................................... 444
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC). ................................ 445
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV). .................... 447
Glidepath Mode (GP) (WAAS Only)............................. 452
Glideslope Mode (GS)................................................ 454
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes..................... 455
7.4 Lateral Modes....................................................... 456
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)................................................ 457
Low Bank Mode........................................................ 457
Heading Select Mode (HDG)....................................... 458
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)....................... 459
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC).............................. 461
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation.............. 463
Flight Control. .......................................................... 463
Engaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper. ................... 464
Control Wheel Steering.............................................. 464
Disengaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper................ 465
7.6 Example Flight Plan............................................. 466
Departure................................................................. 467
Intercepting a VOR Radial.......................................... 469
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course.................................. 470
Descent.................................................................... 471
Approach. ................................................................ 475
Go Around/Missed Approach...................................... 478
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts.......................... 480
AFCS CAS Messages.................................................. 480
AFCS Voice Alerts...................................................... 481
Overspeed Protection. ............................................... 481
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
ix
Table of Contents
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
Section 8 Additional Features
Synthetic Vision System (SVS)............................ 484
SVS Operation. ......................................................... 485
SVS Features............................................................. 487
Field of View............................................................. 495
SafeTaxi................................................................. 497
SafeTaxi Database Cycle Number and Revision. ........... 500
ChartView.............................................................. 503
ChartView Softkeys. .................................................. 503
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 504
Chart Options........................................................... 512
Day/Night View......................................................... 517
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date. ............ 520
FliteCharts............................................................. 523
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 523
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 524
Chart Options........................................................... 531
Day/Night View......................................................... 535
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date............. 537
AOPA Airport Directory........................................ 540
AOPA Database Cycle Number and Revision................ 541
Satellite Telephone and Data Link Services...... 543
Registering the Iridium Satellite System....................... 543
Disable/Enable Iridium Transceiver.............................. 546
Telephone Communication......................................... 547
WI-FI Connections..................................................... 560
System Data Logging................................................. 565
XM Radio Entertainment..................................... 568
Activating XM Satellite Radio Services. ....................... 568
Using XM Radio........................................................ 570
Scheduler............................................................... 573
Electronic Checklists............................................ 575
Abnormal Operation............................................ 578
SVS Troubleshooting.................................................. 578
Reversionary Mode. .................................................. 578
Unusual Attitudes. .................................................... 579
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations............................. 589
Prodigy™ System Annunciations. ................................ 590
Prodigy™ System Message Advisories.......................... 592
TAWS-A Alerts. ......................................................... 605
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 607
TCAS I Alerts and Annunciations................................. 608
TCAS II Alerts and Annunciations................................ 609
Other Prodigy™ Aural Alerts. ...................................... 610
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 610
SD Card Use.................................................................... 613
Jeppesen Databases.................................................. 613
Garmin Databases..................................................... 616
Glossary........................................................................... 623
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 629
General TIS Information................................................ 633
Introduction.............................................................. 633
TIS vs. TAS/TCAS........................................................ 633
TIS Limitations.......................................................... 633
Display Symbols............................................................. 635
Index
Index . ...............................................................................I-1
Appendices
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 583
CAS Messages.......................................................... 583
Comparator Annunciations......................................... 588
x
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 1 System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1.1 System Description
This section provides an overview of the Prodigy™ Integrated Flight Deck as installed in the Embraer Phenom
100. The system is an integrated flight control system that presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver
• GDC 74B Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GWX 68 Weather Radar
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GCU 475 MFD Control Unit
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GMC 715 AFCS Control Unit
• GMA 1347D Dual Audio System with Integrated
Marker Beacon Receiver
• GSD 41 Data Concentrator
• GA 36 and GA 37 GPS/WAAS Antennas
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos
• GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GTX 33/33D Mode S Transponder (not used with
TCAS II)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GDL 69A Satellite Data Link Receiver
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDL 59 Data Link
EAS
• GDU 1240A Primary Flight Displays and Multifunction Display
A top-level system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1 (it does not include the GA 36, GA 37, or GSM 86).
AFCS
NOTE: Refer to the AFCS section for details on the GFC 700 AFCS.
In the Embraer Phenom 100, the GFC 700 Automated Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director
(FD), autopilot (AP), and yaw damper (YD) functions of the system.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1.2 Line Replaceable Units (LRU)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1240A (3) – Each unit is configured as one of two PFDs or one MFD. The GDU 1240A features a 12-inch
LCD with 1024 x 768 resolution. The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as PFD1, and the one
installed on the right/copilot side is designated as PFD2. The unit installed in the center is designated the MFD.
These units communicate with each other and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GIA 63W (2) – Functions as the main communication hub, linking all LRUs with the on-side PFD. Each
GIA 63W contains a GPS WAAS receiver, VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD) and system
integration microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the on-side PFD via HSDB connection. The GIA
63Ws are not paired together and do not communicate with each other directly.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GDC 74B (2) – Processes data from the pitot/static system as well as the OAT probe. This unit provides pressure
altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information to the system, and it communicates with the on-side
GIA 63W, on-side GDU 1240A and on-side GRS 77, using an ARINC 429 digital interface. The GDC 74B is
designed to operate in Reduced Vertical Separation Minimum (RVSM) airspace.
2
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GEA 71 (3) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
• GRS 77 (2) – Provides aircraft attitude and heading information via ARINC 429 to both the on-side GDU
1240A and the on-side GIA 63W. The GRS 77 contains advanced sensors (including accelerometers and rate
sensors) and interfaces with the on-side GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field information, with the GDC 74B to
obtain air data, and with both GIA 63Ws to obtain GPS information. AHRS modes of operation are discussed
later in this document.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GMU 44 (2) – Measures local magnetic field. Data is sent to the GRS 77 for processing to determine aircraft
magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and communicates with the GRS 77,
using an RS-485 digital interface.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
• GMA 1347D (2) – Integrates NAV/COM digital audio, intercom system and marker beacon controls, and is
installed in dual configuration on the outboard side of PFD1 and PFD2. This unit also enables the manual
control of the display reversionary mode (red DISPLAY BACKUP button) and communicates with the on-side
GIA 63W, using an RS-232 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GTX 33 (1) and GTX 33D (1) – Solid-state transponders that provide Modes A, C and S capability. The GTX
33D includes Mode S with diversity and is indicated as ‘XPDR2’. The GTX 33 is indicated as ‘XPDR1’. Both
transponders can be controlled from either PFD, and only one transponder can be active at a time. Each
transponder communicates with the on-side GIA 63W through an RS-232 digital interface. These transponders
are not used when the TCAS II option is installed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDL 69A (1) – A satellite radio receiver that provides real-time weather information to the MFD (and, indirectly,
to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69A communicates with the MFD
via HSDB connection. A subscription to the XM Satellite Radio service is required to enable the GDL 69A
capability.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GDL 59 (1) – Provides system WI-FI connectivity. GDL 59 operation is performed with the MFD through the
HSDB. Connectivity with the GSR 56 is through the RS-232 bus. Computers and/or EFBs (Electronic Flight
Bag) may also be connected through three Ethernet ports.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GSR 56 (1) – The Iridium Transceiver operation for voice communication is by means of a telephone handset.
The tranceiver can also send and receive data provided by the GDL 59 through the RS-232 bus.
INDEX
• GCU 475 (1) – Provides the Flight Management System (FMS) controls for the MFD through an RS-232 digital
interface.
4
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GMC 715 (1) – Provides the controls for the GFC 700 AFCS through an RS-232 digital interface allowing
communication with both PFDs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GWX 68 (1) – Provides airborne weather and ground mapped radar data to the MFD, through the GSD 41, via
HSDB connection.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GSD 41 (1) – This unit is a data concentrator used to expand the input and output capabilities of the system.
Communication is through the High Speed Data Bus.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
• GSA 81 (3) and GSM 86 (3) – The GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of pitch, roll, and yaw.
These units interface with each GIA 63W.
The GSM 86 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 81 servo actuator to the
mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
• GA 36 (1) and GA 37 (1) – The GA 36 is a through-mount GPS/WAAS antenna. The GA 37 is a through-mount
GPS/WAAS antenna with XM/Data Link.
GA 36
GA 37
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GWX 68
GSD 41
GSR 56
GDL 69A
GDU 1240A
(PFD #1)
GDU 1240A
GDL 59
(PFD #2)
EAS
GCU 475
GDU 1240A
(MFD)
GMC 715
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HSDB Rev
Switch*
MFD Failed Mode
GMA 1347D
#1
GMA 1347D
#2
GMU 44 #1
GMU 44 #2
GRS 77 #1
GRS 77 #2
AFCS
GIA 63W #1
GDC 74B #1
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
GSA 81
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
GIA 63W #2
GDC 74B #2
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
(Pitch)
GSA 81
(Roll)
GTX 33
GSA 81
GTX 33D
(Yaw)
APPENDICES
GEA 71 #1
GEA 71 #2
GEA 71 #3
* External to the G1000 system
High Speed Data Bus
INDEX
Figure 1-1 System LRU Configuration
6
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.3 Prodigy™ Controls
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 1347D) and AFCS controls (GMC 715) are described in the CNS & Audio Panel
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and AFCS sections respectively.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, MFD Control Unit, AFCS Control Unit and audio
panel. Some controls found on the MFD are duplicated on the MFD Control Unit. These control functions may
be operated from either the MFD or the MFD Control Unit. The controls for the PFDs and MFD are discussed
within the following pages of this section.
EAS
MFD/PFD Controls
1
2
4
3
5
6
7
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-2 PFD Controls
13
10
14
11
15
APPENDICES
9
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
12
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
2
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Switches the standby and active NAV frequencies.
3
Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to switch the tuning box (cyan box) between NAV1 and NAV2.
4
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
5
BARO Knob – Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
6
Dual COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to switch the tuning box (cyan box) between COM1 and COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Switches the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this
key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON and OFF.
9
Direct-to Key – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected
destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or taken from
the map pointer position).
10
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
11
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
12
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor
ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects individual
characters for the highlighted cursor location.
13
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
14
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then be loaded into the active flight plan.
If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
15
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD and MFD bezels (see Figure 1-2).
8
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD Control Unit
Many of the controls on the MFD Control Unit (GCU 475) have the same function as those located on the
MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the MFD Control Unit (see Figure 1-3):
1
3
2
4
5
EAS
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7
8
9
13
12
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
14
10
Figure 1-3 MFD Control Unit (GCU 475)
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for
accessing stored flight plans.
4
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
5
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. Theses procedures can then be loaded into the active flight
plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
6
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
3
APPENDICES
Direct-to Key – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the selected
destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or taken from
the map pointer position).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
AFCS
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. This knob selects the MFD page to be viewed; the
large knob selects a page group (MAP, WPT, AUX, NRST), while the small knob selects a specific page
within the page group. Pressing the FMS Knob turns the selection cursor ON and OFF. When the cursor
is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small and large knobs. In this case,
the large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects individual characters for the
highlighted cursor location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
7
Alphanumeric Keys – Allow the user to enter data quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob.
8
Plus (+) Minus (-) Key – Toggles a (+) or (-) character.
9
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
10
SEL Key – The center of this key activates the selected softkey, while the right and left arrows move the
softkey selection box to the right and left, respectively.
11
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
12
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and holding this key
displays the Navigation Map Page automatically.
13
SPC Key – Adds a space character.
14
BKSP Key – Moves the cursor back one character space.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AFCS Controls
2
3
4
5
6
15
14
7
8
9
10
13
12
11
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
20
19 18 17
16
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-4 AFCS Control Unit (GMC 715)
The GFC 700 AFCS is mainly controlled through the GMC 715 AFCS Control Unit. The AFCS Control Unit
consists of the following controls:
INDEX
APPENDICES
1
10
10
FD Key – Activates/deactivates the selected flight director (pilot- or copilot-side) in default vertical and
lateral modes. Press the other FD Key to toggle the corresponding PFD’s Command Bars off/on.
2
NAV Key – Selects/deselects Navigation Mode.
3
HDG Key – Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode.
4
AP Key – Engages/disengages the autopilot.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
VS Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode.
9
FLC Key – Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode.
20
CRS Knobs – Adjusts the Selected Course in 1° increments on the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
of the corresponding PFD. Press to re-center the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and return course
pointer directly TO the bearing of the active waypoint/station.
12
SPD SEL Knob – Adjusts the Airspeed Reference and bug in 1-kt (0.01 M) increments. Press to toggle
the Airspeed Reference units from IAS to Mach.
13
UP/DN Wheel – Adjusts theVertical Speed Reference and bug in 100-fpm increments.
14
ALT SEL Knob – Adjusts the Selected Altitude and bug in 100-ft increments (a finer resolution of 10
feet is available under approach conditions).
15
CSC Key – Selects/deselects Current Speed Control (when Altitude Hold Mode is active).
16
CPL Key – Transfers selection between the active flight director and standby flight director. When the
flight directors are switched, the modes revert to default. An arrow in the AFCS Status Box indicates
the active FD (pilot- or copilot-side).
17
HDG SEL Knob – Adjusts the Selected Heading and bug in 1° increments on the HSI (both PFDs).
Press to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading.
18
APR Key – Selects/deselects Approach Mode.
19
BANK Key – Manually selects/deselects Low Bank Mode.
AFCS
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ALT Key – Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode.
EAS
6
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
YD Key – Engages/disengages the yaw damper.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
11
5
Additional AFCS Controls
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The AP DISC (Autopilot Disconnect) Switch, CWS (Control Wheel Steering) Button, GO AROUND
Switch, and MEPT (Manual Electric Pitch Trim) Switch are additional AFCS controls and are located in the cockpit,
separately from the AFCS Control Unit. These are discussed in detail in the AFCS section.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel Controls
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17
22
23
24
AFCS
Figure 1-5 Audio Panel Controls (GMA 1347D)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
12
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the the #1 Com receiver to be heard. COM2 receiver
audio can be added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 Com receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the the #2 Com receiver to be heard. COM2 can be deselected by
pressing the COM2 Key, or COM1 can be added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 Com receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Selects the #3 transmitter (HF) for transmitting. COM3 receive is simultaneously selected
when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #3 COM receiver to be heard.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SPKR – Pressing this key selects and deselects the corresponding cockpit speaker. Com and Nav receiver
audio will be heard on the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Mutes the currently received Marker Beacon Receiver audio. Unmutes when new marker
beacon audio is received.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase Marker Beacon Receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to normal.
13
DME – Pressing turns DME audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 Nav receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Pressing turns on or off the audio from the ADF receiver, if installed.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 Nav receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Turns optional DME 2 audio on or off.
18
MAN SQ – Pressing activates/deactivates intercom manual squelch operation.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded audio. Press during play to play the previously recorded memory
block. Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key will begin playing the next previously recorded block.
20
INTR COM – Pressing selects/deselects the pilot/copilot intercom on both audio panels.
21
CABIN – Pressing activates/deactivates two-way communication between pilot/copilot and passengers.
22
ICS Knob – Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. Press to switch between volume and squelch
control as indicated by the ‘VOL’ or ‘SQ’ being illuminated. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow
squelch adjustment.
23
MSTR Knob – The Master Volume Control adjusts volume for the blended NAV, COM, and intercom
audio.
24
Reversionary Mode Button – Pressing manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MUSIC – Turns the Music 1 input on or off.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – When selected, activates the SATCOM transceiver.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected Com transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
EAS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – When selected, audio from the #3 COM receiver (HF) can be heard.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
13
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Softkey Function
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background.
Softkey On
EAS
Softkey Names (displayed)
Bezel-Mounted Softkeys (press)
Figure 1-6 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Another means of selecting softkeys on the MFD is by using the MFD Control Unit:
Selecting a softkey using the MFD Control Unit
1) Move the softkey selection box to the desired softkey using the arrows of the SEL Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the center of the SEL Key to select the desired softkey.
PFD Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI, IDENT, TMR/REF, NRST, and MSG Softkeys undergo a momentary change to black text on gray
background and automatically switch back to white text on black background when selected. If messages
remain after acknowledgement, the MSG Softkey will be black on white.
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and lightning (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be pressed to return to the
previous level. The MSG Softkey is visible in all softkey levels. For the top level softkeys and the transponder
(XPDR) levels, the IDENT Softkey remains visible.
AFCS
Level 1
CAS
Level 2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CAS ↑
CAS ↓
APPENDICES
INSET or
TRFC/MAP
Level 4
Description
Displays the scroll keys. Only displayed when the
number of CAS messages exceeds the capacity of the
display window.
Scroll up CAS messages (Accessible only when the
CAS Softkey is displayed)
Scroll down CAS messages (Accessible only when the
CAS Softkey is displayed)
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner. The
TRFC/MAP Softkey is displayed when the TCAS II
option is installed. Pressing the TRFC/MAP Softkey
displays the Inset Map showing Traffic Map Page.
Removes Inset Map
INDEX
OFF
Level 3
14
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
Level 2
DCLTR (3)
Level 3
SENSOR
SYN VIS
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
APPENDICES
PATHWAY
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD
AFCS
ADC1
ADC2
ADCSTBY
AHRS1
AHRS2
ATTSTBY
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displays position markers for airports within
approximately 15 nm of the current aircraft position.
Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is
within approximately 9 nm.
XM LTNG
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APTSIGNS
NEXRAD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displays compass heading along the Zero-Pitch line
TERRAIN
EAS
HRZN HDG
TOPO
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYN TERR
Description
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through
declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except for the
active flight plan
Cycles through traffic display options:
TRFC-1: Traffic displayed on inset map
TRFC-2: Traffic Map Page is displayed in the inset
map window
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain,
rivers, lakes) and elevation scale on Inset Map
Displays terrain information on Inset Map (not available with TAWS-A)
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information
on Inset Map (optional feature)
Displays XM lightning information on Inset Map
(optional feature)
Displays softkeys for selecting the #1 and #2 AHRS
and Air Data Computers
Selects the #1 Air Data Computer
Selects the #2 Air Data Computer
Selects the standby air data input
Selects the #1 AHRS
Selects the #2 AHRS
Selects the standby attitude input. Heading input
will come from the #1 AHRS.
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD
configurations
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling
Synthetic Vision features
Displays rectangular boxes representing the
horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight
plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction
TRAFFIC
Level 4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
15
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Level 1
Level 2
DFLTS
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WIND
OPTN 1
OPTN 2
OPTN 3
EAS
OFF
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DME1
BRG1
HSI FRMT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
360 HSI
ARC HSI
BRG2
DME2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OBS
CDI
APPENDICES
ADF/DME
XPDR
INDEX
XPDR1
XPDR2
STBY
16
Description
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing
units to standard
Displays softkeys to select wind data parameters
Longitudinal and lateral components
Total direction and speed
Total direction with headwind, tailwind, and crosswind speed components
Information not displayed
Displays the information window for DME number 1
Cycles the Bearing 1 Information Window through
NAV1, GPS/ waypoint identifier and GPS-derived
distance information.
Provides access to the HSI formatting softkeys
Displays the HSI in a 360 degree view
Displays the HSI as an arc
Cycles the Bearing 2 Information Window through
NAV2 or GPS waypoint identifier and GPS-derived
distance information.
Displays the information window for DME number 2
Displays softkeys for setting the altimeter and BARO
settings to metric units
ALT UNIT
STD BARO
Level 4
METERS
When enabled, displays altimeter in meters
IN
Press to display the BARO setting as inches of mercury
HPA
Press to display the BARO setting as hectopacals
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if
metric units are selected)
Selects OBS mode on the CDI when navigating by
GPS (only available with active leg)
Cycles through GPS, VOR1 (LOC1), and VOR2
(LOC2) navigation source on the CDI
Displays the ADF/DME Tuning Window, providing
ADF tuning capability and allowing selection of the
NAV source for tuning each DME
Transponder Softkeys without TCAS II Option
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys
Selects the #1 transponder as active
Selects the #2 transponder as active
Selects standby mode (transponder does not reply to
any interrogations)
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
Level 2
ON
Level 3
GND
0—7
BKSP
XPDR/TFC
APPENDICES
INDEX
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Transponder/Traffic Softkeys with TCAS II Option
Displays the transponder and TCAS II system
selection softkeys
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys
Selects transponder Standby Mode (transponder
STBY
does not reply to any interrogations). When the
transponder is set to standby, the TCAS II system is
also set to standby.
Activates transponder (transponder replies to
ON
identification interrogations). When the transponder
is set to ON, the TCAS II system is set to standby.
Altitude Reporting Mode (transponder replies to
ALT
identification and altitude interrogations). When the
transponder is set to ALT, the TCAS II system is set
to standby.
Activates the TCAS II system in TA Only Mode
TA ONLY
Activates the TCAS II system in TA/RA Mode
TA/RA
Returns to the previous softkey level
BACK
AFCS
MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TMR/REF
NRST
MSG
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
IDENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CODE
EAS
VFR
Description
Selects Mode A (transponder replies to identification
interrogations)
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode
(transponder replies to identification and altitude
interrogations)
Manually selects Ground Mode, the transponder
does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies, but
it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to
discretely addressed Mode S interrogations (not
available with TCAS II)
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in the
U.S.A. only)(not avialable with TCAS II)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI)
pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the transponder
return on the ATC screen
Displays Timer/References Window
Displays Nearest Airports Window
Displays Messages Window
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ALT
Level 4
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Level 1
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Level 1
Level 2
TCAS
Level 3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
REL
ABS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
ALT RNG
TEST
BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CODE
0—7
IDENT
AFCS
BKSP
IDENT
Description
Displays the TCAS control softkeys
Displays intruder altitude as altitude relative to own
aircraft altitude
Displays intruder MSL altitude. Display will revert
back to relative altitude after 15 sec.
Displays the altitude display range softkeys
Displays non-threat traffic from 9900 feet above
ABOVE
the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically
used during climb phase of flight.
NORMAL Displays non-threat traffic from 2700 feet above
the aircraft to 2700 feet below the aircraft. Typically
used during enroute phase of flight.
BELOW Displays non-threat traffic from 2700 feet above
the aircraft to 9900 feet below the aircraft. Typically
used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST All traffic is displayed
Activates Test Mode and displays test intruder
symbols
Returns to the previous softkey level
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
Use numbers to enter code
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI)
pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the transponder
return on the ATC screen
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI)
pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the transponder
return on the ATC screen
Displays Timer/References Window
Displays Nearest Airports Window
Displays Messages Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TMR/REF
NRST
MSG
Level 4
18
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF/DME
CAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 1-7 Top Level PFD Softkeys
EAS
ADF/DME
CAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select the BACK Softkey on this level to
return to the top softkey level.
CAS ↑
CAS ↓
BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-8 CAS Softkeys
ADF/DME
CAS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC-1
TRFC-2
AFCS
Select the BACK or OFF Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 1-9 INSET Map Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADF/DME
CAS
APPENDICES
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top level softkeys.
ADC1
ADC2
ADCSTBY
AHRS1
AHRS2
ATTSTBY
BACK
MSG
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 1-10 SENSOR Softkeys
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
ADF/DME
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CAS
DME1
DME2
HSI FMT
NAV1
NAV2
GPS
GPS
OFF
OFF
ALT UNIT
Select the BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys
EAS
SYN VIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
360 HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METERS
PATHWAY
BACK
ARC HSI
IN
HPA
SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-11 PFD Configuration Softkeys
CAS
ADF/DME
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MSG
Selecting BACK returns to the previous softkey level.
MSG
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-12 XPDR Softkeys (without TCAS II)
20
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
TRFC/MAP SENSOR
PFD
OBS
CDI
(optional)
ADF/DME XPDR/TFC
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CAS
MSG
MODE
TCAS
CODE
BACK
IDENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the top-level softkeys.
MSG
Selecting BACK returns to the
previous softkey level.
REL
ABS
ALT RNG
TEST
BACK
MSG
EAS
Selecting BACK returns to the
previous softkey level.
ABOVE NORMAL BELOW UNREST
BACK
MSG
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting BACK returns to the
previous softkey level.
STBY
ON
ALT
TA ONLY
BACK
TA/RA
MSG
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting BACK returns to the
previous softkey level.
MSG
Figure 1-13 XPDR Softkeys (with TCAS II)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MFD Softkeys
Level 1
SYSTEM
Level 2
ENG SET
Description
Accesses EIS softkeys
Accesses the FADEC settings softkeys; displays the Takeoff Data Set
Window when aircraft is parked or taxiing
Selects the continuous thrust rating. Disabled when aircraft is on
CON
the ground.
Selects the maximum climb thrust rating. Disabled when aircraft
CLB
is on the ground.
Increases the takeoff outside air temperature setting in one-degree
OAT ↑
Celsius increments. Disabled when aircraft is in the air.
Decreases the takeoff outside air temperature setting in oneOAT ↓
degree Celsius increments. Disabled when aircraft is in the air.
ATR ON Enables Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR). Disabled when aircraft
is in the air.
Disables Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR). Disabled when aircraft
ATR
is in the air.
OFF
Returns display to previous softkey level
BACK
ACCEPT Confirms the selected takeoff settings
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
AFCS
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Level 3
21
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Level 2
LFE
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Level 1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STATUS
ECS
ELEC
FUEL
ICEPROT
ENG MNT
BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC
Displays traffic information on Navigation Map
TOPO
Displays topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) and
elevation scale on Navigation Map
Displays terrain information on Navigation Map (not available with
TAWS-A)
Displays airways on the map; cycles through the following:
AIRWAYS: No airways are displayed
AIRWY ON: All airways are displayed
AIRWY LO: Only low altitude airways are
displayed
AIRWY HI: Only high altitude airways are
displayed
Displays NEXRAD weather and coverage information on Navigation
Map (optional feature)
Displays XM lightning information on Navigation Map (optional
feature)
Returns to top-level softkeys
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
(Default label
is dependant
on map
setup option
selected)
NEXRAD
APPENDICES
XM LTNG
BACK
INDEX
SHW CHRT
22
Description
Accesses softkeys for manually setting the Landing Field Elevation
(LFE)
FMS LFE Sets current flight plan destination elevation as displayed LFE
+500 FT Increases currently displayed LFE value by 500 ft
-500 FT Decreases currently displayed LFE value by 500 ft
+50 FT Increases currently displayed LFE value by 50 ft
Decreases currently displayed LFE value by 50 ft
-50 FT
ACCEPT Confirms the LFE setting and returns to the previous softkey level
Returns display to previous softkey level
BACK
Displays the System-Status Page
Displays the System-ECS (Environmental Control System) Page
Displays the System-Electrical Page
Displays the System-Fuel Page
Displays the System-Deice Page
Displays the Engine Maintenance Page. Enabled only while
aircraft is on the ground and engines are off.
Returns display to previous softkey level
Enables second-level Navigation Map softkeys
MAP
DCLTR (3)
Level 3
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Declutters land data
DCLTR-2: Declutters land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan
When available, displays optional airport and terminal procedure charts
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
(optional)
MAP
SYSTEM
DCLTR
SHW CHRT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
Figure 1-14 Top Level MFD Softkeys
EAS
MAP
SYSTEM
LFE
STATUS
CON
CLB
-500 FT
+50 FT
OAT ↑
OAT ↓
ELEC
FUEL
ICEPROT
ENG MNT
-50 FT
ATR ON
ATR OFF
BACK
ACCEPT
BACK
BACK
ACCEPT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FMS LFE +500 FT
ECS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENG SET
(optional)
SHW CHRT
DCLTR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-15 System Softkeys
(optional)
SYSTEM
DCLTR
MAP
SHW CHRT
AFCS
DCLTR-1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DCLTR-2
DCLTR-3
TOPO
TERRAIN
(optional)
(optional)
NEXRAD
XM LTNG
AIRWAYS
AIRWY ON
BACK
APPENDICES
TRAFFIC
Select the BACK Softkey on this level to
return to the top softkey level.
AIRWY LO
INDEX
AIRWAY HI
Figure 1-16 MAP Softkeys
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1.4 Secure Digital Cards
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
EAS
The GDU 1240A data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of the
display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. SD cards are used for the various databases
and system software updates as well as terrain database storage.
Install an SD card
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SD Card Slots
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-17 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
24
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.5 System Power-up
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for specific procedures concerning avionics power application
and emergency power supply operation.
EAS
The system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from electrical busses.
The PFDs, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in test features that
exercise the processor, RAM, ROM, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During system initialization, test annunciations are displayed, as shown in Figure 1-18. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within one minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panels, the control units and the display bezels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD, the AHRS begins to initialize and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should
display valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both
while taxiing and during level flight.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-19), the MFD Power-up Page displays the following information:
• System version
• Obstacle database name and version
• Copyright
• Navigation database name, version, and effective dates
• Land database name and version
• Airport Directory name, version and effective dates
• Safe Taxi database information
• FliteCharts/ChartView database information
• Terrain database name and version
AFCS
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and displays the System - Status Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-18 PFD Initialization
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Figure 1-19 MFD Power-up Page
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1.6 System Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The displays are connected via a single Ethernet bus, thus allowing for high-speed communication. As shown
in Figure 1-1. The GIA 63W #1 is connected to PFD1 and GIA 63W #2 is connected to the HSDB switch. This
section discusses the normal and reversionary modes of operation as well as the various AHRS modes of the
system.
In the event of display failure, the display modes are as follows:
• PFD1 failure – MFD enters reversionary mode; PFD2 remains in normal mode.
EAS
• MFD failure – PFD1 and PFD2 enter reversionary mode.
• PFD2 failure – PFD1 and the MFD remain in normal mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Operation
PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In normal mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed, altitude
and vertical speed), thereby replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster. The PFD also offers control for
COM and NAV frequency selection.
MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In normal mode, the right portion of the MFD displays a full-color moving map with navigation information,
while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to engine, fuel, electrical, cabin pressurization, oxygen, landing
gear, and trim/flaps indication.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 1-20 gives an example of the system displays in normal mode.
PFD1
MFD
PFD2
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-20 Normal Operation
26
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reversionary Mode
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
Reversionary mode is a mode of operation in which all important flight information is presented identically
on at least one of the remaining displays (see Figure 1-21). Transition to reversionary mode should be
straightforward for the pilot, for flight parameters are presented in the same format as in normal mode.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-21 Reversionary Mode (Manual)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reversionary mode is activated by pressing the dedicated DISPLAY BACKUP button at the bottom of the
audio panel (see Figure 1-22 and refer to the Audio Panel section for further details). Pressing this button again
deactivates reversionary mode.
AFCS
Pressing the DISPLAY
BACKUP button activates/
deactivates reversionary
mode for both the on-side
PFD and the MFD.
Figure 1-22 DISPLAY BACKUP Button
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each display can be configured to operate in reversionary mode, as follows:
• PFD1 – By pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP button on the left audio panel.
• MFD – By pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP button on the left or the right audio panel.
APPENDICES
• PFD2 – By pressing the DISPLAY BACKUP button on the right audio panel.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
AHRS Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for specific AHRS alert information.
Note: Aggressive maneuvering while the AHRS is not operating normally can degrade AHRS accuracy.
available
unavailable
GPS Data
unavailable
available
available
Attitude/Heading Invalid
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
le
ab
AHRS
no-GPS
Mode
ail
av
AHRS no- AHRS no-Mag/
Mag Mode
no-Air Mode
Heading Invalid
Air Data
un
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Air Data
AHRS Normal
Operation
Magnetometer Data
available
unavailable
available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Magnetometer Data
unavailable
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
In addition to using internal sensors, the GRS 77 AHRS uses GPS information, magnetic field data and air
data to assist in attitude/heading calculations. In normal mode, the AHRS relies upon GPS and magnetic
field measurements. If either of these external measurements is unavailable or invalid, the AHRS uses air
data information for attitude determination. Four AHRS modes of operation are available (see Figure 1-23)
and depend upon the combination of available sensor inputs. Loss of air data, GPS, or magnetometer sensor
inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts.
APPENDICES
Figure 1-23 AHRS Operation
GPS Input Failure
Note: In-flight initialization of AHRS, when operating without any valid source of GPS data and at true
INDEX
air speed values greater than approximately 200 knots, is not guaranteed. Under these rare conditions, it
is possible for in-flight AHRS initialization to take an indefinite amount of time which would result in an
extended period of time where valid AHRS outputs are unavailable.
28
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The system provides two sources of GPS information. If a single GPS receiver fails, or if the information provided
from one of the GPS receivers is unreliable, the AHRS seamlessly transitions to using the other GPS receiver. An
alert message informs the pilot of the use of the backup GPS path. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS continues to
operate in reversionary No-GPS mode so long as the air data and magnetometer inputs are available and valid.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Air Data Input Failure
A failure of the air data input has no effect on AHRS output while AHRS is operating in normal mode. A failure
of the air data input while the AHRS is operating in reversionary No-GPS mode results in invalid attitude and
heading information on the PFD (as indicated by red “X” flags).
EAS
Magnetometer Failure
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS transitions to one of the reversionary No-Magnetometer modes and
continues to output valid attitude information. However, if the aircraft is airborne, the heading output on the
PFD does become invalid (as indicated by a red “X”).
Prodigy™ System Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Airplane
Flight Manual (AFM) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red “X” is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data (Figure 1-24 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). Upon system power-up, certain windows
remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All windows should be operational within one minute of powerup. If any window remains flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
GRS 77 AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
APPENDICES
Pressure Controller
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
& GSD 71 Data
Concentrator
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units &
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
AFCS
FADEC
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
GTX 33/D Transponder
Or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
Figure 1-24 System Failure Annunciations
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
29
INDEX
FADEC
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Receiver Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Overview
GPS1 provides information to the pilot-side PFD and GPS2 provides data to the copilot-side PFD. Internal
system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFDs. In some
circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing a better
GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better solution will be
automatically coupled to both PFDs. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” will then be displayed in the
Reversionary Sensor Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver is being used. Both GPS receivers
are still functioning properly, but one receiver is performing better than the other at that particular time.
EAS
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (GIA) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 GIA or GPS2 for the #2 GIA) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired a WAAS signal. While
the aircraft is on the ground, the WAAS signal may be blocked by obstructions causing one GPS receiver to
have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning the aircraft may result in one of the GPS
receivers temporarily losing the WAAS signal.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.7 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
2) Use the small FMS Knob to select GPS Status Page.
Selecting the GPS receiver for which data may be reviewed:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - GPS Status Page.
AFCS
2) To change the selected GPS receiver:
a) Press the desired GPS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
30
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
Satellite Signal
Information Status
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
GPS Receiver
Status
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
SBAS
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite Signal
Strength Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS Selection
Softkeys
RAIM Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SBAS Softkey
Selected
Figure 1-25 GPS Status Page (RAIM or SBAS Selected)
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Satellite constellation diagram
AFCS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite signal information status
APPENDICES
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
INDEX
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
• GPS receiver status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
EAS
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D navigational GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
will indicate INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status will indicate 3D DIFF NAV and
SBAS will indicate ACTIVE.
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is selected)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction will not be necessary. However, in some cases, the selected
approach may be outside the WAAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for
the intended approach.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
AFCS
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, select the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
APPENDICES
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.7 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the system.
Or:
INDEX
a) Use the large FMS Knob to scroll to the Most Recent Waypoints List.
b) Use the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint in the list and press the ENT Key. The sysetm
automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
32
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
Or:
a) To use the present position, press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is selected)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS or MSAS coverage
area, it may be desirable to disable WAAS or MSAS (although it is not recommended). When disabled, the
SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a small delay for the GPS Status box to
be updated upon WAAS and MSAS enabling/disabling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Disabling WAAS or MSAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to hightlight ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
APPENDICES
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
INDEX
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
1.7 Accessing System Functionality
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Menus
EAS
The system has a MENU Key that, when pressed, displays a context-sensitive list of options. This options list
allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to the currently
displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to additional
submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘NO OPTIONS’ when there are
no options for the window/page selected. The main controls used in association with all window/page group
operations are described in section 1.3. Softkey selection does not display menus or submenus.
Navigating the Page Menu Window:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar appears to the right of the window
when the option list is longer than the window).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) The CLR Key may be pressed to remove the menu and cancel the operation. Pressing the FMS Knob also
removes the displayed menu.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options with NRST
Window Displayed on
the PFD
AFCS
Options with FPL
Window Displayed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-26 Page Menu Examples
34
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD Page Groups
Note: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
EAS
Active Page Title
Page Group
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, a page group window is displayed by turning either FMS Knob. The page group tabs
are displayed along the bottom of the window. The page titles are displayed in a list above the page group tabs.
The current page group and current page within the group are shown in light blue. For some of these pages
(Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure Loading), the active title of the page changes while
the page name in the list remains the same.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pages in
Current
Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page Groups
Figure 1-27 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
APPENDICES
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Map Pages (MAP)
Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map
Weather Radar
(optional)
Weather Data Link
(service optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
TAWS-B/TAWS-A
(TAWS-A optional)
Figure 1-28 Map Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Waypoint Pages (WPT)
Airport Information pages
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Airport Directory
(INFO-2 Softkey)
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
AFCS
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Weather Information
(WX Softkey)
Intersection Information
NDB Information
Airport
Information
Pages
APPENDICES
VOR Information
User Waypoint Information
INDEX
Figure 1-29 Waypoint Pages
36
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auxiliary Pages (AUX)
Weight Planning
Trip Planning
GPS Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auxiliary
Communications
Pages
Utility
System Setup
XM Satellite pages
EAS
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
Auxiliary Communications
- Telephone
(TEL Softkey)
- Report Status
(REPORT Softkey)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
XM
Satellite
Pages
- WI-FI Setup
(WI-FI Softkey)
System Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-30 Auxiliary Pages
The Flight Plan Pages may also be accessed using the FPL Key on the MFD.
AFCS
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Wide View, Narrow View
(VIEW Softkey)
Flight Plan Catalog
or
APPENDICES
Stored Flight Plan (NEW Softkey)
INDEX
Figure 1-31 Flight Plan Pages
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
System Pages (SYS)
System Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Environmental Control
System
Electrical System
Fuel System
Ice Protection System
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Engine Maintenance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-32 System Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Checklist Page may be accessed from the page group tab or the CHKLIST Softkey. See the Additional
Features section for a discussion on using the Checklist Page.
Nearest Pages (NRST)
AFCS
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
APPENDICES
Nearest Airspaces
INDEX
Figure 1-33 Nearest Pages
38
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In addition to the page groups previously addressed, there are pages for loading procedures which are accessed
by pressing the PROC Key on the MFD bezel. In some instances, softkeys may be used to access the Procedure
Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A menu is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure
Loading Page is opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
Procedure Pages
(PROC)
EAS
Departure Loading
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-34 Procedure Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For some of these pages (Airport Information pages, XM Satellite pages, Procedure pages), the title of the page
may change.
MFD System Pages
AFCS
In the Auxiliary (AUX) Page Group, there are two system pages: System Setup and System Status. The System
Setup Page allows management of various system parameters, while the System Status Page displays the status
of all system LRUs.
System Setup Page
The System Setup Page allows management of the following system parameters:
• Page Navigation
• Date/time
• MFD Data Bar Fields (Navigation Status Box)
(see Flight Management Section)
• Baro Transition Alert (see Flight Instruments
Section)
• Airspace Alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Arrival Alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Flight Director
190-00728-02 Rev. A
• COM Configuration
(see Audio Panel and CNS Section)
• Nearest Airports display criteria
(see Flight Management Section)
INDEX
• Audio Alerts
• GPS CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see Flight Instruments Section)
APPENDICES
• Display Units
(see Flight Instruments Section)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Pilot Profiles
• Synchronization of Baro and CDI between PFDs
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
39
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Figure 1-35 System Setup Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pilot Profiles
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD power-up screen (Figure 1-19). The system can store up to 25 profiles;
the currently active profile, the amount of memory used, and the amount of memory available are shown at
the top of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created,
selected, renamed, or deleted.
Figure 1-36 Pilot Profiles (System Setup Page)
40
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
EAS
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
Selecting an active profile:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
6) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
Renaming a profile:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Deleting a profile:
NOTE: The profile that is currently active cannot be deleted. If this is the desired profile to delete, select
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
another profile, then delete the desired profile.
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
EAS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Date/Time
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Date/Time Box on the System Setup Page displays the current date and time and allows the pilot to set
the time format (local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC) and offset. The time offset is used to define current local
time. UTC (also called GMT or Zulu) date and time are calculated directly from the GPS satellites signals
and cannot be changed. When using a local time format, designate the offset by adding or subtracting the
desired number of hours.
Setting the system time format:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time format field in the Date/Time Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired system time format (local 12hr, local 24hr, UTC) and press the
ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Setting the current time offset:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the time offset field in the Date/Time Box.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Enter the time offset and press the ENT Key.
42
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Display Units
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Display Units Box on the System Setup Page shows the configured units of measure used for each
category. Only the Nav angle, ALT,VS, and POSITION are pilot selectable. The following indicates the
system parameters affected by changes within that category.
• Nav angle (magnetic, true)
When set to ‘MAGNETIC’, magnetic variation is figured into the displayed value. When ‘TRUE’ is
selected, no magnetic variation is calculated and a ‘T’ is displayed next to the value.
Affects the BRG field in the PFD Navigation Status Box.
EAS
Affects Current Heading, Selected Heading, and Selected Course boxes on the PFD.
Affects the BRG, DTK, TKE, TRK, and XTK fields in the MFD Navigation Status Box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Altitude and vertical speed (feet, meters)
Affects all altitude and elevation displays on the MFD, with the exception of VNV altitudes on the
Active Flight Plan Page.
• Position (HDDD°MM.MM’, HDDD°MM’SS.S”)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Affects all position displays.
To change a Display Units setting:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Display Units Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select from a list of measurement units and press the ENT Key when the desired
unit is highlighted. Press the CLR Key to cancel the action without changing the units.
BARO Transition Alert
AFCS
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on setting the Baro Transition Alert.
Airspace Alerts
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on
or off. This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries
depicted on the MFD Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft
is approaching or near an airspace.
Alerts for the following airspaces can be turned on/off in the Airspace Alerts Box:
• Restricted
• Class C/TCA
• MOA (Military)
• Class D
• Other/ADIZ
APPENDICES
• Class B/TMA
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
43
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For
example, if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an
alert message will not be generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and
projected to enter it, the pilot is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer
is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
EAS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turn an airspace alert on or off
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
Arrival Alerts
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Arrival Alert Box on the System Setup Page allows arrival alerts to be turned on/off and the alert
trigger distance set. An arrival alert can be set to notify the pilot with a message upon reaching a userspecified distance from the final destination (the direct-to waypoint or the last waypoint in a flight plan).
Once the set distance (up to 99.9 units) has been reached, an “Arriving at waypoint” message is displayed
in the PFD Navigation Status Box.
Enabling/disabling an arrival alert:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ON/OFF field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
APPENDICES
Changing the arrival alert trigger distance:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the distance field in the Arrival Alert Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter a trigger distance and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
44
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Director
Two formats are available for the display of the flight director. Single Cue or X-Pointer may be selected.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To change the flight director format:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Format Active field in the Flight Director Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and highlight the desired flight director format and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
EAS
Page Navigation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS Knob
navigates through the pages listed within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to display the
Page Group Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the Page Navigation box on the AUX
- System Setup Page.
OFF – Displays the Page Group Tabs with one click of either FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ON – Displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates to the next tab with one click of either FMS Knob.
The pilot can select, from the AUX - System Setup Page, the amount of time the Page Group Tabs are
displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten seconds.
Selecting page navigation settings:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ field in the Page Navigation Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’.
AFCS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ field in the Page navigation Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
7) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD Data Bar Fields
APPENDICES
The MFD Data Bar Fields Box on the System Setup Page displays the current configuration of the MFD
Navigation Status Box. By default, the Navigation Status Bar is set to display ground speed (GS), distance
to next waypoint (DIS), estimated time enroute (ETE), and enroute safe altitude (ESA).
Changing the information shown in an MFD Navigation Status Bar field:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list and press the ENT Key when the
desired data selection is highlighted.
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following data may be selected for display in each of the four fields of the Navigation Status Box.
• Bearing (BRG)
• Fuel Over Destination (FOD)
• Distance (DIS)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• En Route Safe Altitude (ESA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Endurance (END)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Track (TRK)
• Estimated Time En Route (ETE)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
• Fuel On Board (FOB)
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to define the range for the on-screen course
deviation indicator (CDI). The range values represent full range deflection for the CDI to either side. The
default setting is ‘AUTO’. At this setting, leaving the departure airport the CDI range is set to 1.0 nm and
gradually ramps up to 2 nm beyond 30 nm from the departure airport. The CDI range is set to 2.0 nautical
miles during the en route phase of flight. Within 30 nm of the destination airport, the CDI range gradually
ramps down to 1.0 nm (terminal area). During approach operations, the CDI range ramps down even
further to 0.3 nm. This transition normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the final approach fix (FAF).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS CDI
If a lower CDI range setting is selected (i.e., 1.0 or 0.3 nm), the higher range settings are not selected
during any phase of flight. For example, if 1.0 nm is selected, the system uses this for en route and terminal
phases and ramps down to 0.3 nm during an approach. Note that the Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI range and corresponding flight phases.
The GPS CDI Box on the System Setup Page displays the following:
AFCS
• Selected CDI range (auto, 2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
• Current system CDI range (2 nm, 1 nm, 0.3 nm)
Changing the CDI range:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the selected field in the GPS CDI Box.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the range list and press the ENT Key when the desired
selection is highlighted.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
46
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COM Configuration
NOTE: 8.33 kHz VHF communication frequency channel spacing is not required for use in the United States.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select the 25.0 kHz channel spacing option for use in the United States.
The COM Configuration Box on the System Setup Page allows the pilot to select 8.33 kHz or 25.0 kHz
COM frequency channel spacing.
Changing COM channel spacing:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
EAS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the channel spacing field in the COM Configuration Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired spacing and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
Nearest Airports
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the nine nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that
are not of appropriate surface from being displayed. Default settings are zero feet (or meters) for runway
length and “HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
Selecting the nearest airport surface matching criteria (any, hard only, hard/soft):
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the runway options (any, hard only, hard/soft) and press
the ENT Key when the desired selection is highlighted.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
Selecting the nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) While on the System Setup Page, press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
APPENDICES
CDI/BARO Synchronization
See the Flight Instruments section for a discussion on synchronizing both PFD’s Course Deviation
Indicators and the altimeter barometric settings.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
System Status Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check
marks and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and an Embraer service center
or Garmin dealer informed.
Figure 1-37 System Status Page
AFCS
The LRU and ARFRM, Softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the DATABASE window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the
MFD. Selecting the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is
now displayed in the DATABASE window. Selecting the softkey a third time will change the softkey label to
PFD2 DB. PFD 2 database information is now displayed in the DATABASE window.
APPENDICES
The ANN TEST Softkey, when selected, causes an annunciation test tone to be played.
INDEX
Selecting the SYNC DBS Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected)
activates the Automatic Database Synchronization feature. When this feature is active, databases are
updated automatically in the MFD and both PFDs from one SD card. For a detailed discussion on database
synchronization, see the SD Card Use section in the Appendices.
48
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Utility Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For flight planning purposes, timers, trip statistics, and a scheduler feature are provided on the AUX - Utility
Page. The timers available include a stopwatch-like generic timer, a total time in flight timer, and a record of the
time of departure. Trip statistics—odometer, trip odometer, and average trip and maximum groundspeeds—are
displayed from the time of the last reset. A scheduler feature is also provided so the pilot can enter reminder
messages to be displayed at specified intervals in the Messages Window on the PFD (see Figure 1-38).
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-38 Utility Page
AFCS
Timers
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the
countdown on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before
reaching zero on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when
reset, the digits are zeroed.
Setting the generic timer:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a desired starting time is desired:
INDEX
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the
aircraft lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
EAS
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time
to be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset
to display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled
from the System Setup Page.
AFCS
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
APPENDICES
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) Use the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
50
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Trip Statistics
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The odometer and trip odometer record the total mileage traveled from the last reset; these odometers can
be reset independently. Resetting the trip odometer also resets the average trip groundspeed. Maximum
groundspeed for the period of time since the last reset is also displayed.
Resetting trip statistics readouts:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key. The following reset options for trip statistics are displayed:
EAS
• Reset Trip ODOM/AVG GS—Resets trip average ground speed readout and odometer
• Reset Odometer—Resets odometer readout only
• Reset Maximum Speed—Resets maximum speed readout only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Reset All—Resets flight timer, departure timer, odometers, and groundspeed readouts
2) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the desired reset option and press the ENT Key. The selected parameters are reset
to zero and begin to display data from the point of reset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Data Logger
This feature is not available on the Phenom 100.
Scheduler
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages. Messages can be set to display
based on a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting),
or recurrently whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting
automatically reset to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled,
messages are retained until deleted, and message timer countdown is restarted.
AFCS
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to ‘Type’.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
INDEX
8) For periodic and one-time message, enter the timer value (HHH:MM:SS) from which to countdown and press the
ENT Key.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
9) For event-based messages:
a) Enter the desired date (DD-MMM-YYY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
EAS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key to confirm message deletion.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. Pressing the MSG Softkey opens the
Messages Window and acknowledges the scheduler message. When MSG Softkey is pressed again, the
Messages Window is removed from the display and the scheduler message is deleted from the message
queue.
INDEX
Figure 1-39 PFD Message Window
52
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
System Overview
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.8 Display Backlighting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system display and control backlighting can be adjusted either automatically or manually. Backlighting
intensity ranges from 0.14% to 100% on the PFDs and 0.80% to 100.00% on the MFD.
Automatic Adjustment
EAS
The existing instrument panel dimmer bus normally controls the PFD and MFD backlighting as well as
the PFD and MFD bezels, MFD Control Unit, AFCS Control Unit and audio panel key annunciator lighting.
When the dimmer bus is not used by the system, photocell technology automatically controls backlighting
adjustments. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize display appearance through a broad
range of cockpit lighting conditions.
Manual Adjustment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: The avionics dimming knob may also be used to adjust backlighting. Refer to the AFM for details.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: In normal mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from PFD1 or PFD2. In reversionary mode, it can
also be adjusted from the MFD.
NOTE: No other window can be displayed on the PFD while the PFD Setup Menu Window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Backlighting may also be adjusted manually for all of the displays and the associated bezels. The audio panel
key backlighting is directly tied to the on-side PFD key backlighting setting.
Adjust display backlighting manually:
1) Press the MENU Key on the PFD to display the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ becomes highlighted to the
right of ‘PFD1 DSPL’.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-40 Manual Display Backlighting Adjustment
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection box. Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’, then press the
ENT Key. The intensity value becomes highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired backlighting, then press the ENT Key.
INDEX
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ to the right of ‘MFD DSPL’ or ‘PFD2 DSPL’, respectively, and
repeat steps 2 and 3.
5) Press the CLR or MENU Key to remove the PFD Setup Menu Window from the display.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Overview
Adjust key backlighting manually:
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key on the PFD to display the PFD Setup Menu Window. ‘AUTO’ becomes highlighted to the
right of ‘PFD1 DSPL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-41 Manual Key Lighting Adjustment
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD1 DSPL’. Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green
arrowhead to display ‘PFD1 KEY’.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ and turn the small FMS Knob to display the selection box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’, then press the ENT Key. The intensity value becomes highlighted.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired backlighting, then press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’ or ‘PFD2 DSPL’ and turn the small FMS Knob in the direction
of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ or ‘PFD2 KEY’, respectively.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Repeat steps 3 to 5.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the CLR or MENU Key to remove the PFD Setup Menu Window from the display.
54
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 2 Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
Note: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and indicators (bug) on
selected flight instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these indicators (bug) and readouts, as
they appear on the display during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Increased situational awareness is provided by replacing the traditional instruments on the panel with two easyto-scan Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) that feature large horizons, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFDs and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on each PFD:
• Static Air Temperature (SAT)
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Airspeed awareness ranges
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Vspeed reference flags
– Navigation source
– Groundspeed
– Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
– Mach number
– Bearing pointers and information windows
– Airspeed reference and bug
– DME Information Windows
• Transponder Mode, Code, and Ident/Reply
• Altimeter, showing
• Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
AFCS
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid indication
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– True airspeed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Horizontal Situation Indicator, showing
– Indicated airspeed
• Timer/References Window, showing
– Trend vector
– Generic timer
– Selected Altitude
– Vspeed values
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
– Barometric setting
– Barometric minimum descent altitude (MDA)
• Wind data
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
• Radar Altimeter (RA) (optional)
APPENDICES
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope, and Glidepath
Indicators
• Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications
• Total Air Temperature (TAT)
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The PFDs also display various alerts and annunciations.
55
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
27
26
25
24
23
1
2
22
21
20
EAS
3
19
4
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
6
18
7
17
8
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9
15
10
14
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11
13
12
1
NAV Frequency Box
15
Transponder Status Box
2
Airspeed Reference
16
Heading Bug
3
Airspeed Indicator
17
Turn Rate Indicator
4
Airspeed Reference Bug
18
Barometric Altimeter Setting
5
Mach Number
19
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
6
Groundspeed
20
Selected Altitude Bug
7
Current Heading
21
Altimeter
8
Current Track Indicator
22
Selected Altitude
9
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
23
COM Frequency Box
10
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
24
Navigation Status Box
11
Total Air Temperature (TAT)
25
AFCS Status Box
12
Static Air Temperature (SAT)
26
Slip/Skid Indicator
13
Softkeys
27
Attitude Indicator
14
System Time
INDEX
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
56
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
15
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
14
2
EAS
13
12
3
11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
10
5
9
6
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7
7
Traffic Annunciation
9
2
Vspeed Reference
10
3
Radar Altimeter (optional)
4
Selected Heading
5
Wind Data
6
Inset Map
7
DME Information Windows
8
Bearing Information Windows
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
Flight Plan Window
Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height
11 CAS Window
Selected Course
13
Current Vertical Speed
14
Glidepath Indicator
15
Terrain Annunciation
AFCS
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-2 Additional PFD Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
2.1 Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspeed Indicator
Note: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
EAS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The numeric labels and
major tick marks on the moving tape are marked at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving
tape are marked at intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 80 knots of airspeed scale
viewable at any time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black
until reaching maximum operating speed (VMO/MMO), at which point it turns red along with the Mach number
readout.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Mach number is displayed below the Airspeed Indicator (Figure 2-3) for airspeeds at or above Mach 0.4
or at altitudes above 27,960 feet. The color of the readout is the same as the color of the airspeed pointer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Reference
Airspeed
Trend Vector
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Indicated
Airspeed
Vspeed
References
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
AFCS
Ground
Speed
Red Pointer Showing
Overspeed
Mach
Number
Airspeed Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
APPENDICES
A red range is also present for low speed awareness velocity (VLSA). An aural stall warning is generated if
the airspeed falls below VLSA. An open green circle on the airspeed tape represents 1.3VS1. The green circle is
displayed when in the air and it indicates the stall warning system is functioning correctly.
INDEX
Speeds above the maximum operating speed, VMO or MMO depending on aircraft altitude, appear in the high
speed awareness range, shown on the airspeed tape by a red/white barber pole. An aural overspeed warning
tone is generated if the airspeed exceeds the high airspeed limit.
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
58
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VMO/
MMO, the airspeed pointer and the Mach readout changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed
remains constant or if any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Reference is displayed above the Airspeed Indicator in the box indicated by a selection bug
symbol. A bug corresponding to this speed is shown on the tape. If the Airspeed Reference exceeds the range
shown on the tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. See the AFCS Section for more
information about the Airspeed Reference.
Takeoff
Landing
1
VR
R
V2
2
VFS
FS
VAP
AP
VREF
RF
VAC
AC
VFS
FS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
V1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flag
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vspeed
EAS
Vspeeds can be changed and their flags turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. When active (on),
the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the airspeed scale. By default, all Vspeed
values are reset and all flags turned off during power up.
Table 2-1 Vspeed Flag Labels
AFCS
Vspeeds are categorized as either takeoff or landing. Takeoff Vspeed flags are automatically turned off when
airspeed reaches 160 knots. The order in which the categories are displayed is determined by whether the
aircraft is on the ground or in the air. If the aircraft is on the ground, the takeoff Vspeeds are displayed at the
top of the Vspeed list. If the aircraft is in the air, the landing Vspeeds are displayed at the top.
Changing Vspeeds and turning flags on/off:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired Vspeed.
APPENDICES
3) Use the small FMS Knob to change the Vspeed in 1-kt increments (when a speed has been changed from a
default value, an asterisk appears next to the speed).
4) Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
6) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
59
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
EAS
Figure 2-4 Takeoff and Landing Vspeeds (Timer/References Window)
Vspeed flags can be turned on or off all at once or by category (takeoff and landing). Default values for all or
a category of Vspeeds can also be restored.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Modifying Vspeeds (on, off, restore defaults):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection (Figure 2-5).
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-5 Timer/References Window Menu
60
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Attitude Indicator
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9
8
1
7
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
5
Aircraft Symbol
(Formatted for Single-cue
Command Bars)
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
6
3
4
5
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Roll Pointer
EAS
2
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-6 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the Synthetic Vision System is activated, the pitch scale is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚
down; refer to the Additional Features section.
AFCS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. Angle of bank is indicated by the position
of the pointer on the roll scale.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. One bar displacement is equal to one ball
displacement on a traditional inclinometer. The indicator bar moves with the roll pointer and moves laterally
away from the pointer to indicate uncoordinated flight. Slip (inside the turn) or skid (outside the turn) is
indicated by the location of the bar relative to the pointer.
In TCAS II installations, the Attitude Indicator also provides pitch cues to comply with TCAS II Resolution
Advisories; see the Hazard Avoidance Section for details.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-7 Slip/Skid Indication
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The yellow symbolic aircraft on the Attitude Indicator changes appearance based on selection of AFCS flight
director Command Bar format (see the AFCS Section for details). Both PFDs show the same Command Bar
format and Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bar format (single-cue or cross-pointer) may be selected from the
AUX - System Setup Page Figure 2-8.
Changing Command Bar and Aircraft Symbol format:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EAS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Format Active selection in the Flight Director box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
5) Select the SNGL CUE option to display Command Bars as a single cue (Figure 2-6).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select the X POINTR option to display Command Bars as a cross pointer shown below.
APPENDICES
Single-cue
Cross-pointer
INDEX
Figure 2-8 Flight Director Format
(AUX - System Setup Page)
62
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altimeter
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude (Figure 2-10). See the AFCS Section for more information about
Selected Altitude.
EAS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape. The end extends to the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments (increments reduce to 10 feet for
approach) up to the aircraft’s service ceiling.
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected
Altitude.
Indicated
Altitude
AFCS
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Barometric
Minimums
Bug
Barometric
Setting Box
(In Hg)
APPENDICES
Figure 2-9 Altimeter Settings, In Hg
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters. Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Figure 2-10 Altimeter Setting in hPa and Altitude in Meters
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical deviation, moving
the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to re-establish on the
descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude, the aircraft may not
re‑establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg) (Figure 2-9).
Or: Press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa) (Figure 2-10).
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey twice to return to the top-level softkeys.
64
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting standard barometric pressure (29.92 in Hg):
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure.
Or:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in barometric setting box.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-11 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the barometric altimeter settings differ between PFDs by more than 0.02 in Hg, the readouts turn yellow.
Once the settings are synchronized (BARO turned on), they remain synchronized until the setting is turned
off.
Synchronizing the altimeter barometric pressure settings:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Baro in the Synchronization box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AFCS
Barometric Settings
not Synchronized on PFD
Displayed in Yellow
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-12 Baro Sync Setting
(AUX - System Setup Page)
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to notify the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the baro transition altitude. If the aircraft is at least 500 feet below the transition altitude and then climbs
through this altitude and the STD BARO Softkey has not been pressed, the barometric pressure setting flashes
in light blue until the pressure setting is changed. If the aircraft is at least 500 feet above the transition altitude
and then descends through this altitude and the barometric pressure setting has not been changed from STD
BARO, the setting flashes in light blue until it is changed.
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
EAS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Altitude in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to change the desired altitude and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-13 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
66
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed on a fixed scale with labels at 2000 and
4000 fpm and minor tick marks every 1000 fpm. Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate
is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent exceeds 4000 fpm, the pointer appears at the edge of the
tape and the rate appears inside the pointer.
EAS
A magenta chevron is displayed on the VSI to indicate the Required Vertical Speed for reaching a VNV target
altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has generated. See the Flight Management
and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. Refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more
information about VNV indications on the PFD. In TCAS II installations, the VSI also provides vertical speed
guidance during TCAS II Resolution Advisories; see the Hazard Avoidance section for details.
Vertical Deviation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) is a magenta chevron indicating the baro-VNV vertical deviation when
Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used. The VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute”
alert. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management
Section for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information
about VNV indications on the PFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Glideslope Indicator appears to the left of the altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned in the active
NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107˚. A green diamond acts as the Glideslope
Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned and there is no
glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The glidepath is analogous to the glideslope for GPS approaches supporting WAAS vertical guidance (LNAV+V,
L/VNAV, LPV). When an approach of this type is loaded into the flight plan and GPS is the selected navigation
source, the Glidepath Indicator appears as a magenta diamond during the approach. If the approach type
downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of the diamond.
Full-scale deflection of two dots is 1000 feet.
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glidepath
Indicator
APPENDICES
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
AFCS
VNV
Target
Altitude
Glideslope
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Glideslope Indicator
INDEX
Vertical Speed and Deviation
Indicator (VSI and VDI)
Glidepath Indicator
Figure 2-14 Vertical Speed and Vertical Deviation Indications
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points with numeric labels every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor tick
marks are at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information. The HSI is available in two formats, a 360˚ compass rose and a
140˚ arc.
Changing the HSI display format:
EAS
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
16
15
14
1
2
13
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
4
6
11
7
10
9
8
1
Turn Rate Indicator
9
To/From Indicator
2
Selected Heading
10
Course Pointer
3
Current Track Indicator
11
Heading Bug
4
Lateral Deviation Scale
12
Flight Phase
5
Navigation Source
13
Selected Course
6
Aircraft Symbol
14
7
Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
Rotating Compass Rose
16
APPENDICES
AFCS
12
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5
INDEX
8
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
15 Current Heading
Lubber Line
Figure 2-15 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
68
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Course Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
combined To/From Indicator and a sliding deviation indicator, and a deviation scale. Upon station passage, the
To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like a conventional To/From flag. Depending
on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two different ways, an arrowhead (GPS, VOR,
OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Flight Phase Annunciation
Navigation
Source
EAS
Course Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-16 Arc HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI. The current track is represented on the
HSI by a magenta diamond. To the upper left of the HSI, the Selected Heading is shown in light blue; the light
blue bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. The Selected Course is shown to the upper
right of the HSI. The color of the Selected Course corresponds to the selected navigation source (magenta for
GPS and green for VOR or LOC).
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading on both PFDs.
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course (for each PFD).
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station.
Current Track Indicator
AFCS
Current Heading
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected
Course
Selected
Heading
Heading
Bug
APPENDICES
Figure 2-17 Heading and Course Indications
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
EAS
Figure 2-18 Heading and Course Indications (True)
Changing the navigation angle true/magnetic setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-19 System Setup Page, Navigation Angle Settings
70
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Turn Rate Indicator
Half-standard
Turn Rate
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass rose. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in six seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
EAS
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
Standard
Turn Rate
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-20 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
Bearing Pointers and Information Windows
Frequency
Distance
Bearing 1
Pointer
Bearing 2
Pointer
Tuning Mode
Frequency
No Signal
DME1 Information Window
DME2 Information Window
AFCS
Distance to
Bearing Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Two bearing pointers and associated information can be displayed on the HSI for NAV, GPS, and ADF
sources. The bearing pointers are light blue and are single-line (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer
symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the navigation source. The bearing pointers never
override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected
but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
No
Waypoint
Selected
Station
Identifier
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pointer
Icon
Pointer
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
Bearing
Source
APPENDICES
Bearing
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
Figure 2-21 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS, ADF)
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG1 = single line, BRG2 = double line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
EAS
When the NAV radio is tuned to an ILS frequency the bearing source and the bearing pointer is removed
from the HSI. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the station
identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier is
displayed instead of a frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and NO DATA is displayed in the information window if
the NAV radio is not receiving a VOR station or if GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not
selected.
When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
5) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, select the BRG Softkey again.
2) Press a BRG Softkey to display the desired bearing pointer and information window with a NAV source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to GPS.
4) Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to ADF (ADF Radio installation is optional).
DME Information Windows
AFCS
The DME Information Windows are displayed above each BRG Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and
in boxes along side and above the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME1 or DME2 Softkey to display the DME Information Windows.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) To remove the DME Information Windows, press the applicable DME Softkey again.
72
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
NOTE: During a heading change of greater than 105˚ with respect to the course, the CDI on the Arc HSI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
switches to the opposite side of the deviation scale and displays reverse sensing.
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
Navigation
Source
EAS
360º HSI
Arc HSI
Flight
Phase
Navigation
Source
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight
Phase
Scale
CDI
CDI
Scale
CDI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Crosstrack
Error
Figure 2-22 Course Deviation Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR/LOC). The color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta for GPS or green for VOR and LOC. The full scale limits for the CDI are defined by
a GPS-derived distance when navigating GPS. When navigating using a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has
the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI. If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots)
while navigating with GPS, the crosstrack error (XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow
Indicates
Navigation
Source
Selected on
Both PFDs not
Synchronized
APPENDICES
Figure 2-23 Navigation Sources
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. This places the light blue tuning box over the
NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left corner of the PFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. This places the light blue tuning
box over the NAV2 standby frequency.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
EAS
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the CDI Softkey
Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-24 Selecting a Navigation Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling accordingly
when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
AFCS
• The Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (VTF) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source. GPS steering guidance is not
provided after the switch.
74
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the same VOR/LOC navigation source is selected on both PFDs, the navigation source annunciation turns
yellow on both displays if not synchronized (Figure 2-23). Once the CDIs are synchronized (CDI Synchronization
turned on), they remain synchronized until the selection is changed. When turning on the system for use, the
system remembers the last CDI synchronization setting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Synchronizing the CDIs:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight CDI in the Synchronization box.
EAS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-25 System Setup Page, CDI Synchronization
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
GPS CDI Scaling
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, HDG LEG is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EAS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as System CDI on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly
and the selected setting is displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-26 System Setup Page, GPS CDI Setting
76
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Missed
Approach
EAS
Departure
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
When set to Auto (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-27, Table 2-2).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-27 Automatic CDI Scaling
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
(see Glossary for leg type definitions)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
AFCS
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
APPENDICES
- When navigating with an active arrival route, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change until the
aircraft arrives at the first waypoint in the arrive route (if within 31 nm from the destination airport).
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (Figures 2-28 and 2-29). This transition normally
occurs within 2.0 nm of the Final Approach Fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling automatically
once the approach procedure is active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
77
2 nm
FAF
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
EAS
angle based
on database
information
course width
angle set
by system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
350 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-28 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach CDI Scaling
Figure 2-29 Typical LNAV/VNAV and LPV Approach CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
Approach
(Non-precision)
LNAV
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Approach
(Non-precision with
Vertical Guidance)
Approach
(LNAV/VNAV)
Approach
(LPV)
Missed Approach
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (Figure 2-28)
LNAV + V
L/VNAV
LPV
MAPR
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (Figure 2-29)
0.3 nm
APPENDICES
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
INDEX
Table 2-2 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
78
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS Mode
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current Active-to waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. OBS is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EAS
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the Active-to waypoint on the moving map. If
desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-30 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press the CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label changes
to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-31. Selecting the SUSP Softkey, deactivates the
suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SUSP Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the SUSP Softkey
Suspends Automatic
Waypoint Sequencing
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-31 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
80
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data
Note: Selecting the DFLTS Softkey turns off metric altimeter display, the Inset Map, and wind data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFDs also display various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
Temperature Displays
EAS
The Total and Static air temperatures (TAT and SAT) are displayed in the lower left of the PFD under normal
conditions, or underneath the Airspeed Indicator in reversionary display mode. Both are displayed in degrees
Celsius (°C) or Fahrenheit (°F) as configured by the installation personnel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Normal
Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reversionary
Mode
APPENDICES
Figure 2-32 Total and Static Air Temperatures
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Wind Data
Option 1
Option 2
Option 3
No Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Valid wind data can be displayed in three different ways:
Figure 2-33 Wind Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying wind data:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data below the Selected Heading.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrows with numeric headwind/tailwind and crosswind components
AFCS
• OPTN 2: Wind direction arrow and numeric speed
• OPTN 3: Wind direction arrow with numeric True direction and speed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
82
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in Table 2-3.
Top of Descent Message
EAS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical Speed
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Enroute
Phase of
Flight
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-34 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
VNV Indication Removed
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey selected on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
AFCS
Criteria
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 2-3 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
Prodigytm System Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
The System Messages Window conveys messages to the flight crew regarding problems with the ProdigyTM
System. When a new message is issued, the MSG Softkey flashes to alert the flight crew. It continues to flash
until selected, which opens the System Messages Window and acknowledges the message(s) which initiated
the flashing. When the window is open, messages for which the trigger conditions no longer exist turn gray.
Messages generated while the window is open are not automatically displayed, but cause the MSG Softkey to
begin flashing again. Pressing the MSG Softkey while the System Messages Window is open closes the window,
unless the MSG Softkey is flashing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Critical values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If differences in the sensors
exceed a specified amount, the Comparator Window appears in the upper right corner of the PFD and the
discrepancy is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a MISCOMP (miscompare). If one or both of the
sensed values are unavailable, it is annunciated as a NO COMP (no compare).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window on the right side of the PFD. These annunciations
reflect reversionary sensors selected on one or both PFDs. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey accesses the ADC1,
ADC2, ADCSTBY, AHRS1, AHRS2, and ATTSTBY softkeys. These softkeys allow switching of the sensors
being viewed on each PFD. With certain types of sensor failures, the system may make sensor selections
automatically. The GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
Comparator
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
Annunciation
Window
APPENDICES
Messages
Window
INDEX
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure 2-35 Prodigy Alerting System
84
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Marker Beacon Annunciations
Outer Marker
Middle Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in yellow, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Inner Marker
EAS
Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-36 Marker Beacon Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Annunciations
Traffic is displayed symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page (MFD), and various
other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix F for more details about the
Traffic Information Service (TIS) and optional Traffic Collision Avoidance System II (TCAS II). When a Traffic
Advisory (TA) or TCAS II Resolution Advisory (RA) detected, the following automatically occur:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic.
• A flashing black-on-yellow (TA) TRAFFIC annunciation or white-on red (RA) TRAFFIC annunciation appears
to the top left of the Attitude Indicator for five seconds and remains displayed until no TAs or RAs are detected
in the area.
• One or more aural traffic alerts is generated.
AFCS
• For TCAS II installations with an active RA, vertical guidance pitch cues will appear on the Attitude Indicator
and Vertical Speed Indicator; see the Hazard Avoidance Section for details about TCAS II.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD TA Annunciation
Traffic
Symbols
APPENDICES
PFD RA Annunciation
(TCAS II Only)
PFD Inset Map with TIS Traffic Displayed
INDEX
Figure 2-37 Traffic Annunciation and Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
TAWS Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) annunciations appear on the PFD to the upper left of the
Altimeter. In TAWS-A installations, additional annunciations also appear to the upper right of the Airspeed
Indicator. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section and Appendix A for information on TAWS alerts and
annunciations.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-38 Example TAWS-A Annunciations
Altitude Alerting
The Altitude Alerting function provides visual and audio alerts when approaching the Selected Altitude.
Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, Altitude Alerting is reset. Altitude Alerting is based on the altitude
information shown on PFD1. Altitude Alerting is independent of the AFCS.
AFCS
The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude Box changes to black text on
a light blue background, flashes for five seconds, and an aural tone is generated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• When the aircraft passes within 200 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue
text on a black background and flashes for five seconds.
APPENDICES
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the aircraft flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude Box changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for five seconds,
and an aural tone is generated.
Within 1000 feet
Within 200 feet
Deviation of ±200 feet
INDEX
Figure 2-39 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
86
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Low Altitude Annunciation
NOTE: A Low Altitude Annunciation is available only when WAAS is available. In addition, TAWS must be
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
inhibited in order for this annunciation to be shown.
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a RNAV GPS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow LOW ALT annunciation appears to the top right of the altimeter, flashing
for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
EAS
Altimeter
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-40 Low Altitude on GPS WAAS Approach
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on barometric
altitude or optional radar altimeter height. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the lower left of the
altimeter and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the altimeter (once the altitude is within the visible
range of the tape). The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching MDA or DH:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, the BARO MIN or RA MIN
box appears with the altitude in light blue text. The bug appears on the altitude tape in light blue once in
range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA/DH, the bug and text turn white.
Within 2500 feet
Within 100 feet
AFCS
• Once the aircraft reaches MDA/DH, the bug and text turn yellow and the aural alert, “Minimums. Minimums”,
is generated.
Altitude Reached
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Barometric
Minimum
Bug
APPENDICES
Barometric
Minimum
Box
Figure 2-41 Barometric Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Alerting is inhibited while the aircraft is on the ground and until the aircraft reaches 150 feet above the setting
for the alert. If the aircraft proceeds to climb after having reached the MDA/DH, once it reaches 50 feet above
the MDA/DH, alerting is disabled.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The MDA/DH may be set from either PFD and is synchronized on both PFDs. The function is reset when the
power is cycled.
Setting the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
EAS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field (Figure 2-42).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the barometric (BARO) or radar altimeter (RAD ALT) altitude source. OFF is
selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (BARO from zero to 16,000 feet, RAD ALT from zero to
2,500 feet ).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-42 Barometric MDA/DH
88
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Radar Altimeter
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the radar height (the aircraft altitude above ground level detected by the radar altimeter) is between -40
and 2500 feet, the current value is displayed in green above the current aircraft heading (Figure 2-43). Display
of radar height becomes more sensitive as the height above ground decreases (Table 2-4).
EAS
Radar Altimeter
Figure 2-43 Current Radar Height
-40 to 200 feet
5 feet
200 to 1500 feet
10 feet
1500 to 2500 feet
50 feet
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Shown to Nearest
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Radar Height Range
Table 2-4 Radar Altimeter Sensitivity
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the radar altimeter is selected as the altitude source for the minimum descent altitude alerting function
(Figure 2-44), the color of the radar height changes to yellow (Figure 2-45).
AFCS
Figure 2-44 RAD ALT Setting
(Timer/References Window)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-45 RA as Altitude Source for MDA/DH
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A ground line (Figure 2-46) is shown on the Altimeter to display the aircraft’s height relative to the ground.
If the data becomes invalid, the message “RA FAIL” is displayed in yellow in place of the current radar height
(Figure 2-47).
Ground
Line
EAS
Radar Altimeter
Minimums Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-46 Altimeter Displaying the Ground Line (RAD ALT)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-47 Radar Altimeter Invalid Data
90
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Instruments
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 Abnormal Operations
Altitude Alerting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Under normal conditions, the Altitude Alerting function is based on the Selected Altitude shown on PFD1
(Figure 2-29). If the MFD is operating in Reversionary Mode, the Selected Altitude shown on the MFD will be
used for Altitude Alerting instead. If the MFD has also failed, then Altitude Alerting will be based on the PFD
2 Selected Altitude.
EAS
Abnormal GPS Conditions
The annunciations listed in Table 2-5 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur. Refer to
the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode.
LOI
DR
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for five seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INTEG OK
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Annunciation
Table 2-5 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-48 Example HSI Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DR Mode causes the CDI to be removed from the display (when GPS is the selected navigation source) and
the following items on the PFD to be shown in yellow:
• Current Track Bug
APPENDICES
• Wind data and pointers in the Wind Data Box on the PFD
• Distances in the Bearing Information windows
• GPS bearing pointers
• Groundspeed
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
These items should be verified when operating in DR Mode.
91
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Instruments
Unusual Attitudes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
Nose Low
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Nose High
Figure 2-49 Pitch Attitude Warnings
• Traffic Annunciations
• System Time
• AFCS Annunciations
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• Flight director Command Bars
• Inset Map
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Outside air temperature (OAT)
– Timer/References
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• DME Information Window
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Wind data
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Heading Box
– Messages
• Airspeed Reference
• Selected Course Box
– Procedures
• Transponder Status Box
– ADF/DME Tuning
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
92
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 3 Engine and Airframe systems
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for limitations.
The ProdigyTM Integrated Flight Deck offers improved flight operations and reduces crew workload by
automatically monitoring critical system parameters and providing system alerts during all phases of flight using
the following:
EAS
• The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays electrical, fuel, engine, pressurization, and flight control
information on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD).
• Synoptics pages are provided for monitoring the status of the doors, brakes, hydraulics, oxygen, pressurization,
environmental control, electrical, fuel, and de-icing systems.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The Crew Alerting System (CAS) displays advisories, cautions, and warnings to communicate conditions,
statuses, and system failures. CAS messages are grouped by level of importance and color-coded based on
urgency and appear in a window to the right of the Altimeter on the Primary Flight displays (PFDs).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In combination with these, aural alerts, additional avionics messages, and master indicators are used to inform
the crew of aberrant flight conditions. The system also provides an improved level of maintenance data for the
ground crew.
PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAS
Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD
APPENDICES
EIS
Display
INDEX
Figure 3-1 EICAS (Normal)
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a display failure, depending on the failed display(s), the remaining display(s) may be re-configured
to present Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology together with condensed EIS information (refer to the System
Overview for more information about Reversionary Mode).
CAS
Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
EIS
Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-2 EICAS (Reversionary Mode)
The SYSTEM Softkey accesses the EIS softkeys. The STATUS, ECS, ELEC, FUEL, ICEPROT, and ENG MNT
softkeys or the small FMS Knob access the Synoptic pages (see Section 3.2). To return to the previous softkey
level and exit the Synoptics pages, select the BACK Softkey, press the CLR Key, or turn the large FMS Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
LFE
STATUS
ECS
OAT
OAT
ELEC
FUEL
ICEPROT
ENG MNT
BACK
ATR ON
ATR OFF
ACCEPT
BACK
CHKLIST
AFCS
ENG SET
CON
CLB
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the BACK Softkey to return
to the previous level softkeys.
FMS LFE
+500 FT
-500 FT
+50 FT
ACCEPT
-50 FT
APPENDICES
CLEAR E1 CLEAR E2
BACK
BACK
CHKLIST
INDEX
Figure 3-3 EIS and Synoptics Softkeys
94
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Accesses the FADEC settings softkeys; displays the Takeoff Data Set Window when aircraft is
parked or taxiing
Selects the continuous thrust rating
CON*
Selects the maximum climb thrust rating
CLB*
Increases the takeoff outside air temperature (OAT) setting in one-degree Celsius (°C)
OAT **
increments
Decreases the takeoff OAT setting in one-degree Celsius (°C) increments
OAT **
Enables Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR)
ATR ON**
Disables ATR
ATR OFF**
Confirms the selected takeoff settings
ACCEPT**
Accesses softkeys for manually setting the Landing Field Elevation (LFE)
• LFE
Sets current flight plan destination elevation as displayed LFE
FMS LFE
Increases currently displayed LFE value by 500 ft
+500 FT
Decreases currently displayed LFE value by 500 ft
-500 FT
Increases currently displayed LFE value by 50 ft
+50 FT
Decreases currently displayed LFE value by 50 ft
-50 FT
Confirms the LFE setting and returns to the previous softkey level
ACCEPT
Displays the Status Synoptics Page
• STATUS
Displays the Environmental Control System (ECS) Synoptics Page
• ECS
Displays the Electrical Synoptics Page
• ELEC
Displays the Fuel Synoptics Page
• FUEL
Displays the Ice Protection Synoptics Page
• ICEPROT
• ENG MNT*** Displays the Engine Maintenance Page
CLEAR E1*** Clears Engine 1 exceedances and long time dispatch faults
CLEAR E2*** Clears Engine 2 exceedances and long time dispatch faults
• ENG SET
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
* Softkey disabled while aircraft is on the ground
** Softkey disabled while aircraft is in the air
*** Enabled only while the aircraft is on the ground and engines are turned off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
95
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
3.1 Engine Indication System (EIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS information is presented using gauges and digital readouts. During normal operating conditions, gauge
pointers and readout text appear in green. When unsafe operating conditions occur, gauge pointers and readouts
change color to indicate caution (yellow) or warning (red). Refer to each indicator description for additional
details on display behavior.
EAS
If the time limit for an unsafe condition is exceeded, the color of the pointers and digits may change to denote
an increase in priority level. Parameters out of the range of the readout display as a red “X”. If sensor data for a
parameter becomes invalid or unavailable, a red “X” is displayed across the indicator and/or readout.
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2
3
3
4
4
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
6
6
7
7
AFCS
8
9
9
10
8
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
11
Figure 3-5 EIS Display (Reversionary)
APPENDICES
Figure 3-4 EICAS Display (Normal)
1
Engine Fan Rotation Speed
4
Oil Pressure and Temperature
8
2
Interstage Turbine
Temperature (ITT)
Engine High Pressure
Compressor Rotation Speed
5
Fuel Display
9
Speed Brake Status not
Displayed on Phenom 100
Landing Gear Status
6
Battery Voltmeter
10
Flap Indicator
7
Cabin Display
11
Trim Indicator
INDEX
3
96
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Takeoff Data Set Window
When the aircraft is parked or is taxiing, the Outside Air Temperature (OAT) for the departure airport can be
set and Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) enabled/disabled in the Takeoff Data Set Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-6 Takeoff Data Set Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting the Outside Air Temperature (OAT):
1) Select the SYSTEM Softkey.
2) Select the ENG SET Softkey to display the Takeoff Data Set Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) To adjust the temperature in 1 °C increments, use the OAT and OAT softkeys,
4) If desired, change the ATR status while the Takeoff Data Set Window is displayed.
5) To confirm the selected takeoff settings and close the Takeoff Data Set Window, select the ACCEPT Softkey,
Or:
To cancel the operation, select the BACK Softkey.
AFCS
On aircraft electrical power-up, Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) is enabled by default. ATR status (defined
in Table 3-1) is shown at the top of the EIS Display (Figure 3-7).
Description
ATR enabled in both engines
ATR armed in both engines, but inactive
ATR activated in at least one engine
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Indication*
ATR
ATR
TO - RSV
APPENDICES
* When no indication is shown, ATR has not been
enabled or armed in both engines.
Table 3-1 Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR) Status
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
Disabling/enabling Automatic Thrust Reserve (ATR):
1) Select the SYSTEM Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the ENG SET Softkey to display the Takeoff Data Set Window.
3) To disable ATR, select the ATR OFF Softkey;
Or:
To enable ATR, select the ATR ON Softkey.
4) If desired, change the OAT while the Takeoff Data Set Window is displayed.
EAS
5) To confirm the selected takeoff settings and close the Takeoff Data Set Window, select the ACCEPT Softkey,
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To cancel the operation, select the BACK Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Engine Indications
Automatic Thrust
Reserve Status
Thrust Rating
Commanded
N1 Rating
Engine Fan
Speed
N1 Transient Limit
Current Speed
Control Arc
Thrust Rating
Max Speed
N1 for Thrust
Rating Max
Speed
ITT Steady
State Limit
ITT Transient
Limit
Interstage Turbine
Temperature
Ignition Status
AFCS
Engine High Pressure
Compressor Speed
Oil Pressure
Oil Temperature
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-7 Engine and Oil Indications
APPENDICES
The upper portion of the EIS Display is devoted to showing indications for the engines: engine stage
rotation speeds (N1 and N2; shown as percentages), ATR status, thrust rating information, Interstage Turbine
Temperatures (ITT; degrees Celsius, °C), and oil pressure (pounds per square inch, psi) and temperature (°C).
INDEX
The N1 gauges indicate the engine fan rotation speeds, while the N2 readouts show the engine high pressure
compressor rotation speeds. Both are shown as percentages. Values and limits are obtained from the Full
Authority Digital Engine Controller (FADEC).
98
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On the N1 gauges, the following indications can be displayed:
• Commanded N1 Rating (based on Thrust Lever Angle, TLA, position) – When the current N1 value is below
the commanded rating, a light blue arc is drawn from the current to the commanded N1 value.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• N1 value corresponding to the Thrust Rating Maximum Speed (shown as a light blue T-shaped bug)
• Current Speed Control N1 value (shown as a green arc)
• Engine shutdown (normal operations) – When the engines are shutting down normally, the N1 gauges display
a light blue “OFF” annunciation (Figure 3-8).
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-8 Engine Shutdown Indication
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Interstage Turbine Temperatures (ITT) values and limits are obtained from the Full Authority Digital Engine
Control (FADEC). Ignition status appears below the ‘IGN’ label beside the ITT scales (A, B, AB, or OFF).
Thrust Rating
Thrust Rating
Cruise
Climb
Continuous
Takeoff
Go Around
AFCS
Indication
CRZ
CLB
CON
TO
GA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The thrust rating for the engines is shown at the center top of the EIS Display, above and between the N1
gauges (see Table 3-2 for indications). The maximum value of the speed range (in %) for the displayed thrust
rating is shown above each N1 gauge. While the aircraft is in the air, the rating can be changed to suit the
conditions for maximum climb or continuous thrust.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 3-2 Thrust Rating Indications
Selecting a thrust rating:
1) Select the SYSTEM Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Select the ENG SET Softkey
3) To choose the continuous thrust rating, select the CON Softkey,
Or:
To choose the maximum climb thrust rating, select the CLB Softkey.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the previous softkey level.
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
Current Speed Control (CSC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current Speed Control (CSC) is available while the autopilot is engaged and Altitude Hold Mode is active.
During CSC, the FADEC varies engine thrust to maintain the desired airspeed (green airspeed bug), within a
certain control range.
When CSC is active, a green arc appears on the N1 gauges, at values corresponding to the current speed
selected (Figure 3-9).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
The N1 gauge flashes ‘LIM’ (black text on yellow background) if the CSC maximum authority limit has been
reached for the corresponding engine.
Figure 3-9 N1 Current Speed Control Limit
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting Current Speed Control (CSC):
1) With the autopilot engaged, select Altitude Hold Mode (see the AFCS Section for details).
2) Press the CSC Key (on the AFCS Control Unit).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel and Electrical Indications
The fuel display is located beneath the oil indicators and shows the fuel flow in pounds per hour (pph) and
the fuel quantity in pounds (lb) for each engine, the total fuel quantity, and the fuel tank temperature in °C.
Fuel display can also be configured by the factory for kilograms.
AFCS
Engine Fuel Flow
Tank Fuel Quantity
Total Fuel Quantity
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Fuel Temperature
Figure 3-10 Fuel Display
APPENDICES
Voltages for batteries 1 and 2 are shown as readouts below the fuel indications.
INDEX
Figure 3-11 Electrical Display
100
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cabin Pressurization
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cabin Display shows cabin pressurization information (cabin altitude and rate of change, differential
cabin pressure) along with the Landing Field Elevation (LFE) and oxygen system pressure. The trend of cabin
pressure altitude rate change is indicated by a green arrow beside the rate readout.
The LFE is set automatically based on the destination in the active flight plan by pressing the FMS LFE
Softkey, but can also be adjusted manually by the pilot. Automatically entered values appear in green; if the
value is entered by the pilot, it changes to light blue. Pilot selected LFE flashes yellow for 30 seconds when a
difference of >5 feet occurs. A red “X” is displayed if the LFE is out of range or the data source is invalid.
EAS
If the landing field elevation is high enough, the indication “HI FIELD” is shown at the top of the Cabin
Display and the cabin altitude caution and warning thresholds are increased to avoid generation of nuisance
alert indications.
Pressure
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
High Landing
Field Elevation
Pressure
Change Rate
Pressure
Differential
Oxygen System
Pressure
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Landing Field
Elevation
Figure 3-12 Cabin Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Setting the displayed landing field elevation:
1) Select the SYSTEM Softkey.
2) Select the LFE Softkey.
3) Select the FMS LFE Softkey to set the LFE to the value for the destination airport in the current flight plan.
AFCS
Or:
Use the ±500 and ±50 FT softkeys to set the desired elevation between -1,000 and 14,000 feet.
4) To confirm the new LFE value, select the ACCEPT Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
101
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
Landing Gear
Landing gear status is shown using the indications in table 3-3.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Indication
Description
EAS
Landing Gear Down
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Main Landing
Gear
Left-side
Landing Gear
Speed Brake
Status not
Displayed on the
Phenom 100
Landing Gear Up
Right-side
Landing Gear
Landing Gear Locked Down
(Abnormal)
Landing Gear Transitioning
(Normal)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-13 Landing Gear Indications
Landing Gear Locked Up
(Abnormal)
Landing Gear Transitioning
(Abnormal)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 3-3 Landing Gear Position Indications
Flaps and Trim
AFCS
Flap deflection is normally displayed beneath the trim indications using a rotating pointer and a green readout
indicating the flap lever setting (0, 1, 2, 3, or FULL). A light blue bug marks the selected flap position. When
the flap is in motion, the readout is dashed. If the position data becomes invalid, the flap pointer is removed
from the display, and the readout is displayed with a red “X”.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pitch, roll, and yaw trim indications are shown along scales at the bottom of the EIS Display. If the trim
information becomes invalid, the pointers are removed and the readout (for pitch) is displayed with a red “X”.
Flap
Position
APPENDICES
Flap
Lever
Setting
Flap
Selected
Bug
INDEX
Figure 3-14 Flap and Trim Indications
102
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.2 Synoptics
• Fuel system
• Brake system
• Hydraulics system
• Doors
• Oxygen system
• Electrical system
• Pressurization system
EAS
• Ice protection system
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Synoptics pages show current conditions of certain aircraft functionalities on aviation system diagrams,
reducing workload by allowing the flight crew to rapidly analyze the situation. Aircraft systems graphically
depicted in the synoptic diagrams include:
• Environmental system
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
System Status
The Status Synoptics Page is displayed after the power-up splash screen is acknowledged on the MFD. The
aircraft diagram displays open passenger and emergency doors in red and open baggage doors in yellow.
2
3
4
5
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
6
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9
7
8
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
Oxygen
2
Static Air Temperature (SAT)
7
Emergency Brake Accumulator Pressure
3
Total Air Temperature (TAT)
8
Door Status
4
True Airspeed (TAS)
9
Electrical Status
5
Engine Short Dispatch Message Box
10
Hydraulic Pressure
INDEX
Flight ID
APPENDICES
1
Figure 3-15 System Status Synoptics Page
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
103
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
Environmental Control System (ECS)
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
3
5
4
6
8
7
10
EAS
9
12
11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
13
14
15
16
17
18
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
19
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20
1
Cockpit Temperature Setting
11
Bleed Line 1 (Left) Pressure
2
Actual Cockpit Temperature
12
Bleed Line 2 (Right) Pressure
3
Cockpit Evaporator Fan
13
Heat Exchanger Pack Cooling Circuit
4
Cabin Temperature Setting
14
Cockpit Duct Temperature Setting
5
Actual Cabin Temperature
15
Cabin Duct Temperature Setting
6
Cabin Evaporator Fan
16
Pressure Regulating Shutoff Valve (PRSOV) 1
7
Ram Air Duct
17
Pressure Regulating Shutoff Valve (PRSOV) 2
8
Ram Air Valve (RAV)
18
Ground Cooling Fan (GCF)
9
Flow Control Shutoff Valve (FCV) 1
19
Vapor Cycle System (VCS)
10
Flow Control Shutoff Valve (FCV) 2
20
Outflow Valve (OFV) Status*
* Outflow valve (OFV) status is displayed only while the aircraft is parked or taxiing.
INDEX
Figure 3-16 Environmental Control System Synoptics Page
104
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Lines between icons on the diagram denote ducting. Icons shown in green are operating normally. A white
icon may indicate that a unit is off or not otherwise operating normally (see Table 3-4). A red “X” indicates
failure of a unit.
Icons and Descriptions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unit
Fan
On
Off
On
Off
On
Off
EAS
Heat Exchanger
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vapor Cycle System
PRSOV
Open, no flow
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Open with flow
Closed
Ram Air Duct From
NACA Scoop
On ground
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airborne
Ram Air Valve
Closed
Open, airborne
Open, on ground
AFCS
Table 3-4 Environmental Control System Unit Status Indications
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
Electrical
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Electrical Synoptics Page uses a diagram of the aircraft’s electrical system to display the system status. The
generators, ground power supply (GPU), batteries, and buses are shown in green to denote normal operation.
Color of the units changes depending on the condition (Table 3-5). A red “X” over a component indicates
invalid data or a failed unit.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Battery
Bus
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Generator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Ground Power Unit
AFCS
Figure 3-17 Electrical Synoptics Page
Unit
Icons and Descriptions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Generator
On
APPENDICES
Bus
Off bus
Off
Normal
Abnormal
Normal
Abnormal
Battery
INDEX
Table 3-5 Electrical System Unit Status Indications
106
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Fuel
The Fuel Synoptics Page displays the status of the fuel tanks and feed system. A red “X” over a component
indicates invalid data or a failed unit.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
3
7
1
Total Fuel
9
Right Feed Ejector
8
9
2
Fuel Used
10
Fuel 1 SOV
10
11
3
Fuel Transfer SOV
11
Fuel 2 SOV
12
13
4
Left Tank Fuel Quantity
12
LH Pressure Switch
5
Right Tank Fuel Quantity
13
RH Pressure Switch
14
15
6
Left DC Pump
14
Left Engine Feed Line
7
Right DC Pump
15
Right Engine Feed Line
8
Left Feed Ejector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
EAS
4
Unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-18 Fuel Synoptics Page
Icons and Descriptions
Fuel Line
Not operating
Feed Ejector
Operating
Not operating
Open with flow Open, no flow
In transit
APPENDICES
Valve
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Not operating
Operating
Fuel Pressure
Switch
AFCS
Operating
Closed
DC Pump
Not operating
Operating
INDEX
Fuel Transfer Valve
Open with flow
In transit
Closed
Table 3-6 Fuel System Unit Status Indications
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
Ice Protection System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the ice protection system is operating normally, all components are shown in green on the system
diagram. Items in white indicate components which are off. A red “X” over a component indicates invalid data
or a failed unit.
1
EAS
1
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
12
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
1
Windshield Heaters
7
EAI 1 Valve and Bleed Line
2
Boot Lines and Valves
8
EAI 2 Valve and Bleed Line
3
Inboard Ejector Flow Control Valve (EFCV)
9
Pressure Regulating Shut-Off Valve 1 (PRSOV 1)
4
Outboard Ejector Flow Control Valve (EFCV)
10
Pressure Regulating Shut-Off Valve 2 (PRSOV 2)
5
Engine Anti Ice 1 Bleed Duct and Lip Skin
11
STAB Ejector Flow Control Valve (EFCV)
6
Engine Anti Ice 2 Bleed Duct and Lip Skin
12
Ice Protection Bleed Duct
INDEX
Figure 3-19 Ice Protection Synoptics Page
108
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
STB EFCV and
EAI Valve
Icons and Descriptions
Open with flow Open, no flow
Closed
Open with flow Open, no flow
Closed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Inboard/Outboard
EFCV and PRSOV
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unit
EAS
Table 3-7 Ice Protection System Unit Status Indications
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
109
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine Maintenance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Engine & Airframe Systems
The Engine Maintenance Synoptics Page can only displayed when the aircraft is on the ground and both
engines are off. Maintenance personnel can view status messages for engine dispatch items and the following
engine parameter exceedance peaks and durations recorded by the FADEC for the last engine start-shutdown
cycle:
EAS
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for required actions.
• Engine fan rotation speed (N1)
• Inter Turbine Temperature (ITT)
• Engine high pressure compressor rotation speed
(N2)
• Main oil temperature and Pressure
• Fuel temperature
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If no peaks are detected, the values and times are displayed as zeros. The data is cleared from the display
using the CLEAR E1 and CLEAR E2 softkeys.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Engine Maintenance Page also displays the ITT and N1 trims that are loaded in each Engine Data
Collection Unit (EDCU)
INDEX
Figure 3-20 Engine Maintenance Synoptics Page
110
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.3 Crew Alerting System (CAS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Aural alerts associated with abnormal conditions and advisories are managed through the audio
panels. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information.
When Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages are generated, the CAS Window opens to the right of the Altimeter
(on the PFDs). Up to 14 messages can be displayed; when more than 14 messages accumulate, the CAS Softkey
becomes available. Pressing the CAS Softkey displays softkeys for scrolling up and down through the messages
in the CAS Window.
EAS
In Reversionary Mode, the CAS Softkey takes the place of the INSET Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAS
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAS Scrolling Softkey
(Disabled Until More
Than 14 Messages
are Displayed)
Softkey Annunciation
(Press to Acknowledge
CAS Message)
Figure 3-21 CAS Display
AFCS
CAS Message Prioritization
NOTE: Information on CAS messages in this pilot’s guide is always superseded by the AFM.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CAS messages are grouped by criticality (warning, caution, advisory) and sorted by order of appearance (most
recent messages on top). The color of the message is based on its urgency and on required action, and the MSG
Softkey label changes to display the appropriate annunciation when a CAS message is generated.
APPENDICES
• Warning (red) – Immediate crew awareness and immediate crew action required; accompanied by an aural
tone (triple chime every 3 seconds) and flashing ‘WARNING’ softkey annunciation
• Caution (yellow) – Immediate crew awareness and subsequent corrective action required; accompanied by
an aural tone (single chime every 5 seconds) and flashing ‘CAUTION’ softkey annunciation
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
• Advisory (white) – Crew awareness required and subsequent action may be required; accompanied by a
flashing ‘ADVISORY’ softkey.
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The softkey annunciation flashes and the corresponding aural alert sounds until acknowledged by depressing
the softkey.
Figure 3-22 Softkey Annunciations (MSG Softkey Labels)
EAS
A CAS message does not appear more than once at a given time. Warning and caution CAS messages flash
when they are generated, and continue to flash until acknowledged. Advisory CAS messages flash for 5 seconds
then are automatically acknowledged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Some CAS messages are differentiated as root causes of other failures and should be considered first during
the decision-making process when multiple CAS messages are displayed. These “golden” messages flash until
acknowledged and remain in inverse video after being acknowledged manually.
After the acknowledgment, a message remains displayed at the top of its respective priority group in the CAS
Window until either a newer message of the same priority appears or the condition(s) that caused the alert to
display no longer exist.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CAS messages listed in tables 3-8 through 3-10 are shown in the acknowledged state (colored text on black
backgrounds). Warning “golden” messages are shown in white text on red backgrounds, with Caution and
Advisory “golden” messages shown in black text on colored backgrounds corresponding to their alert levels.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CAS Messages
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Warning Messages
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Message
CAB ALTITUDE HI
DOOR EMER OPEN
DOOR PAX OPEN
E1 FIRE
E2 FIRE
E1 OIL LO PRES
E2 OIL LO PRES
ELEC EMERGENCY
ELEC XFR FAIL
LG LEVER DISAG
NO TO CONFIG
Description
Cabin altitude is equal to or higher than 10,000 feet
Emergency door open
Passenger door open
Fire in engine 1
Fire in engine 2
Low oil pressure in engine 1
Low oil pressure in engine 2
Generators offline
Generators offline and electrical emergency transfer has failed
Landing gear position and control lever disagreement
Airplane is not in a valid takeoff configuration
INDEX
Table 3-8 Warning CAS Messages
112
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Caution Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
EAS
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Description
ADS 1 offline or failed
ADS 2 offline or failed
Pitot heater 1 offline or heater element failed
Pitot heater 2 offline or heater element failed
AHRS 1 failure
AHRS 2 failure
Anti-ice system failure in engine 1
Anti-ice system failure in engine 2
Anti-skid function lost; main brake still available
Loss of AP function
Airplane mistrimmed in pitch axis when AP is engaged
Airplane mistrimmed in roll axis when AP is engaged
Audio panel 1 has failed
Audio panel 2 has failed
Aural warning system failure due to non-communicating LRUs
Auto pitch trim failure; other pitch trim functions still available
Battery discharging under normal operation
Battery 1 offline
Battery 2 offline
Battery voltage has exceeded 29 VDC
Bleed 1 system failure has been detected. Bleed is no longer available.
Bleed 2 system failure has been detected. Bleed is no longer available.
A leakage has been detected at the bleed 1 line.
A leakage has been detected at the bleed 2 line.
Main brake system lost
Excessive cabin pressure differential
Slip clutch maintenance test failed
Slip clutch maintenance test failed
Slip clutch maintenance test failed
Master Configuration Module failed or non-communicative
Deice system in wings and tail failure
Crew baggage door open
Forward baggage door open
An overheat condition has been detected at the bleed 1 line.
An overheat condition has been detected at the bleed 2 line.
Engine 1 responds slowly or not at all to thrust commands
Engine 2 responds slowly or not at all to thrust commands
Uncommanded shutdown detected for engine 1
Uncommanded shutdown detected for engine 2
Fire detection system failure in engine 1
Fire detection system failure in engine 2
Fire extinguisher failure in engine 1
Fire extinguisher failure in engine 2
Fuel filter impending bypass condition for engine 1
Fuel filter impending bypass condition for engine 2
Thrust Lever Angle failure for engine 1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
ADS 1 FAIL
ADS 2 FAIL
ADS 1 HTR FAIL
ADS 2 HTR FAIL
AHRS 1 FAIL
AHRS 2 FAIL
A-I E1 FAIL
A-I E2 FAIL
ANTI-SKID FAIL
AP FAIL
AP PITCH MISTRIM
AP ROLL MISTRIM
AUDIO PNL 1 FAIL
AUDIO PNL 2 FAIL
AURAL WRN FAIL
AUTO PTRIM FAIL
BATT DISCHARGE
BATT 1 OFF BUS
BATT 2 OFF BUS
BATT EXCEEDANCE
BLEED 1 FAIL
BLEED 2 FAIL
BLEED 1 LEAK
BLEED 2 LEAK
BRK FAIL
CAB DELTA-P FAIL
CLUTCH PIT FAIL
CLUTCH ROL FAIL
CLUTCH YAW FAIL
CONFIG MDL FAIL
D-I WINGSTB FAIL
DOORBAG AFT OPEN
DOORBAG FWD OPEN
DUCT 1 OVERTEMP
DUCT 2 OVERTEMP
E1 CTRL FAULT
E2 CTRL FAULT
E1 FAIL
E2 FAIL
E1 FIRE DET FAIL
E2 FIRE DET FAIL
E1 FIREX FAIL
E2 FIREX FAIL
E1 FUEL IMP BYP
E2 FUEL IMP BYP
E1 TLA FAIL
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
E2 TLA FAIL
E1 TT0 HTR FAIL
E2 TT0 HTR FAIL
EBAY OVHT
EMER BRK LO PRES
ENG NO TO DATA
FLAP FAIL
FUEL 1 LO LEVEL
FUEL 2 LO LEVEL
FUEL 1 LO PRES
FUEL 2 LO PRES
FUEL 1 SOV FAIL
FUEL 2 SOV FAIL
FUEL IMBALANCE
FUEL OVERFILL
FUEL XFR FAIL
GEN 1 OFF BUS
GEN 2 OFF BUS
GEN OVLD
GEN START FAULT
GIA 1 FAIL
GIA 2 FAIL
GIA 1 OVHT
GIA 2 OVHT
HYD HI TEMP
HYD LO PRES
LG WOW SYS FAIL
MFD CONFIG
MFD FAULT
MFD OVHT
OXY LO PRES
PARK BRK NOT REL
PAX OXY NO PRES
PFD 1 CONFIG
PFD 2 CONFIG
PFD 1 FAULT
PFD 2 FAULT
PFD 1 OVHT
PFD 2 OVHT
PRESN AUTO FAIL
PTRIM BKP FAIL
PTRIM DISCONNECT
PTRIM NML FAIL
PUSHER FAIL
PUSHER OFF
STBY HTR FAIL
SWPS FAIL
SWPS FAULT
SWPS HTR1 FAIL
114
Description
Thrust Lever Angle failure for engine 2
Heater failure in engine 1
Heater failure in engine 2
Electrical bay over temperature
Few emergency brake functions available
No takeoff data entered
Loss of flaps deployment or retraction
Low fuel level in tank 1
Low fuel level in tank 2
Fuel pressure low in engine 1 feed line
Fuel pressure low in engine 2 feed line
Fuel feed SOV 1 closed or unavailable
Fuel feed SOV 2 closed or unavailable
Fuel is imbalanced between the tanks
Fuel tank overfilled
Fuel transfer failure
Generator 1 offline
Generator 2 offline
Generator(s) overload
Generator start fault
Failure of GIA 1
Failure of GIA 2
GIA 1 over temperature
GIA 2 over temperature
Hydraulic temperature high
Hydraulic pressure low
Landing gear weight-on-wheels system failure
MFD configuration error
Fault with the MFD
MFD over temperature
Oxygen system pressure low
Parking brake not released
Cabin altitude high and passenger oxygen system pressure low
PFD 1 configuration error
PFD 2 configuration error
Fault with PFD 1
Fault with PFD 2
PFD 1 over temperature
PFD 2 over temperature
Loss of automatic mode
Loss of backup pitch trim actuator
Pitch trim disconnected
Loss of normally-operating pitch trim actuator
Stall Warning & Protection System pusher has failed
Stall Warning Pusher is off
Failure of standby heater
Stall Warning & Protection System inoperative
Stall Warning & Protection System activation angles anticipated to
conservative settings
Stall Warning & Protection System heater 1 failure
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Description
Stall Warning & Protection System heater 2 failure
Stall Warning & Protection System has not been tested
TCAS I or TCAS II is unavailable
Windshield 1 heater failure
Windshield 2 heater failure
Loss of yaw damper function
Airplane mistrimmed in yaw axis when YD is engaged
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
SWPS HTR2 FAIL
SWPS UNTESTED
TCAS FAIL
WSHLD 1 HTR FAIL
WSHLD 2 HTR FAIL
YD FAIL
YD MISTRIM
Table 3-9 Caution CAS Messages
EAS
Advisory Messages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Description
Anti-ice system on in engine 1
Anti-ice system on in engine 2
Fault in ADS 1 heater
Fault in ADS 2 heater
ADS - Angle-of-attack heater on
Fault with AHRS 1
Fault with AHRS 2
Fault with audio panel 1
Fault with audio panel 2
Partial loss of aural warning function
Avionics fan failure
Bleed pressure regulator 1 and shut-off valve closed
Bleed pressure regulator 2 and shut-off valve closed
Pitch slip clutch maintenance test passed
Pitch slip clutch maintenance test in progress
Roll slip clutch maintenance test passed
Roll slip clutch maintenance test in progress
Yaw slip clutch maintenance test passed
Yaw slip clutch maintenance test in progress
DC bus 1 offline
DC bus 2 offline
Deice system in wings and tail ON
Chip detected by engine 1 oil chip detector
Chip detected by engine 2 oil chip detector
FADEC fault in engine 1
FADEC fault in engine 2
Electrical system fault
Emergency bus OFF
Limit exceeded in engine(s) during flight
Engine fire extinguisher discharge
FADEC detected no dispatch fault condition in engine(s)
Flaps not available
Fuel quantity asymmetry corrected; XFEED SOV is open
DC pump on due to low fuel pressure
DC pump on due to low fuel pressure
Fuel pressure switch stuck in “high” position
Fuel pressure switch stuck in “high” position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
A-I E1 ON
A-I E2 ON
ADS 1 HTR FAULT
ADS 2 HTR FAULT
ADS-AOA HTR ON
AHRS 1 FAULT
AHRS 2 FAULT
AUDIO PNL 1 FAULT
AUDIO PNL 2 FAULT
AURAL WRN FAULT
AVNX FAN FAIL
BLEED 1 OFF
BLEED 2 OFF
CLUTCH PIT PASS
CLUTCH PIT PROG
CLUTCH ROL PASS
CLUTCH ROL PROG
CLUTCH YAW PASS
CLUTCH YAW PROG
DC BUS 1 OFF
DC BUS 2 OFF
D-I WINGSTB ON
E1 CHIP DETECTED
E2 CHIP DETECTED
E1 FADEC FAULT
E2 FADEC FAULT
ELEC SYS FAULT
EMER BUS OFF
ENG EXCEEDANCE
ENG FIREX DISCH
ENG NO DISPATCH
FLAP NOT AVAIL
FUEL EQUAL
FUEL1 FEED FAULT
FUEL2 FEED FAULT
FUEL 1 PSW FAIL
FUEL 2 PSW FAIL
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
FUEL PUMP 1 FAIL
FUEL PUMP 2 FAIL
GEA 1 FAIL
GEA 2 FAIL
GEA 3 FAIL
GPU CONNECTED
GSD FAIL
HSDB FAULT
HSDB SW REV POS
MFD FAN FAIL
OXY SW NOT AUTO
PFD 1 FAN FAIL
PFD 2 FAN FAIL
PTRIM SW 1 FAIL
PTRIM SW 2 FAIL
RAM AIR FAIL
SHED BUS OFF
SWPS ICE SPEED
Description
Fuel pump 1 failure
Fuel pump 2 failure
Failure of GEA 1
Failure of GEA 2
Failure of GEA 3
Ground power unit is connected
Failure of GSD
An LRU has stopped communicating over an HSDB
HSDB switch in reversionary position
Failure of MFD fan
Oxygen system switch in manual mode
Failure of PFD 1 fan
Failure of PFD 2 fan
Failure of pilot pitch trim switch
Failure of copilot pitch trim switch
Ram air valve failure
Shed bus off
Stall Warning System activation angles anticipated due to icing conditions
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 3-10 Advisory CAS Messages
116
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Engine & Airframe Systems
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.4 Abnormal Operations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for corrective pilot actions.
Engine
EAS
If an engine failure occurs, besides the CAS message corresponding to the failed engine (“E1 FAIL” or “E2
FAIL”), the corresponding N1 gauge displays the annunciation “FAIL” in yellow inverse video with black text
(Figure 3-23). Detection of an engine fire causes a CAS message corresponding to the engine on fire (“E1 FIRE”
or “E2 FIRE”) in addition to the red inverse video annunciation “FIRE” to be displayed over the ITT gauge in
white text (Figure 3-24).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-23 Engine Failure Indication
Figure 3-24 Engine Fire Indication
Cabin Pressurization
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the cabin altitude (ALT) reaches a caution level, the readout displays black text on a yellow background.
When cabin altitude is 10,000 feet or greater, the readout displays as a warning with white text on a red
background, and the corresponding CAS message “CAB ALTITUDE HI” is issued.
If low flow or a cabin leak is detected, the cabin pressure change rate readout displays white text on a red
background, and the trend arrow turns red.
AFCS
Excessive cabin differential pressure (DELTA-P) causes the pressure readout to display a yellow background
and black text; warnings are indicated with red background with white readout text. The CAS message “CAB
DELTA-P FAIL” accompanies this condition.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When oxygen system pressure (OXY) drops below 1590 PSI, the readout is indicated with black text on a
white background; pressure below 730 PSI is shown with yellow text on a black background. The CAS message
“OXY LO PRES” is also displayed.
If the pilot selected landing field elevation (LFE) differs by more than five feet from the FMS LFE value, the
LFE readout flashes yellow for 30 seconds.
APPENDICES
A red “X” is displayed over any readout on the Cabin Display that is invalid or out of range.
INDEX
Figure 3-25 Cabin Display with Excessive Change Rate
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Engine & Airframe Systems
Flaps
•
Flaps not in position for takeoff – Flap pointer and readout turn red with white text (figures 3-26 and
3-27).
•
Flaps have failed or become jammed – Flap pointer and readout turn yellow with black text (Figure
3-28)
•
Flaps unavailable – Flap pointer is removed and readout turns white with black text (Figure 3-29)
•
Flaps position data invalid – Flap pointer and readout displayed with a red “X”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following denote abnormal flap conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 3-26 Flaps Retracted
at Takeoff
Figure 3-27 Flaps at FULL
(Landing) Position at Takeoff
Figure 3-28 Flaps Failed
Figure 3-29 Flaps Unavailable
Trim
Aileron or rudder mistrim are denoted with yellow arrows pointing in the direction of mistrim on the Roll and
Yaw Trim indicators (Figure 3-30).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If takeoff configuration has been selected and the pitch trim position is not within the green band on the
pitch trim scale, the pointers and readout turn red with white text (Figure 3-31). If an asymmetrical pitch trim
condition exists, the pointers turn yellow and the readout is displayed with a Red “X” (Figure 3-32).
Aileron
Mistrim
AFCS
Rudder
Mistrim
Figure 3-31 Pitch Trim
Outside Takeoff Configuration
Figure 3-32 Asymmetrical
Pitch Trim Condition
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-30 Mistrim
118
Embraer ProdigyTM Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 4 Audio Panel and CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 Overview
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panels, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode S transponders. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram description
of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the Embraer Phenom 100 is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
• MFD Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Multi Function Display (MFD)
• Mode S Transponder (2)
or TCAS II Mode S Transponder
EAS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD) (2)
• Audio Panel (2)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The two Audio Panels provide the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio
selection. Each Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a
marker beacon receiver, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a
feature called Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces
the amount of background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S Transponders are controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the PFD. The Transponder
Data Box is located to the left of the System Time Box. The data box displays the active four-digit code, mode,
and a reply status (Figure 4-1).
Audio Panel Volume Control
AFCS
Adjusting the master volume control affects all radio audio volume and airframe type warnings that are heard
in the headsets (not the speaker) for the pilot or copilot side Audio Panel. Radio adjustments made on the
MFD/PFD controls to compensate for the master volume change on the Audio Panel, also affect the radio levels
for the other pilot. Independent radio volume adjustments made using the Audio Panel Master Volume controls
affect only the audio heard in the corresponding crew position headset.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Radio volume adjustments may be overridden by each crew position independently using the master volume
control on the Audio Panel for the respective crew position. In addition, the master volume control for each
Audio Panel affects all other system audio output to its designated crew position headset much like volume
adjustments found on many aviation headsets.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
10
11
12
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 MFD/PFD Controls, COM/NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes, and ADF/DME Tuning
120
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
5
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
6
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
7
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this key
for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
8
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
9
ADF/DME Tuning Window – Displays ADF frequencies and modes, and DME tuning selection. Display
by selecting ADF/DME Softkey.
10
ENT Key – Validates or confirms an ADF frequency or ADF/DME mode and Auto-tune selection.
11
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter ADF frequencies and select ADF/DME modes,
enter transponder codes, and Auto-tune entries when ADF/DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is
present. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in
the window. The small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
12
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
EAS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel Controls
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
18
19
20
21
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
17
22
23
24
AFCS
Figure 4-2 Audio Panel Controls
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
122
1
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
3
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 MIC – Selects the #3 transmitter (HF), if installed, for transmitting. COM3 receive is simultaneously
selected when this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #3 COM receiver to be heard.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SPKR – Selects and deselects the on-side cockpit speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on
the speaker.
11
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received.
12
HI SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity. Press again to return to low sensitivity.
13
DME – Turns optional DME 1 audio on or off.
14
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
15
ADF – Pressing turns on or off the audio from the ADF receiver, if installed.
16
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
17
AUX – Turns optional DME 2 audio on or off..
18
MAN SQ – Enables manual squelch for the intercom. When the intercom is active, press the ICS Knob to
illuminate SQ. Turn the ICS Knob to adjust squelch.
19
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again to stop playing. Press twice within
0.5 second while audio is playing and the previous block of recorded audio is played. Each subsequent
two presses within 0.5 second plays each previously recorded block.
20
INTR COM – Selects and deselects the pilot/copilot intercom on both Audio Panels.
21
CABIN – Initiates intercom communications with passengers in the cabin.
22
ICS Knob – Turn to adjust intercom volume or squelch. Press to switch between volume and squelch
control as indicated by illumination of VOL or SQ. The MAN SQ Key must be selected to allow squelch
adjustment.
23
MSTR Knob – The Master Volume Control adjusts volume for the blended NAV, COM, intercom audio,
and alert warnings.
24
DISPLAY BACKUP Button – Manually selects Reversionary Mode.
APPENDICES
10
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MUSIC – Toggles the Music 1 input on or off. Pressing and holding toggles music muting on or off.
AFCS
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TEL – When selected, activates the SATCOM transceiver.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PA – Selects the passenger address system. The selected COM transmitter is deselected when the PA Key
is pressed.
EAS
7
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM3 – When selected, audio from the #3 COM receiver (HF), if installed, can be heard.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.2 COM Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation
NOTE: During PA Mode, the COM MIC Annunciator is extinguished and the COM active frequency color
changes to white, indicating that neither COM transmitter is active.
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
EAS
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields; the two active frequencies are on the left side and the
two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting by pressing the
COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). When the PA Key is selected on the Audio Panel, both active COM
frequencies appear in white indicating that no COM radio is selected for transmitting. Frequencies in the
standby fields are displayed in white.
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Top Section of
the Audio Panel
Tuning Box
AFCS
COM2 Radio is
Selected on the Audio
Panel
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-3 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
COM3 is reserved for the optional HF radio. The active HF frequency is not shown on the system.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The active COM frequency displayed in green on the MFD is the same as on PFD1.
124
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Transmit/Receive Indications
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
EAS
Transmit and
Receive Indicators
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-4 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
When the same COM radio is selected on both Audio Panels, the pilot has transmit priority on COM1, the
copilot has transmit priority on COM2.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of each PFD and the MFD. The MFD
frequency controls and displays are linked to the pilot side PFD (PFD1) only.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
AFCS
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
APPENDICES
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
Figure 4-5 COM Frequency Tuning
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Selecting the Radio to be Tuned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
EAS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One COM Radio to the Other
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-6 Switching COM Tuning Boxes
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel COM2 MIC Key activates the transceiver.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press for Two Seconds to
Load 121.500 MHz
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-7 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
126
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS, WX)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
Auto-tuning from the PFD
EAS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Select the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-8 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
Select the NRST
Softkey to Open
the Nearest
Airports Window
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Auto-tuning from the MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-9, 4-10, and 4-11).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-11).
EAS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Figure 4-9 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the page menu (Figure 4-10).
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-10 Nearest Pages Menus
128
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press Frequency
Transfer Key to Load
Frequency into COM
Active Tuning Box
Selected Airport
Identifier and
Information
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway
Information
Press INFO Softkey for
AIRPORT, RUNWAYS,
and FREQUENCIES
Windows
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-11 WPT – Airport Information Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT Key to load
frequency into COM
Standby Field. Cursor
then advances to the
next frequency.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-12 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
130
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Frequency Spacing
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list. Variable rate
tuning is provided with 8.33-kHz spacing to achieve faster selection of the decimal digits.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
EAS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-13 COM Channel Spacing
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
While the COM CONFIG Box is selected, the softkeys are blank.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
INDEX
Figure 4-14 AUX – System Setup Page
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Automatic Squelch
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
EAS
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.
Squelch
Indication
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-15 Overriding Automatic Squelch
Volume
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
COM Volume
Level Remains for
Two Seconds
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-16 COM Volume Level
132
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV Operation
NAV Radio Selection and Activation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields; two standby fields and two active fields. The active
frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EAS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by selecting the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Selecting the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Selecting the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Selecting the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Selecting the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the NAV Tuning Box and the Frequency Transfer Arrow are
placed in the active NAV Frequency Field and the active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
Tuning Box
AFCS
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Selecting
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-17 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
The active NAV frequency displayed in green on the MFD is the same as on PFD1.
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, or AUX Key selects and deselects the navigation radio source. The DME Key selects and
deselects optional DME 1 audio. The AUX Key selects and deselects optional DME 2 audio. Selected audio can be
heard over the headset and the speakers (if selected). All radios can be selected individually or simultaneously.
Figure 4-18 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFD and MFD. The MFD
frequency controls and displays are linked to the pilot side PFD (PFD1) only.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
AFCS
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
APPENDICES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
Figure 4-19 NAV Frequency Tuning
134
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the Radio to be Tuned
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Box From
One NAV Radio to the Other
EAS
Figure 4-20 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code
Identifiers for the GHM
and BNA VORs are On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 with the small
NAV Knob and press the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifier
Figure 4-21 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
Volume
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-22 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EAS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-23, 4-24, and 4-25).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or
selecting the appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR and Nearest Airports pages, select the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor on the NAV
frequency (Figure 4-25).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Box
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
136
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob or the ENT Key.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Figure 4-24 Nearest Pages Menus
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
Select the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
Select the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-25 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
138
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 4-26 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode as
the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the Flight Management Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EAS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
140
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Marker Beacon Receiver
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD.
Middle Marker
Indication
EAS
Outer Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-27 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-28 Marker Beacon Keys
AFCS
The Audio Panels provide three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
During marker beacon audio reception, pressing the MKR/MUTE Key mutes the audio but does not affect the
marker annunciations (Figure 4-27). The marker tone is silenced, then waits for the next marker tone. The
MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is illuminated, indicating audio muting. The audio returns when the next marker
beacon signal is received. If the MKR/MUTE Key is pressed during signal reception (O, M, I indication) while
marker beacon audio is muted, the audio is deselected and the MKR/MUTE Key Annunciator is extinguished.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HI SENS Key switches between high and low marker beacon receiver sensitivity. The HI SENS
function (annunciator illuminated) is used to provide an earlier indication when nearing a marker during an
approach. The LO SENS function (annunciator extinguished) results in a narrower marker dwell while over a
station.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF/DME Tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME and bearing information windows (ADF) and
using the ADF as the source for the bearing pointer.
EAS
Audio Panel and CNS
The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic
and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the ADF/DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
The system tunes the optional ADF receiver and DME transceiver. The ADF is tuned by entering the frequency
in the ADF standby frequency field of the ADF/DME Tuning Window. (The softkey may be labeled ADF/DME
or DME, depending on installed equipment.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following ADF/DME information is displayed in the ADF/DME Tuning Window:
• Active and standby ADF frequencies
• ADF receiver mode
• DME tuning mode (DME transceiver pairing)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the ADF/DME Tuning Window is displayed, the selection cursor is placed over the standby ADF
frequency field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turning the large FMS Knob moves the selection cursor through the various fields (standby ADF frequency,
ADF receiver mode, and DME tuning mode). Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the selection cursor
in the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The ADF frequency is entered using the FMS Knob and the ENT Key.
Active ADF Frequency
Standby ADF Frequency
ADF
Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
DME
Tuning
Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-29 ADF/DME Tuning Window
142
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADF Tuning
ADF frequencies in the 190.0-kHz to 1799.5-kHz range are entered in the standby ADF frequency field of
the ADF/DME Tuning Window. The system does not tune the ADF emergency frequency, 2182.0‑kHz.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Tuning an ADF frequency:
1) Select the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin data entry and change each digit.
EAS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next digit position.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete data entry for the standby frequency.
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Data in
the Standby ADF
Frequency Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete ADF
Frequency Entry
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Character
Figure 4-30 Entering ADF Standby Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key before completing frequency entry cancels the frequency change and reverts back to
the previously entered frequency.
Pressing the CLR Key when the cursor is flashing, clears the frequency and replaces the standby field with
‘0000.0’.
Transferring the active and standby ADF frequencies:
AFCS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the standby ADF frequency field.
2) Press the ENT Key to complete the frequency transfer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Transfer
the ADF
Frequencies
APPENDICES
Figure 4-31 Transferring ADF Frequencies
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
• ANT (Antenna) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees. Best mode for listening to NDB
audio.
The following modes can be selected: (In all modes NDB audio can be heard by selecting the ADF Key on
the Audio Panel.)
• ADF (Automatic Direction Finder) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB station.
EAS
• ADF/BFO (ADF/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF pointer points to the relative bearing of the NDB
station and an audible tone confirms signal reception. This mode allows identification of the interrupted
carrier beacon stations used in various parts of the world.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• ANT/BFO (Antenna/Beat Frequency Oscillator) – The ADF bearing pointer parks on the HSI at 90 degrees
while an audible tone is provided when a signal is received. This mode also allows identification of the
interrupted carrier beacon stations and confirms signal reception.
Selecting an ADF receiver mode:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the selection cursor over the ADF mode field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired ADF receiver mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the Small
FMS Knob
to Select the
Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-32 Selecting ADF Receiver Mode
144
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME Tuning
NOTE: When turning on the system for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
The DME transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
EAS
DME
Modes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-33 DME Tuning Window
The following DME transceiver pairing can be selected:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
1) Select the ADF/DME Softkey to display the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
AFCS
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the data entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the ADF/DME Tuning Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.4 Mode S Transponder
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Mode S Transponders provide Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S interrogation and reply capabilities. Diversity
incorporates antennas mounted on the top and bottom of the aircraft for dependable operation while maneuvering.
Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the following features:
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
EAS
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
• Airborne status determination
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address. The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a traffic avoidance system to recognize
the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
146
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GTX 33/33D Transponder Controls
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: XPDR1,
XPDR2, STBY, ON, ALT, GND, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
EAS
Selecting the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Selecting the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
XPDR2
IDENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
XPDR1
XPDR
MSG
Selecting the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
AFCS
0
MSG
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
Figure 4-34 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
Selecting and activating Transponder 1 or Transponder 2:
APPENDICES
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the XPDR1 or XPDR2 Softkey to select and activate the other transponder.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
When turning on the system for use, the system defaults to the transponder active prior to shutdown. When
switching between Transponder 1 and Transponder 2, the code and mode remain the same. If a new code is
entered in the active transponder, switching transponders does not bring back the previous code.
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
GTX 33/33D Transponder Mode Selection
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, On, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, ALT, and GND Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
EAS
Standby Mode (Manual)
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-35 Standby Mode
ON Mode (Manual)
AFCS
ON Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A replies,
but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. Acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
interrogations are also permitted. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder code appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-36 ON Mode
148
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Mode (Automatic or Manual)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by selecting the ALT Softkey. ALT Mode generates Mode A and Mode C replies. Acquisition
squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations are also permitted.
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
EAS
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-37 Altitude Mode
Ground Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. The transponder
powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down. Ground Mode can be overridden by selecting any one
of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of
the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not allow Mode A and Mode C replies,
but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by selecting the GND Softkey.
GND
Mode
AFCS
Figure 4-38 Ground Mode
Reply Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
Reply to
Interrogation
APPENDICES
Figure 4-39 Reply Indication
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
TCAS II Transponder Controls (optional)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Transponder/Traffic
Selection, and Mode Selection or Code Entry. When the top-level XPDR/TFC Softkey is selected, the Function
Select softkeys appear: MODE, TCAS, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
When the MODE Softkey is selected, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON, ALT, TA ONLY, TA/
RA, BACK.
EAS
When the CODE Softkey is selected, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Selecting the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, selecting the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Selecting the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on either PFD. Code entry must be completed with either
the softkeys or the FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
Selecting the IDENT Softkey while in Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
MODE
XPDR/TFC
IDENT
CODE
IDENT
TCAS
BACK
MSG
AFCS
Selecting the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
IDENT
7
BKSP
BACK
MSG
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting the BACK Softkey
returns to the previous level softkeys.
STBY
ON
ALT
TA ONLY
TA/RA
BACK
MSG
APPENDICES
Selecting the BACK Softkey
returns to the previous level softkeys.
Figure 4-40 Transponder Softkeys (with TCAS II option)
INDEX
TCAS II Transponder Mode Selection (optional)
Mode selection can be automatic (Altitude Mode) or manual (Standby, On, and Altitude Modes). The STBY,
ON, ALT, TA ONLY, and TA/RA Softkeys can be accessed by selecting the XPDR/TRC Softkey, then the MODE
Softkey.
150
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Select the XPDR/TRC Softkey.
2) Select the MODE Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode (STBY, ON, or ALT).
Selecting a TCAS II mode:
1) Select the XPDR/TRC Softkey.
2) Select the MODE Softkey to display the TCAS II Mode Selection Softkeys.
EAS
2) Select the desired softkey to activate the TCAS II mode (TA ONLY or TA/RA).
Standby Mode (Manual)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited. TCAS II is switched to Standby Mode, because the
transponder is not capable of supporting TCAS II operation in Standby Mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is selected, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
Figure 4-41 Standby Mode
AFCS
ON Mode (Manual)
NOTE: TCAS II is switched to Standby Mode, because the transponder is not capable of supporting TCAS II
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
operation in On Mode.
APPENDICES
ON Mode can be selected at any time by selecting the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A replies,
but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. Acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
interrogations are also permitted. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder code appear in the
mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 4-42 ON Mode
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Mode (Automatic or Manual)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Audio Panel and CNS
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by selecting the ALT Softkey. ALT Mode generates Mode A and Mode C replies. Acquisition
squitter and replies to discretely addressed Mode S interrogations are also permitted.
NOTE: TCAS II is switched to Standby Mode.
EAS
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-43 Altitude Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reply Status
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-44 Reply Indication
AFCS
Entering a Transponder Code
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the XPDR Softkey (or XPDR/TFC Softkey with optional TCAS II) to display the CODE Softkey.
2) Select the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
APPENDICES
3) Select the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be selected within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Selecting the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
INDEX
Entering
a Code
Figure 4-45 Entering a Code
152
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
1) Select the XPDR Softkey (or XPDR/TFC Softkey with optional TCAS II) to display the CODE Softkey.
2) Select the CODE Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob on the PFD to enter the first two code digits.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
5) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
6) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
EAS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-46 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VFR Code
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by selecting the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is selected, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Selecting the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
AFCS
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-47 VFR Code
APPENDICES
IDENT Function
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Selecting the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is selected, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
After the IDENT Softkey is selected while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
IDNT
Indication
Select the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
EAS
Figure 4-48 IDENT Softkey and Indication
Flight ID Reporting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If the Flight ID is required but the system is not configured for it, contact a Garmin-authorized service
center for configuration.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the Flight ID must be entered before flight operation, the identifier is placed in the Timer/References
Window on the PFD. The Flight ID can be up to eight characters. No space is needed when entering Flight
ID. When a Flight ID contains a space, the system automatically removes it upon completion of Flight ID entry.
The Flight ID is also displayed on the System - Status Page.
Entering a Flight ID:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the TMR/REF Softkey to display the Timer/References Window.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the selection cursor, if not already activated.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll down to the Flight ID.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired Flight ID.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key to complete Flight ID entry. The word “updating” appears until the new entry is completed.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If an error is made during Flight ID entry, pressing the CLR Key returns to the original Flight ID entry. While
entering a Flight ID, turning the FMS Knob counterclockwise moves the cursor back one space for each detent
of rotation. If an incorrect Flight ID is discovered after the unit begins operation, reenter the correct Flight ID
using the same procedure.
Flight ID
PFD Entry
INDEX
Figure 4-49 Timer/References Window, Entering Flight ID
154
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions
Power-Up
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panels perform a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off. The exceptions are the speaker and intercom, which are always
selected during power up.
EAS
Mono/Stereo Headsets
Stereo or mono headsets are recommended for use in the cockpit of the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using a monaural headset in the jack panel of the cockpit shorts the right headset channel output to ground.
While this does not damage the Audio Panel, a pilot listening on a monaural headset hears only the left channel
in both ears.
Speaker
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Each Audio Panel controls a separate cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the on-side
speaker unless oxygen masks are in use. While using oxygen masks, the cross-side cabin speaker is always on,
pilot audio is always heard on the speaker, and the SPKR Key can not be disabled (the speaker remains on) on
the side in which the oxygen mask is in use.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speakers. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. The
“Stall” aural warning is always heard on both speakers, since the SPWS automatically activate the pilot and copilot speakers (if they are not already turned on) in the event of Stall Warning activation..
AFCS
Figure 4-50 Music and Speaker Keys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Intercom
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the INTR COM Key on either Audio Panel selects and deselects the intercom on both Audio Panels.
The annunciator is lit when the intercom is active. The intercom connects the pilot and copilot together. Either
the pilot or copilot may select or deselect the intercom.
The CABIN Key initiates two way communication between the pilot or copilot and the passengers in the
cabin. The annunciator is lit when the cabin intercom is active on either Audio Panel.
EAS
When the flight crew wants to communicate with the passengers, the pilot or copilot presses the CABIN
Key to signal that communication is desired. The cabin signal must be acknowledged to begin intercom
conversation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the passengers want to communicate with the pilot/copilot, they press the “COCKPIT CALL” switch
at their seat in the cabin. The CABIN annunciator flashes on both Audio Panels to signal the pilot and copilot
that cabin communication is desired. The cockpit call signal must be acknowledged by pressing the CABIN
Key to begin intercom conversation.
The MAN SQ Key allows either automatic or manual control of the intercom squelch setting. Pressing the
MAN SQ Key enables manual squelch control, indicated by the MAN SQ annunciator.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is extinguished (Automatic Squelch is on), the ICS Knob controls only the
volume (pressing the ICS Knob has no effect on the VOL/SQ selection).
• When the MAN SQ Annunciator is illuminated (Manual Squelch), the ICS Knob controls either volume or
squelch (selected by pressing the ICS Knob and indicated by the VOL or SQ annunciation).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manual Squelch
Annunciator; Off
for Automatic
Squelch, On for
Manual Squelch
Cabin Annunciator; On for
Cabin Intercom, Flashes for
Cabin to Flight Deck Hail
Selects and Deselects
Cabin Intercom
AFCS
Pilot/Copilot
ICS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press to switch
between VOL and SQ.
Turn to adjust Squelch
when SQ Annunciation
is lit, Volume when
VOL Annunciation is lit.
Master Volume
Control for Pilot
Side or Copilot
Side
APPENDICES
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 4-51 Intercom Controls
156
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Passenger Address (PA) System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A passenger address system is provided by pressing the PA Key to deliver messages to the headsets of the
passengers (if installed). The message is heard by the other pilot on the headset only if the PA Key is enabled
on both audio panels. PA messages are one way from the flight deck to the passengers.
A Push-to-talk (PTT) must be pressed to deliver PA announcements to the passengers over their
headphones.
EAS
When PA is selected on the Audio Panel, the annunciator flashes about once per second while pressing the
PTT, the COM MIC annunciator is no longer lit, and the active COM frequency for that Audio Panel changes to
white, indicating that there is no COM selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PA Key is Selected on
the Audio Panel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-52 PA Key Selected for Cabin Announcements
Simultaneous COM Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Both the pilot and the copilot can transmit and receive simultaneously over separate COM radios. The
selected COM MIC Annunciator flashes when either pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
If both pilots select the same COM radio, the pilot has priority on COM1 and the copilot has priority on
COM2.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Clearance Recorder and Player
NOTE: Pressing the play key on the pilot’s Audio Panel plays recorded audio to the Pilot. Pressing the play
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
key on the Copilot’s Audio Panel plays recorded audio to the Copilot.
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that continually records up to 2.5 minutes of the
selected COM radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of
recording time have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from
the oldest block.
EAS
The PLAY Key controls the play function. The PLAY annunciator remains lit to indicate when play is in
progress. The PLAY annunciator turns off after playback is finished.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory block and then returns to normal operation.
Pressing the PLAY Key again during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the PLAY Key twice within one-half second while audio is playing plays the previous block of
recorded audio. Each subsequent two presses of the PLAY Key within one-half second backtracks through the
recorded memory blocks to reach and play any recorded block.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PLAY Key
Controls the
Play Function
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-53 Play Key
158
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entertainment Inputs
NOTE: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2 inputs cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
Copilot Music In (Music 2)
OFF
ON**
OFF
ON
Crew
GDL 69A (XM Radio)
Copilot Music In
Pilot Music In
Pilot Music In
Passengers
GDL 69A (XM Radio)
Copilot Music In
GDL 69A (XM Radio)
Copilot Music In
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pilot Music In (Music 1)
OFF*
OFF
ON
ON
EAS
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: MUSIC 1 and MUSIC 2. These inputs
are compatible with popular portable entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm
stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the
entertainment devices are plugged into the MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks. The availability of the Entertainment
Inputs is as shown in the following table.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* OFF means no audio source is plugged into the respective Audio Jack Panel.
**ON means an audio source (e.g MP3 player) is plugged into the respective Audio Jack Panel.
MUSIC 1
MUSIC 1 can be heard by the pilot and copilot when the MUSIC Key is selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
MUSIC 1 Muting
MUSIC 1 muting occurs when aircraft radio, aural warning alerts, or marker beacon activity is heard.
MUSIC 1 is always soft muted when an interruption occurs from an aircraft radio. Soft muting is the
gradual return of MUSIC 1 to its original volume level. The time required for MUSIC 1 volume to return
to normal is between one-half and four seconds.
AFCS
MUSIC 2
MUSIC 2 can be heard only by the passengers.
announcements.
MUSIC 2 is by default muted only during PA
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM Radio Entertainment
APPENDICES
XM Radio audio from the Data Link Receiver may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously
(optional: requires subscription to XM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more
details on the Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to either MUSIC 1 or MUSIC 2 jacks removes the XM Radio Audio from that
input.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
159
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.6 Audio Panels Preflight Procedure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: Adjusting the PILOT volume control affects ICS audio that is heard in the headset for the flight crew
EAS
member that is performing the adjustment. Keep in mind that the intercom volumes on the Audio Panels
are independent of one another, but the radio volumes are not.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot. If
manual squelch is set to minimum (SQ annunciated and the knobs turned counterclockwise), background
noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM transmissions.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panels as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Automatic/Manual
Squelch
Pilot/Copilot
ICS
AFCS
Cabin ICS
Master Volume
Control
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ICS Volume and
Squelch Control
Volume Annunciation
Squelch Annunciation
APPENDICES
Reversionary Mode
for PFD1 and MFD
Reversionary Mode
for PFD2 and MFD
Pilot Side
Copilot Side
INDEX
Figure 4-54 Audio Panel Controls
160
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Independent radio volume adjustments made using the MFD/PFD controls affect only the audio output for each
radio selected for adjustment. Radio volume adjustment affects both crew positions equally for each radio that
is adjusted. Turning the master volume control located on either Audio Panel affects only the audio heard in the
corresponding crew position headset. Thus, radio volume adjustments may be overridden by each crew position
independently using the master volume control on the Audio Panel for the respective crew position. The master
volume control for each Audio Panel affects all other system audio output for the pilot or copilot headset.
Setting the Audio Panel volume levels during preflight:
1) Verify the INTR COM Key is selected.
EAS
2) Verify manual squelch is set to minimum.
3) Turn the MSTR Knob (Master Volume Control) on both Audio Panels clockwise two full turns. This sets the
headset audio level to max volume (least amount of attenuation).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
5) Adjust the ICS volume Knob on each Audio Panel to the desired intercom level.
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Once this procedure has been completed, the master volume controls on both Audio Panels may now be
adjusted. The flight crew can change settings, keeping in mind the notes above.
Pilot Master
Volume Control
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Radio Volume
Knobs Adjust
Radio Level
NAV Radio
Audio
AFCS
Master Volume
Knobs Adjust
Headphone
Volume Level
COM Radio
Audio
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Copilot Master
Volume Control
Figure 4-55 Radio and Headphone Volume Controls
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
4.7 Abnormal Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation of the system includes failures of the system components and failure of associated
equipment, including switches and external devices.
Stuck Microphone
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
The COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains
stuck.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-56 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM Tuning Failure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-57 COM Tuning Failure
162
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Audio Panel and CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD Failure, Dual System
If PFD1 fails, COM1 and NAV1 display a red X on both remaining displays. NAV1 is unavailable. COM1
automatically tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
Figure 4-58 Frequency Section of PFD2 Display after PFD1 Failure
EAS
If the HSDB switch is in NORMAL MODE and the MFD fails, COM2 and NAV2 display a red X on the
remaining PFD display. NAV2 is unavailable. COM2 tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the HSDB switch is in REV MODE and PFD2 fails, COM2 and NAV2 display a red X on the remaining PFD
display. NAV2 is unavailable. COM2 tunes 121.500 MHz, but the frequency is not shown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-59 PFD1 Display after PFD2 Failure with HSDB Switch in REV Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Audio Panel and CNS
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If there is a failure of both Audio Panels, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver and the copilot’s headset directly to the COM2 transceiver. Audio is not available on
the speakers. If there is a failure of one Audio Panel, that side only has access to their respective on-side failsafe COM.
NOTE: Audio is not available on the speakers in case of an Audio Panel and its cross-side GIA unit simultaneous
failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
If there is a failure of one Audio Panel, the remaining Audio Panel does not have access to the other side’s
COM or NAV. For example, if the pilot side Audio Panel fails, the copilot side Audio Panel has access to all
the radios except for COM1 and NAV1. In this case, the copilot can receive the audio from NAV2 and operate
COM2 for transmission/reception.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In addition, if there is a failure of one Audio Panel, the following functions are no longer available on the
failed side; NAV/ILS audio, speaker, cockpit/cockpit-passengers intercom, aural warning alerts on headset,
entertainment inputs, and digital recording radio. Also, if a stereo headset is in use, and an Audio Panel fails,
only the left channel will be heard in the headphones.
Reversionary Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The red DISPLAY BACKUP Button selects the Reversionary Mode. See the System Overview Section for
more information on Reversionary Mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-60 Reversionary Mode Button
164
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 5 Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 Introduction
The Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance
system. This section of the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100.
EAS
The most prominent part of the system are the three full color displays: two Primary Flight Displays (PFD) and
a Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the GPS navigation data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV,
or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by selecting the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Map Orientation
Navigation Page Title
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
AFCS
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
Active Flight Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Leg
Map Range
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
166
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Status Box
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD Navigation Status Box
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
• Distance (DIS) and Bearing (BRG) to the next
waypoint or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘TOD
within 1 minute’)
• Bearing (BRG)
Symbol
Description
Active Leg
• Distance (DIS)
• Desired Track (DTK)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
EAS
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD > KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
Direct-to
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
Right Procedure Turn
Left Procedure Turn
• Fuel over Destination (FOD)
• Ground Speed (GS)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Right Holding Pattern
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
Left Holding Pattern
• True Air Speed (TAS)
Vector to Final
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
AFCS
• Track (TRK)
Right DME Arc
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
Left DME Arc
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
MFD Navigation Status Box
APPENDICES
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the ENT Key. Selecting the DFLTS Softkey returns any field to its default setting.
5.2 Using Map Displays
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Map displays are used extensively to provide situational awareness in flight. Most maps can display the following
information:
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data • Icons for enabled map features
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with • Aircraft icon (representing present position)
names
• Nav range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent • Flight plan legs
information)
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography scale
• Map orientation
• Topography data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• Direct-to Window
• AUX - Trip Planning
• PFD Inset Map
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Procedure Loading Pages
AFCS
Map Orientation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
168
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
Note: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
EAS
Note: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. Any other displays that show
navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Setup
Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Group Selection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Orientation Field
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map Range
AFCS
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of the system to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Range Overzoom
INDEX
Figure 5-6 Map Range
170
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auto Zoom
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window).
EAS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, any map page displaying terrain data automatically adjusts to the
smallest map range clearly showing the highest priority alert. If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map
page capable of displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly
showing the traffic advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom
range based on the active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determine the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At this expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
AFCS
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto Zoom:
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
Configuring automatic zoom:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
AFCS
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ (zero to 999 minutes).
INDEX
APPENDICES
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
172
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Map Panning
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
EAS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
APPENDICES
Note: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Information about
Point of Interest
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer
on POI
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
174
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Information
about Airspace
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Pointer
on Airspace
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
3) Select the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
NAVAID
Information
GO BACK Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
176
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ‘Review Airspace?’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
EAS
Airspace
Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Measuring Bearing and Distance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EAS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Pointer
Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement
Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Measurement
Line
INDEX
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
178
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Topography
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar
to aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following
procedures.
TOPO On
TOPO Off
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
TOPO Softkey Enabled
Black Background
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Softkey Not Enabled
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Select the TOPO Softkey.
AFCS
3) Select the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
179
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
TOPO DATA
Range
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
Note: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
APPENDICES
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
180
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
EAS
Ground Elevation at Map Pointer
Location (only visible when Map
Pointer is displayed)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
INDEX
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Symbols
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
Land Symbols
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
EAS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg)
Symbol
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
182
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Aviation Symbols
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
2000
500
300
100
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
APPENDICES
2000
250
150
50
3
Off
15
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2000
AFCS
2000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2000
EAS
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg)
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Symbol Setup
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EAS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LAND DATA
On/Off
AFCS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
APPENDICES
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
6) Select the desired text size.
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
6) Select the desired range.
184
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Display Range
EAS
Text Label Size
(None, Small Med, or Lrg)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Text Label Size
(None, Small Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
APPENDICES
Note: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
185
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Map Declutter
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
Declutter Level
EAS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
Decluttering the map:
Select the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Key.
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
186
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 5-3 lists the items displayed at each declutter level. The ‘X’ represents map items displayed for the
various levels of declutter.
Item
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Flight Plan Route Lines
Flight Plan Route Waypoints
Rivers/Lakes
Topography Data
International Borders
Track Vector
Navigation Range Ring
Fuel Range Ring
Terrain Data
Traffic
Airways
NEXRAD
XM Lightning Data
Airports
Runway Labels
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
TFRs
Obstacles
Land/Country Text
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
River/Lake Names
No Declutter Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Displayed by Declutter Level
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Airways
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
EAS
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
AFCS
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
INDEX
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
188
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWAY ON).
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWAY LO).
EAS
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWAY HI).
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Display Selection
Low Altitude Airway Range
High Altitude Airway Range
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
AFCS
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Airway’ group.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
6) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
INDEX
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
Airway Type
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
300
500
EAS
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
Track Vector
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid light blue line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable
(30 sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Track Vector
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nav Range Ring On/Off
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind Vector On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
EAS
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
Wind Vector
Wind Direction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
Note: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
AFCS
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Nav Range Ring
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Range (radius)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nav Range Ring
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
Note: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
AFCS
Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Note: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
INDEX
- System Setup Page.
192
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Fuel Range Ring
Time to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Total Endurance Range
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Range to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
AFCS
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
APPENDICES
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Field of View (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
AFCS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
194
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.3 Waypoints
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the CNS and Audio Panel section for details on autotuning.
City Entry Field
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Facility
Entry
Field
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Identifier Entry Field
EAS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering the
city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data. As a waypoint identifier,
facility name, or location is entered, the Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the database, displaying those
waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to navigation leg to the
selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint pages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Waypoint Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-30 Waypoint Information Window
APPENDICES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Identifier with
Duplicates
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Duplicate
Waypoints
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Duplicate
Message
Figure 5-31 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airports
Note: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in the WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, review instrument procedures, and view airport
directory information that may be involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more
information on loading frequencies (auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to
the airport where the aircraft is located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport.
On a flight plan with multiple airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
APPENDICES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available.
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
• Usage type: Public, Military, or Private
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
INDEX
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
196
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airport Information
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
Runway Information
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
EAS
Airport/Runway
Diagram
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-32 Airport Information Page
• Airport:
Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Noise:
Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO:
Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
• Notes: Airport Notes
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
APPENDICES
• Transportation:
Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Instrument
Approaches:
Published
Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General Airport
Obstructions
• Special
Operations
at
Airport
AFCS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Traffic Patteren Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather:
Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following are types of AOPA airport directory informantion shown (if available) on the Airport Directory
Page:
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Airport Information
Airport Directory
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
Softkeys
Figure 5-33 Airport Directory Page Example
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
View a destination airport:
INDEX
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
198
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate need to land is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a
list of the 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
AFCS
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
APPENDICES
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-34 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing
the ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list.
Continued presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest
Airports list.:
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
EAS
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
Airport Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Lat/Long
Figure 5-35 Airport Information Window on PFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to five frequencies,
and up to six approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
200
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airport
Airport Information
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
EAS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
Figure 5-36 Nearest Airport Page
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach
is highlighted)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window Selection
Softkeys
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
AFCS
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the CLR Key to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected. If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
3) Select the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
INDEX
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport)
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, select the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EAS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT).
5) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AFCS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Nearest Airport Criteria
INDEX
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
Figure 5-37 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
202
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Intersections
Note: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
EAS
Intersection Identifier
Intersection Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Region
- Lat/Long
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Intersection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-38 Intersection Information Page
Select an intersection:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to sixteen intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed
EAS
Note: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Intersection Lat/Long
Reference VOR Info
AFCS
Nearest Intersection
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-39 Nearest Intersections Page
204
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NDBs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
NDB Information
EAS
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Frequency
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Airport Info
Selected NDB
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-40 NDB Information Page
Note: Compass locator (LOM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in conjunction
AFCS
with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker; when LMM is
used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Select an NDB:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to sixteen NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
EAS
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest NDB
NDB Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-41 Nearest NDB Page
206
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VORs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it’s displayed as VOR-DME.
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
EAS
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR Information
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
VOR
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-42 VOR Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL
Select a VOR:
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight ‘SELECT VOR WINDOW’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EAS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to sixteen VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
VOR Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
AFCS
VOR Information
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest VOR
VOR Frequency
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-43 Nearest VOR Page
208
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
User Waypoints
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, referencing bearings from two existing waypoints, or entering a latitude/longitude. Once
a waypoint has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved.
User Waypoint Info
User Wpt Comment
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
Reference Wpt/Info
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
EAS
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
# User Wpts Used
Displayed if User Wpt
was created on map
page
Softkeys
Figure 5-44 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Select a User Waypoint:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) With the Nearest User Waypoint Page displayed, press the FMS Knob
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
EAS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-45 Nearest User Waypoint Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating User Waypoints
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
AFCS
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
210
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
EAS
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-46 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
Note: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
EAS
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
Editing User Waypoints
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Move the cursor to the desired field.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
212
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Renaming user waypoints:
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Select the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Enter a new name.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is
displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EAS
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
AFCS
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Deleting User Waypoints
Deleting a single user waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EAS
Or:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
214
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.4 Airspaces
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Identification Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
EAS
Restricted Area
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Area
Class C Airspace
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
APPENDICES
Warning Area
Figure 5-47 Airspaces
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
EAS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
216
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspace Alerts Box
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-48 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu: See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace
area.
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Airspace Alerts Info
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm,
Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
Airspace Vertical Limits
EAS
Airspace 1
- Ceiling
- Floor
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Associated Frequencies
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
Figure 5-49 Nearest Airspaces Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
AFCS
1) Select the Nearest Airspace Page.
2) Select the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the desired airspace.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
218
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PFD MSG Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
EAS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EAS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
AFCS
- Bearing/Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Desired Course
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-50 Direct-to Window - MFD
220
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Direct-to Point Info
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
EAS
Activation Command
Figure 5-51 Direct-to Window - PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan wayoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AFCS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Waypoints
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-52 Waypoint Submenu
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
EAS
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints
AFCS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
INDEX
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
4) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
222
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
EAS
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Direct-to:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
Figure 5-53 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
AFCS
3) Enter the desired course.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
INDEX
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint,
or at the specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior
to the direct-to destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of the direct-to.
All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on Vertical Navigation for more
information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
224
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
EAS
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page Menu
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-54 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.6 Flight Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding waypoints along
airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. The system allows flight planning
information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using different
line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being flown
(departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Flight Plan Leg Type
Symbol
EAS
Active non-heading Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active heading Leg
Non-heading Leg in the current flight segment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Leg not in the current flight segment
Non-heading leg not in the active flight segment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Anticipation Arc
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous System Messages) advising that one or
more stored flight plans need to be edited.
APPENDICES
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
INDEX
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This re-loads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous System Messages).
226
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
Flight Plan Creation
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
EAS
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active FPL Waypoint List
Active Flight
Plan Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude
Constraint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Navigation Profile
Turn Anticipation
Arc
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
AFCS
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-55 Active Flight Plan Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Comment
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
EAS
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-56 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
Catalog Contents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- # Used
- # Empty
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Flight
Plan Map
Selected FPL Info
AFCS
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Softkeys
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-57 Flight Plan Catalog Page
228
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which the system is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Creating an active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
EAS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Creating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
AFCS
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
EAS
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
INDEX
Import/Export Softkeys
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
Import Successful
Figure 5-58 Flight Plan Import
230
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Note: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
EAS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Export Successful
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Export
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude
Constraint
Softkeys
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-60 Stored Flight Plan Page
Flight Plan Full Message
INDEX
Figure 5-61 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
232
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press
the ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city of the new waypoint.
EAS
6) Press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
Note: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-62 Duplicate Waypoints Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
APPENDICES
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
2) Select the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
The system also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of
Selected Airway
Figure 5-63 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
APPENDICES
Adding an airway to a flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and select the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
234
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
EAS
Selected Exit Point
Selected Airway
Exit Point
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Airway
Airway Exit Points
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-64 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
APPENDICES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 5-65 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Restrictions on Adding Airways
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
EAS
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Name
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Flight Plan
Waypoint List
Softkeys
APPENDICES
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan
INDEX
Figure 5-66 Stored Flight Plan Page
236
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EAS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMKC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-67 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected Transition
EAS
Departure Transition
Points Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Departure End
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-68 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
Inserted Departure Header
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.TIFTO2.TIFTO)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-69 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
238
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Arrival (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
EAS
Arrivals Available at
KCOS
Selected Runway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-70 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available
with DBRY1
EAS
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-71 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Inserted Arrival Header
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-ALS.DBRY1.ALL)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-72 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
240
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Approach (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
Destination Airport
EAS
Selected
Approach
Approaches Available
at KCOS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Barometric Minimum
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-73 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
AFCS
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘EDIT FLIGHT PLAN’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select an approach. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approval procedure.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Transitions Available
with Selected Approach
EAS
Barometric Minimum
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Load Approach?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-74 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Inserted Approach Header
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-75 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
242
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Plan Storage
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EAS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Select the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Selected Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
AFCS
Stored Flight Plan Info
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
Figure 5-76 Stored Flight Plan Information
APPENDICES
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Sort Flight Plans
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The stored flight plans can be sorted alphanumerically based on the flight plan name (comment) assigned
to each flight plan.
Sorting by flight plan name (comment):
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Sort By Comment’ and press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
EAS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to change flight plan ordering. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activate a Flight Plan
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order and activates it.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Copy a Flight Plan
APPENDICES
The system allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
244
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Select the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The
‘Copy to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Delete a Stored Flight Plan
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from memory.
Deleting a stored flight plan:
EAS
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Flight Plan Editing
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Deleting the Active Flight Plan
The system allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
APPENDICES
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Deleting Flight Plan Items
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
EAS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
246
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
EAS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
EAS
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing Flight Plan Comments (Names)
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the active flight plan comment:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
INDEX
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
248
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Along Track Offsets
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
entered from 1 to 99 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
EAS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and
Distance from Flight
Plan Waypoint
AFCS
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-77 Along Track Offset
APPENDICES
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
3) Select the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
249
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 99 nm (limited by leg distance).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude for the offset.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Parallel Track
EAS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Note: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting Parallel
Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-78 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
250
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
Activation Prompt
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-79 Parallel Track Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Parallel Track Waypoints
Parallel Track
Original Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ULNAZ-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the entire active
flight segment (e.g.,
enroute)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-80 Parallel Track Active
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
Subdued Prompt
(Unavailable)
Unavailable Status
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active Status
Figure 5-82 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
252
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating a Flight Plan Leg
The system allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EAS
3) Select the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
Active Leg
Selected Destination
Waypoint
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
Figure 5-83 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
253
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-84 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
Inverting a Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise one click to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be inverted.
4) Select the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Invert & Activate Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ confirmation window is displayed.
INDEX
5) Select ‘OK’.
6) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the stored flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
254
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Plan Views
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EAS
2) Select the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
3) Select the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or select the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Switching between wide and narrow view:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Select the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or select the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
4) Select the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Wide View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
256
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Collapsing Airways
The system allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflects the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
EAS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and the “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Q3.FEPOT Airway
Collapsed View
Expanded View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-87 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
Closest Point of FPL
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.7 Vertical Navigation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The system supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
EAS
The Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and teminal phases
of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a direct-to waypoint is
provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a linear deviation from the
desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified altitudes or as a vertical
angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the active flight plan Both
manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported with a Garmin autopilot.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
Figure 5-88 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
APPENDICES
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Select the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
258
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Disabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
EAS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Selecting the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
After VNV Direct-to
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
Figure 5-89 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
Note: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (light blue number) to be used. If
not, the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
3) Select the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
EAS
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Select the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the
ENT Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Altitude Constraints
AFCS
The system can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
Displayed Text
Examples
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
Large Light Blue Text
APPENDICES
Cross AT
2,300 ft
Small Light Blue Text
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Small Light Blue
Subdued Text
INDEX
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Figure 5-90 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
260
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
Light Blue Text
Light Blue Subdued Text
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition
EAS
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
White Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with arrival and approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system
automatically uses the altitudes loaded with the arrival or approach for giving vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Note that these altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including the FAF. The FAF is
always a “reference only” altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide
vertical guidance. In this case, the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle (6° down) or maximum vertical speed (-6000 fpm) to be exceeded
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
EAS
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
WAAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
AFCS
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
INDEX
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
262
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EAS
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.8 Procedures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
Departures
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading a Departure into the Active Flight Plan
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
264
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure Airport
Available Procedure Actions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Departure Preview
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loaded Procedures
Departure Choices
Figure 5-91 Departure Selection
Selected Departure
Loaded Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-92 Departure Loading
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available departures at an airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on
the map.
EAS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Removing a Departure from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
266
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Arrivals
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
Loading an Arrival into the Active Flight Plan
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EAS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
Available Procedure Actions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Destination Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrival Preview
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Arrival Choices
Figure 5-93 Arrival Selection
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Loaded Arrival
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-94 Arrival Loading
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the
map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
INDEX
7) Select the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
268
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Removing an Arrival from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
EAS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Approaches
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (WAAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
AFCS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
APPENDICES
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The WAAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV/VNAV, and LPV approaches according to the published chart.
LNAV+V is a standard LNAV approach with advisory vertical guidance provided for assistance in maintaining
a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance is displayed on the PFD
in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. In all cases where LNAV+V is indicated
by the system during an approach, LNAV minima are used. The active approach type is annunciated on the
HSI as shown in the following table:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV minima
LNAV+V
GPS approach using published LNAV minima.
Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
GPS approach using published LNAV/VNAV
minima
LPV
GPS approach using published LPV minima
Example on HSI
Approach Type
- LNAV
- LNAV+V
- L/VNAV
- LPV
Table 5-9 Approach Types
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading an Approach into the Active Flight Plan
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
5) Minimums
AFCS
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘RAD ALT’ (optional), and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the arrival procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
INDEX
APPENDICES
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
270
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Available Procedure Actions
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approach Preview
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loaded Procedures
Approach Choices
Figure 5-95 Approach Selection
Selected Approach
Loaded Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
Figure 5-96 Approach Loading
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the APR Softkey. The Departure
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
EAS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Runway box. The approach is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the map.
7) Select the INFO Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Select the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
AFCS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition.
7) Minimums
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’’ or ‘RAD ALT’ (optional), and press the ENT Key.
Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
Or:
b) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the arrival procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
272
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Activating an Approach
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
EAS
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Removing an Approach from the Active Flight Plan
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD)
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
APPENDICES
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Missed Approach
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
Or:
EAS
Press the Go-Around Button.
Course To Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
APPENDICES
Course to Alttitude Leg
INDEX
Figure 5-97 Course to Altitude
274
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.9 Trip Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on fuel sensor data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining fuel).
Trip Planning
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
EAS
Selected Flight Plan Segment
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
Fuel Statistics
AFCS
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-98 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
INDEX
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
275
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Trip Statistics
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EAS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints. It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999. HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA
is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
INDEX
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
276
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Fuel Statistics
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
EAS
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required for trip.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by subtracting
the time of fuel endurance by the amount of time to go.
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
Other Statistics
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Starting and Ending Waypoint
of Selected Flight Plan Segment
AFCS
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
Figure 5-99 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Not Available
Selected Leg(s)
APPENDICES
Selected Flight Plan
Not Available
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-100 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Management
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Select the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Select the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
EAS
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
AFCS
1) Select the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
278
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weight Planning
Note: All weight planning page data fields displays data rounded to the nearest 10 pounds or 5
A/C Payload Calculator
Fuel Weight Calculator
Empty Weight Softkey
Fuel On Board Sync Softkey
(sets FOB to sensor actual)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
kilograms.
EAS
- Zero Fuel Weight Calculation
- Fuel on Board Entry (or sync)
- Aircraft Weight Calculation
- Estimated Landing Weight Calculation
- Estimated Landing Fuel Calculation
- Fuel Reserve Entry
- Excess Fuel Calculation
Basic Empty Weight Entry Pilot and Stores Weight Entry Basic Operating Weight
Calculation Passenger(s) Weight Entry Cargo Weight Entry Zero Fuel Weight Calculation -
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(selects Basic Empty Weight)
Figure 5-101 Weight Planning Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering basic empty weight:
1) Select the EMPTY WT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set Basic Empty Weight’, and press the ENT
Key to select the BASIC EMPTY WEIGHT field.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the basic empty weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Entering a pilot and stores weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘PILOT AND STORES’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the pilot and stores weight.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The basic operating weight is calculated by adding the basic empty weight and the pilot and stores weight.
Entering the number of passengers:
INDEX
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘PASSENGERS #’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the number of passengers.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Entering the average passenger weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the passenger weight field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the average passenger weight.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
EAS
The total weight of passengers is calculated by multiplying the number of passengers by the average passenger
weight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entering the cargo weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘CARGO’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the cargo weight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
The ‘ZERO FUEL WEIGHT’ is calculated by adding the basic empty, pilot and stores, passenger, and cargo
weights.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a fuel on board weight:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘FUEL ON BOARD’ field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel on board.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
AFCS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
Entering fuel reserve:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and highlight the ‘FUEL RESERVES’ field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the fuel reserves amount.
3) Press the ENT Key to confirm the entry.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor
APPENDICES
Synchronizing the fuel on board with the actual measured fuel on board:
INDEX
Select the FOB SYNC Softkey; or select the MENU Key, highlight ‘Synchronize Fuel on Board’, and press the
ENT Key. The actual measured fuel on board is displayed in the fuel on board field.
280
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the aircraft is in the air and a destination waypoint has been entered, the fuel calculations can be
completed.
• Estimated landing weight = zero fuel weight + estimated landing fuel weight. FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Estimated landing fuel weight = fuel on board weight - (fuel flow x ETE)
• Excess fuel weight = estimated landing fuel weight - fuel reserves weight
If the aircraft is on the ground or a destination waypoint has not been entered, the following fields display
invalid values consisting of six dashes:
• Estimated landing weight
EAS
• Estimated landing fuel weight
• Excess fuel weight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weight Caution And Warning Conditions
If the zero fuel weight is greater than the maximum allowable zero fuel weight, then the zero fuel weight is
displayed in amber.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft weight is greater than the maximum allowable takeoff weight, then the aircraft weight is displayed
in amber.
If the estimated landing weight is greater than the maximum allowable landing weight, then the estimated
landing weight is displayed in amber.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the estimated landing fuel weight is positive, but less than or equal to the fuel reserves weight, the following
values are displayed in amber:
• Estimated fuel at landing weight
• Excess fuel weight
If the estimated landing fuel weight is zero or negative, then the following values are displayed in red:
AFCS
• Estimated fuel at landing weight
• Excess fuel weight
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.10 RAIM Prediction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over WAAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-102 RAIM Prediction
APPENDICES
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, or airway waypoints).
282
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
EAS
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-103 SBAS Display - Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
284
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SBAS Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SBAS SELECTION Box
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-104 SBAS Display - Disabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the WAAS capable GPS system while the
system provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much the
same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
nOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-105 indicating the
active departure leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
EAS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach Point
(MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
2) Figure 5-105 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
INDEX
Figure 5-105 Assigned Heading of 240º
286
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-106.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-106 Assigned Heading of 290º
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-107. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
Figure 5-107 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-108.
INDEX
Figure 5-108 Entering V4 Entry Point
288
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-109.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-109 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-109, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
f) Select the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-110.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-110 List of Available Airways for TOP
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-110.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-111.
Figure 5-111 List of Available Exits for V4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-111.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-112.
Figure 5-112 Ready to Load V4
290
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
k) Press the ENT Key.
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-113.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-113 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ULNAZ. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the
leg.
c) Select the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-114. Note the TOP to
ULNAZ leg is actually part of V4.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-114 Comfirm Active Leg
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-115, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
Figure 5-115 V4 Now Active Leg
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
292
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-116.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-116 Turn on to Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-117.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-117 Turn to Intercept V244
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) As seen in Figure 5-118, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-118 V244 Now Active Leg
294
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-119.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-119 WIZGE to LAA Leg Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-120.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
c) Press the Direct-to (
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-120 Direct To OPSHN
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-121.
INDEX
Figure 5-121 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
296
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-122.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-122 Enter VNV Offset Distance
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-123, the magenta arrow indicating the directto OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset distance
and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure have no
database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a track along
the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
that will be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired
altitude, then pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as light blue meaning it is now used by
the system to determine vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Figure 5-123 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
298
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-124.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-124 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-123.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-125 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-125.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-126.
Figure 5-126 List of Available Transitions
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS
Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
300
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-127 Barometric Minimums Set
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-128.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 5-128 Loaded Approach
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-128. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as light blue text, indicating these values are
“designated” for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-129.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-129 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
302
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Select the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-130.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EAS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-130 Adjusting the Descent
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-131, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reached
the selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-132. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-132, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
AFCS
Figure 5-131 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-132 VDI & RVSI When Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
304
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established which places the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-133.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
Figure 5-133 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-134.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-134 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
305
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-135. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-135 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
306
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-136. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-136 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-137). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
AFCS
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
307
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
Figure 5-137 Approaching PYNON
308
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-138).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-138 Approach is Now Active
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
AFCS
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-139.
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-139 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-140 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
310
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly and is
used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI changes to
the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-141) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-141 Descending to the FAF
AFCS
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-141.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-142.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-142 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
312
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-143.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the
HSI.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 5-143 Missed Approach Active
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-144.
Blank Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-144 Establishing the Holding Pattern
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-145.
Figure 5-145 Hold Established
314
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Flight Management
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.12 Abnormal Operation
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and the system
stops using GPS.
EAS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by the system in DR Mode may become increasingly
unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or heading data
is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated position and,
consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the aircraft. Estimated
position information displayed through DR while there is no heading and/or airspeed data available should not
be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/WAAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compound the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DR Mode is indicated by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the ‘own aircraft’ symbol
as shown in Figure 5-146. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI slightly above and to
the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-146. Also, the CDI deviation bar is removed from
the display. Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’ alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation
using GPS/WAAS source data resumes automatically once a valid GPS solution is restored.
AFCS
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-146.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Also, while the system is in DR Mode, the autopilot does not couple to GPS, and TAWS is disabled. Additionally,
the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts
continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Bearing
EAS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Track Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing Pointer/
Distance
Navigation Data Bar
Wind Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except Active Leg,
TAS, and DTK are in yellow
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
Figure 5-146 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
APPENDICES
Note: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INDEX
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
316
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 6 Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for the Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 are designed to aid situational awareness
and provide advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain,
and air traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69A XM® Satellite Weather (Subscription Optional)
• GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar (Optional)
EAS
Terrain Avoidance
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A (TAWS-A) (Optional)
Traffic
• TIS (Traffic Information Service)
• Garmin GTS 850 Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System I (TCAS I) (Optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ACSS TCAS 3000SP™ Traffic Alert and Collision and Avoidance System II (TCAS II) (Optional)
6.1 XM Satellite Weather
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: XM Satellite Weather data provides information for avoiding hazardous weather. Do not utilize XM
Weather information to penetrate hazardous weather.
AFCS
The XM Satellite Weather (subscription optional) is provided through the GDL 69A, a remote-mounted datalink satellite receiver. Received graphical weather information and associated text is displayed on the Multi
Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map. The GDL 69A can also receive XM
Satellite Radio® entertainment services. Both weather data and entertainment programming operate in the S-band
frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities at any altitude throughout North America.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Activating Services
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Before XM Satellite Weather can be used, the service must be activated. Service is activated by providing XM
Satellite Radio with coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69A. XM Satellite Radio and XM Satellite Weather
services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to XM Satellite Radio to activate
the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
EAS
• The XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
XM Satellite Radio uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to display weather
data and/or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69A.
Activating XM Satellite Weather and XM Satellite Radio services:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Contact XM Satellite Radio by email (address listed on their website, www.xmradio.com) or by the customer
service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the XM Radio page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
3) Select the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
4) Verify that the desired services are activated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Select the LOCK Softkey.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
7) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Audio Radio ID
(for XM Satellite
Radio)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Data Radio ID
(for XM Weather)
APPENDICES
Weather Products
(Available Products
for Service Class
Indicated in Green)
INDEX
Select to Display XM
Information page
318
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Using XM Satellite Weather Products
The primary map for viewing XM Weather data is the Weather Data Link Page in the Map Page Group. This
is the only map display capable of showing information for all available XM weather products.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link Page.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NEXRAD
Weather
Product Age
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Display Enabled
AFCS
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a weather product is active on the Weather Data Link Page or the Navigation Map Page, the age of the
data is displayed on the screen (Figure 6-2). The age of the product is based on the time difference between
when the data was assembled on the ground and the current GPS time. Weather products are refreshed at
specific intervals (defined in the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-1).
APPENDICES
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the defined Expiration Time intervals (see Table
6-1), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. This ensures that the displayed data
is consistent with what is currently being broadcast by XM Satellite Radio services. If more than half of the
expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age displayed changes to yellow.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rate. The refresh rate
represents the interval at which XM Satellite Radio broadcasts new signals that may or may not contain new
weather data. It does not represent the rate at which weather data is updated or new content is received by
the Data Link Receiver. Weather data is updated at intervals that are defined and controlled by XM Satellite
Radio and its data vendors.
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Weather Product
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
XM Lightning
(LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage
no product image
(RADAR CVRG)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
30
5
60
15
30
7.5
30
5
30
12
60
12
90
12
60
12
60
12
60
12
60
12
60
5
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
18
30
5
60
12
60
12
Table 6-1 Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
320
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
SYS Page Group
Nearest Page Group
Flight Plan Pages
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
Weather Data Link
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Navigation Map Page
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
METARs
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
+
AFCS
TAFs
+
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TFRs
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Radar Coverage
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
XM Lightning (LTNG)
EAS
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
Table 6-2 shows which XM products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific maps.
Table 6-2 Weather Product Display Maps
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-3
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled. Unavailable
weather products have subdued softkey labels (softkeys are disabled from selection).
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP
SYSTEM
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
LTNG
CELL MOV
BACK
EAS
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
OFF
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
LEGEND
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
PREV
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link Weather Product Softkeys
INDEX
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link Page control the map range settings
above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the weather
product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus also
provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
322
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘XM Product Group 1’ or ‘XM Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key
(Figure 6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EAS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page with the changed settings.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Maps besides the Weather Data Link Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
EAS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
324
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
Page.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Select the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EAS
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, select the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Echo Tops
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• METARs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the RANGE Knob. The map range is adjusted by turning
the RANGE Knob. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map
Pointer.
AFCS
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Flash Flood
Warning
Selected with
Map Pointer
INDEX
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link Page
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
325
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard Avoidance
WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar), is a network of 158 high-resolution Doppler radar
systems that are operated by the National Weather Service (NWS). NEXRAD data provides centralized
meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The maximum
range of a single NEXRAD radar site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD network
provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
NOTE: NEXRAD cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
NEXRAD data is not real-time. The lapsed time between collection, processing, and dissemination of
NEXRAD images can be significant and may not reflect the current radar synopsis. Due to the inherent delays
and the relative age of the data, it should be used for long-range planning purposes only. Never use NEXRAD
data or any radar data to penetrate hazardous weather. Rather, use it in an early-warning capacity of predeparture and enroute evaluation.
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link Page
APPENDICES
NEXRAD data can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
INDEX
• Airport Information Page
326
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey.
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded to
indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link Page.
For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), select the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for display.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in grayish-purple. Radar capability exists in these areas, but it is not active or is off-line.
Reflectivity
AFCS
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
APPENDICES
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
NEXRAD Limitations
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Block Area is 4 km2
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Data - Zoomed
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
APPENDICES
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
• Metallic dust from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
328
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed because it is unknown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
No Coverage Above 55ºN
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52ºN
Displays as
Mixed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Data - Canada
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Echo Tops
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard Avoidance
Echo Tops data (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest radar echo. The
highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the highest altitude at
which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Note: Display of Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time as Cloud Tops and NEXRAD.
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Data
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Select the ECHO TOPS Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), select the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 ECHO TOPS Legend
330
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of radar coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in grayish-purple. Radar capability exists in these areas, but it is not active or is off-line.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cloud Tops
Note: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
Cloud Tops data (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite imagery.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Data
AFCS
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the CLOUD TOPS Softkey.
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), select the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
XM Lightning
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lightning data (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike
icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact location of the lightning
strike is not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lightning
Strikes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-18 Lightning Data
AFCS
XM Lightning data displays on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link Page
• Flight Plan Pages
Displaying XM Lightning information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
2) Select the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the Weather Data Link Page).
APPENDICES
To display the XM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-19), select the LEGEND
Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-19 Lightning Legend
332
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cell Movement
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Cell Movement data (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as identified by the
ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement indicated with
short, orange arrows.
EAS
Storm Cells
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
On most applicable maps, Cell Movement data is selected for display along with NEXRAD. On the Weather
Data Link Page, Cell Movement data can be selected independently. Cell Movement data can be displayed
on the following maps:
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
•Navigation Map
• Nearest Pages
AFCS
• PFD Inset Map
Displaying Cell Movement information:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link Page.
APPENDICES
2) Select the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link Page). For Cell Movement to be
displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the Navigation
Map Setup Menu (see “Setting Up XM Satellite Weather”).
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link Page, (Figure 6-21), select the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
SIGMETs and AIRMETs
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMET (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMET (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms.
AIRMET IFR
AIRMET Ice
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMET
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRMET Turbulence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
AFCS
2) Select the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the RANGE Knob and move the Map Pointer over the
icon.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), select the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
334
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARs and TAFs
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
Note: METAR information is only displayed within the installed aviation database service area.
EAS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the report.
METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports within a 24- hour period,
and may span up to 36 hours. TAFs typically include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena, and sky
conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, then as raw text. TAF information is displayed only in its raw form when it is available
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link Page, select the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
EAS
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
APPENDICES
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link Page (Figure 6-27), select the LEGEND Softkey
when METARs are selected for display.
INDEX
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
336
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Surface Analysis and City Forecast
Note: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
service area.
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
APPENDICES
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), select the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
337
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Freezing Levels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has
not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the FRZ LVL Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), select the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
INDEX
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
338
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-32) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the WIND Softkey.
EAS
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 30,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), select the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
339
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
County Warnings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
County data (Figure 6-34) provides specific public awareness and protection weather warnings from the
National Weather Service (NWS). This can include information on fires, tornadoes, severe thunderstorms,
flood conditions, and other natural disasters.
EAS
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flood
Warning
AFCS
Figure 6-34 County Flood Warning
Displaying County Warning information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the COUNTY Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-35), select the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
Figure 6-35 County Warnings Legend
340
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Cyclone
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-36) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and their
projected tracks.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Cyclone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-36 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the CYCLONE Softkey.
AFCS
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-37), select the LEGEND Softkey when Cyclones are selected to be
displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-37 Cyclone Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
341
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Icing (CIP & SLD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing environment (Figure 6-38).
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft type).
The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the analysis.
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
EAS
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Icing
Potential
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SLD
Threat
Figure 6-38 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-39), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
Figure 6-39 Icing Potential Legend
342
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Turbulence
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Turbulence data (Figure 6-40) identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence data is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
Displaying Turbulence data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
EAS
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Extreme
Turbulence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Light
Turbulence
Severe
Turbulence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Moderate
Turbulence
AFCS
Figure 6-40 Turbulence Data at 33,000 Feet
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-41), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected
for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-41 Turbulence Legend
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
PIREPs and AIREPs
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. When significant weather
conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs. A PIREP
may contain unforecast adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind
shear, turbulence, and type of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). AIREPs are used almost exclusively by commercial
airlines.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Urgent
PIREP
Selected
Routine
PIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AIREP
Figure 6-42 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link Page
AFCS
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the RANGE Knob and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather
report when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, then as raw text.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link Page.
344
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Age of report in HH:MM
Decoded PIREP Text
Raw PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-43 PIREP Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-44), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs
are selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-44 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.2 Airborne Color Weather Radar
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System Description
The Garmin GWX 68 Airborne Color Weather Radar is a 4-color digital pulsed radar with 6.5 kilowatts
of output power. It combines excellent range and adjustable scanning profiles with a high-definition target
display. The pulse width is four microseconds (µs) on all ranges except the 2.5 nm range. The GWX 68
uses a one µs pulse width at this range to reduce the targets smearing together on the display for better target
definition at close range.
EAS
The Embraer Phenom 100 uses a 12-inch phased array antenna that is fully stabilized to accommodate 30º
of pitch and roll.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
To focus radar scanning on specific areas, Sector Scanning offers pilot-adjustable horizontal scan angles of
20º, 40º, 60º, or 90º. A vertical scanning function helps to analyze storm tops, gradients, and cell buildup
activity at various altitudes.
Radar features include:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Extended Sensitivity Time Constant (STC) logic that automatically correlates distance of the return echo with
intensity, so cells do not suddenly appear to get larger as they get closer.
• WATCH® (Weather ATtenuated Color Highlight) helps identify possible shadowing effects of short-range
cell activity, identifying areas where radar return signals are weakened or attenuated by intense precipitation
(or large areas of lesser precipitation) and may not fully reflect the weather behind a storm.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Weather Alert that looks ahead for intense cell activity in the 80-320 nm range, even if these ranges are not
being monitored.
Principles of Pulsed Airborne Weather Radar
AFCS
The term RADAR is an acronym for RAdio Detecting And Ranging. Pulsed radar locates targets by transmitting
a microwave pulse beam that, upon encountering a target, is reflected back to the radar receiver as a return
echo. The microwave pulses are focused and radiated by the antenna, with the most intense energy in the
center of the beam and decreasing intensity near the edge. The same antenna is used for both transmitting and
receiving. The returned signal is then processed and displayed on the MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Radar detection is a two-way process that requires 12.36 µs for the transmitted microwave pulses to travel
out and back for each nautical mile of target range. It takes 123.6 µs for a transmitted pulse to make the round
trip if a target is ten nautical miles away.
APPENDICES
Airborne weather radar should be used to avoid severe weather, not for penetrating severe weather. The
decision to fly into an area of radar targets depends on target intensity, spacing between the targets, aircraft
capabilities, and pilot experience. Pulse type weather radar detects only precipitation, not clouds or turbulence.
The display may indicate clear areas between intense returns, but this does not necessarily mean it is safe to fly
between them. Only Doppler radar can detect turbulence.
INDEX
Airborne weather radar has other capabilities beyond weather detection. It also has the ability to detect and
provide distance to cities, mountains, coastlines, rivers, lakes, and oceans.
346
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD and Airborne Weather Radar
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Both Airborne Weather Radar and NEXRAD measure weather reflectivity in decibels (dB). A decibel is a
logarithmic expression of the ratio of two quantities. Airborne Weather Radar measures the ratio of power
against the gain of the antenna, while NEXRAD measures the energy reflected back to the radar, or the radar
reflectivity ratio.
Both systems use colors to identify the different echo intensities, but the colors are not interchangeable.
Airborne color radar values used by Garmin Airborne Color Weather Radar should not be confused with
NEXRAD radar values.
EAS
Antenna Beam Illumination
Antenna at Zero Tilt
18,000 ft.
0
15
s
Beam Sidelobe
Max Power at Beam Center
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8°
0
Half Power at
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude (x1000 ft.)
80
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The radar beam is much like the beam of a spotlight. The further the beam travels, the wider it becomes.
The radar is only capable of seeing what is inside the boundaries of the beam. The figure below depicts
a radar beam’s characteristics. The figure illustrates vertical dimensions of the radar beam, although the
same holds true for the horizontal dimensions. In other words, the beam is as wide as it is tall. Note that
it is possible to miss areas of precipitation on the radar display because of the antenna tilt setting. With the
antenna tilt set to zero in this illustration, the beam overshoots the precipitation at 15 nautical miles.
18,000 ft.
30
45
60
75
90
Range (nautical miles)
AFCS
Figure 6-45 Radar Beam from a 12 inch Antenna
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The curvature of the earth can also be a factor in missing areas of precipitation, especially at range settings
of 150 nautical miles or more. Here the beam overshoots the precipitation at less than 320 nautical miles.
APPENDICES
320 nm
INDEX
Figure 6-46 Radar Beam in Relation to the Curvature of the Earth
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
347
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Radar Signal Attenuation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The phenomenon of radar signal attenuation affects the operation of weather radar. When the radar signal
is transmitted, it is progressively absorbed and scattered, making the signal weaker. This weakening, or
attenuation, is caused by two primary sources, distance and precipitation.
EAS
Attenuation because of distance is due to the fact that the radar energy leaving the antenna is inversely
proportional to the square of the distance. The reflected radar energy from a target 40 miles away that fills
the radar beam is one fourth the energy reflected from an equivalent target 20 miles away. This would appear
to the operator that the storm is gaining intensity as the aircraft gets closer. Internal signal processing within
the GWX 68 system compensates for much of this distance attenuation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Attenuation due to precipitation is not as predictable as distance attenuation. It is also more intense. As the
radar signal passes through moisture, a portion of the radar energy is reflected back to the antenna. However,
much of the energy is absorbed. If precipitation is very heavy, or covers a large area, the signal may not
reach completely through the area of precipitation. The weather radar system cannot distinguish between an
attenuated signal and an area of no precipitation. If the signal has been fully attenuated, the radar displays
a radar shadow. This appears as an end to the precipitation when, in fact, the heavy rain may extend much
further. A cell containing heavy precipitation may block another cell located behind the first, preventing it
from being displayed on the radar. Never fly into these shadowed areas and never assume that all of the heavy
precipitation is being displayed unless another cell or a ground target can be seen beyond the heavy cell. The
WATCH® feature of the GWX 68 Weather Radar system can help in identifying these shadowed areas. Areas
in question appear as shadowed or gray on the radar display. Proper use of the antenna tilt control can also
help detect radar shadows.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Attenuation can also be due to poor maintenance or degradation of the radome. Even the smallest amount of
wear and scratching, pitting, and pinholes on the radome surface can cause damage and system inefficiency.
Radar Signal Reflectivity
AFCS
Precipitation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Precipitation or objects more dense than water, such as the surface of the earth or solid structures, are
detected by the weather radar. The weather radar does not detect clouds, thunderstorms, or turbulence
directly. It detects precipitation associated with clouds, thunderstorms, and turbulence. The best radar
signal reflectors are raindrops, wet snow, or wet hail. The larger the raindrop, the better the reflectivity. The
size of the precipitation droplet is the most important factor in radar reflectivity. Because large drops in a
small concentrated area are characteristic of a severe thunderstorm, the radar displays the storm as a strong
return. Ice crystals, dry snow, and dry hail have low levels of reflectivity as shown in the illustration, and
often not displayed by the radar. Additionally, a cloud that contains only small raindrops, such as fog or
drizzle, does not reflect enough radar energy to produce a measurable target return.
348
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-47 Precipitation Type and Reflectivity
Ground Returns
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The intensity of ground target returns depends upon the angle at which the radar beam strikes the
ground target (Angle of Incidence) and the reflective properties of that target. The gain can be adjusted so
shorelines, rivers, lakes, and cities are well defined. Increasing the gain too much causes the display to fill
in between targets, thus obscuring some landmarks.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Cities normally provide a strong return signal. While large buildings and structures provide good returns,
small buildings can be shadowed from the radar beam by the taller buildings. As the aircraft approaches
and shorter ranges are selected, details become more noticeable as the highly reflective regular lines and
edges of the city become more defined.
AFCS
Bodies of water such as lakes, rivers, and oceans are not good reflectors and normally do not provide good
returns. The energy is reflected in a forward scatter angle with inadequate energy being returned. They
can appear as dark areas on the display. However, rough or choppy water is a better reflector and provides
stronger returns from the downwind sides of the waves.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mountains also provide strong return signals to the antenna, but also block the areas behind. However,
over mountainous terrain, the radar beam can be reflected back and forth in the mountain passes or off
canyon walls, using up all or most of the radar energy. In this case, no return signal is received from this
area, causing the display to show a dark spot which could indicate a pass where no pass exists.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Angle of Incidence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The angle at which the radar beam strikes the target is called the Angle of Incidence. The figure illustrates
the incident angle (‘A’). This directly affects the detectable range, the area of illumination, and the intensity
of the displayed target returns. A large incident angle gives the radar system a smaller detectable range and
lower display intensity due to minimized reflection of the radar energy.
Figure 6-48 Angle of Incidence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A smaller incident angle gives the radar a larger detectable range of operation and the target display
shows a higher intensity. Since more radar energy is reflected back to the antenna with a low incident
angle, the resulting detectable range is increased for mountainous terrain.
Safe Operating Distance
AFCS
The following information establishes a minimum safe distance from the antenna for personnel near
operating weather radar. The minimum safe distance is based on the FCC’s exposure limit at 9.3 to 9.5 GHz
for general population/uncontrolled environments, which is 1 mW/cm2. See Advisory Circular 20-68B for
more information on safe distance determination.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Maximum Permissible Exposure Level (MPEL)
INDEX
APPENDICES
The zone in which the radiation level exceeds the US Government standard of 1 mW/cm2 is the semicircular
area of at least 11 feet from the 12-inch antenna. All personnel must remain outside of this zone. With a
scanning or rotating beam, the averaged power density at the MPEL boundary is significantly reduced.
350
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MPEL
Boundary
EAS
11’ for 12”
antenna
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-49 MPEL Boundary
Basic Antenna Tilt Setup
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following discussion is a simple method for setting up the weather radar antenna tilt for most situations.
It is not to be considered an all encompassing setup that works in all situations, but this method does provide
good overall parameters for the monitoring of threats. Ultimately, it is desired to have the antenna tilted so that
the bottom of the radar beam is four degrees below parallel with the ground. The following example explains
one way of achieving this.
AFCS
With the aircraft flying level, adjust the antenna tilt so ground returns are displayed at a distance that equals
the aircraft’s current altitude (AGL) divided by 1,000. For example, if the aircraft is at 14,000 feet, adjust the
tilt so the front edge of ground returns are displayed at 14 nautical miles. Note this antenna tilt angle setting.
Now, raise the antenna tilt 6 degrees above this setting. The bottom of the radar beam is now angled down 4º
from parallel with the ground.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
351
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Practical Application Using the Basic Tilt Setup
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
With the antenna tilt set as previously described, any displayed target return should be scrutinized when
flying at altitudes between 2,000 and 30,000 feet AGL. If the displayed target advances on the screen to
within 5 nautical miles of the aircraft, avoid it. This may be either weather or ground returns that are 2,000
feet or less below the aircraft. Raising the antenna tilt 4 degrees can help separate ground returns from
weather returns in relatively flat terrain. This aligns the bottom of the radar beam parallel with the ground.
Return the antenna tilt to the previous setting after a few sweeps.
EAS
If the aircraft is above 29,000 feet, be cautious of any target return that gets to within 30 nautical miles.
This is likely a thunderstorm that has a top high enough that the aircraft cannot fly over it safely.
If the aircraft altitude is 15,000 feet or lower, setting the displayed range to 60 miles may be more helpful.
Closely monitor anything that enters the display.
4000
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Change in Antenna Tilt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
+4°
+3°
+2°
+1°
0°
-1°
-2°
-3°
-4°
3000
2000
1000
0
1000
2000
3000
10 nm
4000
Vertical Change of Radar Beam (feet)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Also, after setting up the antenna tilt angle as described previously, ground returns can be monitored for
possible threats. The relationship between antenna tilt angle, altitude, and distance is one degree of tilt
equals 100 feet of altitude for every one nautical mile.
AFCS
Figure 6-50 Vertical Change in Radar Beam per Nautical Mile
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Therefore, with the antenna tilt set so that the bottom of the beam is four degrees below parallel with
the ground, a target return at 10 nm is approximately 4,000 feet below the aircraft; at 20 nm, 8,000 feet;
at 50 nm, 20,000 feet. In other words, at this tilt setting, a ground return (such as a mountain peak) being
displayed at 10 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 4,000 feet. A ground target return
being displayed at 5 nm would have a maximum distance below the aircraft of 2,000 feet.
INDEX
APPENDICES
This setup provides a good starting point for practical use of the GWX 68. There are many other factors to
consider in order to become proficient at using weather radar in all situations.
352
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Weather Mapping and Interpretation
Weather Display Interpretation
Black
Green
Yellow
Red
Magenta
< 23 dBZ
23 dBZ to < 32 dBZ
32 dBZ to < 41 dBZ
41 dBZ to < 50 dBZ
50 dBZ and greater
Approximate
Precipitation Rate
(in/hr.)
< .01.
.01 - 0.1.
0.1 - 0.5
0.5 - 2
>2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intensity
EAS
Weather Mode Color
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When evaluating various target returns on the weather radar display, the colors denote precipitation
intensity and rates shown in the table.
Table 6-3 Precipitation Intensity Levels
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Thunderstorms
Updrafts and downdrafts in thunderstorms carry water through the cloud. The more severe the drafts, the
greater the number and size of the precipitation droplets. With this in mind, the following interpretations
can be made from what is displayed on the weather radar. Avoid these areas by an extra wide margin.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• In areas where the displayed target intensity is red or magenta (indicating large amounts of precipitation),
the turbulence is considered severe.
• Areas that show steep color gradients (intense color changes) over thin bands or short distances suggest
irregular rainfall rate and strong turbulence.
AFCS
• Areas that show red or magenta are associated with hail or turbulence, as well as heavy precipitation. Vertical scanning and antenna tilt management may be necessary to identify areas of maximum
intensity.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Along squall lines (multiple cells or clusters of cells in a line) individual cells may be in different stages
of development. Areas between closely spaced, intense targets may contain developing clouds not having
enough moisture to produce a return. However, these areas could have strong updrafts or downdrafts.
Targets showing wide areas of green are generally precipitation without severe turbulence.
Irregularities in the target return may also indicate turbulence, appearing as hooks, fingers, or scalloped
edges. These irregularities may be present in green areas with no yellow, red, or magenta areas and should
be treated as highly dangerous areas. Avoid these areas as if they are red or magenta.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Squall Line
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Steep Gradient
Hook or Finger
Scalloped Edge
Figure 6-51 Cell Irregularities
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Thunderstorm development is rapid. A course may become blocked within a short time. When displaying
shorter ranges, periodically select a longer range to see if problems are developing further out. That can
help prevent getting trapped in a blind alley or an area that is closed at one end by convective weather.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-52 The Blind Alley - Horizontal Scan
354
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In areas of multiple heavy cells, use the Vertical Scan feature along with antenna tilt management to
examine the areas. Remember to avoid shadowed areas behind targets.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
The Large Storm Behind
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Blind Alley at Close Range
Figure 6-53 The Blind Alley
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Tornadoes
There are no conclusive radar target return characteristics which identify a tornado. However, tornadoes
may be present if the following characteristics are observed:
• A narrow, finger-like portion extends and in a short time curls into a hook and closes on itself.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• A hook, which may be in the general shape of the numeral 6 (numeral 9 in the southern hemisphere),
especially if bright and projecting from the southwest quadrant (northeast quadrant in the southern
hemisphere) of a major thunderstorm.
• V-shaped notches.
• Doughnut shapes.
AFCS
These shapes do not always indicate tornadoes, and tornado returns are not limited to these characteristics.
Confirmed radar observations of tornadoes most often have not shown shapes different from those of a
normal thunderstorm display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Hail
APPENDICES
Hail results from updrafts carrying water high enough to freeze. Therefore, the higher the top of a
thunderstorm, the greater the probability that it contains hail. Vertically scanning the target return can
give the radar top of a thunderstorm that contains hail. Radar top is the top of a storm cell as detected by
radar. It is not the actual top, or true top of the storm. The actual top of a storm cell is seen with the eyes
in clear air and may be much higher than the radar top. The actual top does not indicate the top of the
hazardous area.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Hail can fall below the minimum reflectivity threshold for radar detection. It can have a film of water on
its surface, making its reflective characteristics similar to a very large water droplet. Because of this film of
water, and because hail stones usually are larger than water droplets, thunderstorms with large amounts
of wet hail return stronger signals than those with rain. Some hail shafts are extremely narrow (100 yards
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
or less) and make poor radar targets. In the upper regions of a cell where ice particles are dry (no liquid
coating), target returns are less intense.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hail shafts are associated with the same radar target return characteristics as tornados. U-shaped cloud
edges three to seven miles across can also indicate hail. These target returns appear quite suddenly along
any edge of the cell outline. They also change in intensity and shape in a matter of seconds, making vigilant
monitoring essential.
Operation in Weather Mode
EAS
WARNING: Begin transmitting only when it is safe to do so. When transmitting while the aircraft is on the
ground, no personnel or objects should be within 11 feet of the antenna.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CAUTION: In Standby mode, the antenna is parked at the center line. It is always a good idea to put the
radar in Standby mode before taxiing the aircraft to prevent the antenna from bouncing on the bottom stop
and possibly causing damage to the radar assembly.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the weather radar system is in the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically switches
to Standby mode on landing.
In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system automatically switches to Standby mode. The system
remains in Standby mode until both displays are restored. In Reversionary mode, the weather radar system
cannot be controlled.
Scan Line
Antenna Stabilization Status
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Radar Mode
INDEX
Figure 6-54 Horizontal Scan Display
356
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying weather on the Weather Radar Page:
1) Select the Weather Radar Page in the Map Page Group with the FMS Knob.
2) Select the MODE Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) While on the ground, select the STANDBY Softkey. A 1 minute warm-up period is initiated (countdown is
displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar enters the Standby Mode.
a)
Select the WEATHER Softkey. A confirmation window is displayed.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-55 Confirming Activating Radar
b)
Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight YES and press the ENT Key to continue radar activation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
OR:
If the aircraft is airborne, select the WEATHER Softkey. A 1 minute warm-up period is initiated (countdown is
displayed on the screen). After the warm-up is complete, the radar begins transmitting.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the RANGE Knob to select the desired map range.
5) The horizontal scan is initially displayed (Figure 6-54). If desired, select the VERTICAL Softkey to change to
vertical scanning.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
357
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Vertically scanning a storm cell:
NOTE: Vertical scanning of a storm cell should be done with the aircraft wings level to avoid constant
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
adjustment of the Bearing Line.
1) While in the Horizontal Scan view, select the BRG Softkey. This places the cursor in the BEARING field and
displays the Bearing Line.
If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Bearing
Line. Press the ENT Key.
EAS
2) Press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line on the desired storm cell or other area to be vertically
scanned.
Bearing Line
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scan Line
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-56 Bearing Line on Horizontal Scan
4) Select the VERTICAL Softkey. A vertical scan of the selected area is displayed (Figure 6-57).
5) The small FMS Knob may be used to move the scanned bearing line a few degrees right or left.
6) Turn the RANGE Knob to adjust the range.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
8) To select a new area to be vertically scanned, select the HORIZON Softkey to return to the Horizontal Scan view
and repeat the previous steps.
INDEX
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust bearing from left to right.
358
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-57 Vertical Scan Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adjusting Antenna Tilt Angle
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In order to make an accurate interpretation of a storm cell, the radar beam should be pointed at the wet
part of the weather cell to record the proper rainfall intensity (color level). The ideal aiming point is just
below the freezing level of the storm. The best way to find this point is to use the Vertical Scan feature. The
antenna tilt angle can be centered on the strongest return area in the vertical scan to get a more accurate
view of the coverage and intensity of the target in the horizontal scan.
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Horizontal Scan display:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the TILT field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired antenna tilt angle.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust tilt up and down.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
359
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Adjusting antenna tilt on the Vertical Scan display:
1) Select the TILT Softkey to activate the cursor in the TILT field and display the Tilt Line.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the Tilt Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select Show Tilt Line. Press
the ENT Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the antenna tilt angle. The selected tilt angle is implemented when Horizontal
Scan is selected again.
The RANGE Knob can also be used to adjust tilt.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Tilt Line
Scan Line
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-58 Adjusting Tilt on Vertical Scan Display
360
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adjusting Gain
WARNING: Changing the gain in weather mode causes precipitation intensity to be displayed as a color
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
not representative of the true intensity. Remember to return the gain setting to Calibrated for viewing the
actual intensity of precipitation.
1) Select the GAIN Softkey to activate the cursor in the GAIN field.
EAS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to adjust the gain for the desirable level. The gain setting is visible in the GAIN field
as a movable horizontal bar in a flashing box. The line pointer is a reference depicting the calibrated position.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
4) Select the GAIN Softkey again to recalibrate the gain. CALIBRATED is displayed in the GAIN field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manual Gain Set Below Calibrated
AFCS
Calibrated Gain
Figure 6-59 Gain Calibration
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Sector Scan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While in horizontal scan mode, select the BRG Softkey to display the Bearing Line and place the cursor in the
BEARING field. If the Bearing Line is not displayed, press the MENU Key and turn the large FMS Knob to select
Show Bearing Line.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
2) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-60 Selecting Sector Scan Position
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to place the Bearing Line in the desired position. The location of the Bearing Line
becomes the center point of the Sector Scan.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the SECTOR SCAN field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select FULL, 60˚, 40˚, or 20˚ scan.
AFCS
6) If desired, readjust the Bearing Line as discussed previously to change the center of the Sector Scan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Select the BRG Softkey again to remove the Bearing Line and cursor. The bearing reference is reset to 0º.
Figure 6-61 40˚ Sector Scan
362
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Antenna Stabilization
1) To activate or deactivate the antenna stabilization, select the MODE Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the STAB ON Softkey to activate antenna stabilization or select the STAB OFF Softkey to deactivate. The
current stabilization condition is shown in the upper right of the weather radar display.
Weather Attenuated Color Highlight (WATCH®)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displayed intensity is questionable.
Potentially stronger than displayed.
EAS
WATCH® identifies deceptively strong or unknown intensity parts of a storm. While in horizontal scan
mode, this feature can be used as a tool to determine areas of possible inaccuracies in displayed intensity due
to weakening of the radar energy. This weakening is known as attenuation. The radar energy weakens as
it passes through areas of intense precipitation, large areas of lesser precipitation, and distance. Issues with
the radome attenuates the radar energy. All these factors have an effect on the return intensity. The more
energy that dissipates, the lesser the displayed intensity of the return. Accuracy of the displayed intensity
of returns located in the shaded areas are suspect. Make maneuvering decisions with this information in
mind. Proper antenna tilt management should still be employed to determine the extent of attenuation in
a shaded area.
To activate or deactivate the WATCH® feature, select the WATCH Softkey.
Areas of
Attenuated Signal
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Horizontal Scan Without WATCH®
Horizontal Scan With WATCH®
APPENDICES
Figure 6-62 Horizontal Scan Without and With WATCH®
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Weather Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Weather Alert feature indicates the presence of heavy precipitation between the ranges of 80 and 320
nm regardless of the currently displayed range. Weather Alert targets appear as red bands along the outer
range ring at the approximate azimuth of the detected returns.
If a Weather Alert is detected within ±10° of the aircraft heading, an alert is displayed on the PFD in the
Messages Window.
If the antenna tilt is adjusted too low, a weather alert can be generated by ground returns. To avoid
unwanted weather alerts, deselect the WX ALRT Softkey..
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Weather Alerts
Figure 6-63 Weather Alert Indications
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To activate or deactivate Weather Alerts, select the WX ALRT Softkey. Activating and deactivating enables
or inhibits the alert on the PFD.
INDEX
Figure 6-64 Weather Alert on PFD
364
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Ground Mapping and Interpretation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A secondary use of the weather radar system is for the presentation of terrain. This can be a useful tool for
verifying aircraft position. A picture of the ground is represented much like a topographical map that can be
used as a supplement to the navigation map on the MFD.
Ground Map mode uses a different gain range than Weather mode. Different colors are also used to represent
the intensity levels. The displayed intensity of ground target returns are defined in the table below. Use of the
GAIN and TILT controls help improve contrast so that specific ground targets can be recognized more easily.
As previously discussed, the type and orientation of the target in relation to the aircraft affects the intensity
displayed.
EAS
When the weather radar system is in either the Weather or Ground Map mode, the system automatically
switches to Standby mode upon landing.
Black
Light blue
Magenta
Blue
Intensity
0 dB
> 0 dB to < 9 dB
9 dB to < 18 dB
18 dB to < 27 dB
27 dB and greater
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Yellow
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Ground Map
Mode Color
Table 6-4 Ground Target Return Intensity Levels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Operation in Ground Map Mode
1) Select the MODE Softkey.
2) Select the GROUND Softkey to place the radar in Ground Map mode.
3) Select the BACK Softkey.
AFCS
4) Select the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the TILT field.
6) Adjust the antenna tilt angle by turning the small FMS Knob to display ground returns at the desired distance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.3 TAWS-B
Warning: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
EAS
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System Class B) is used to increase situational awareness and aid in
reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS provides visual and aural annunciations when terrain and
obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings are advisory
in nature only.
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B requires the following to operate properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based
altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used to determine TAWS-B alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by
factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature that normally
affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine MSL
altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain
and obstacle alerts.
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GPS-MSL altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to
calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this
manner, TAWS can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude
differing from the baro-corrected altitude.
366
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying TAWS-B Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-65 and Table 6-5 are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-65 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Potential
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL Impact Points
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
Table 6-5 TAWS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
AFCS
TAWS information can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• PFD Inset Map
• TAWS-B Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
APPENDICES
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey).
2) Select the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled for
display and a legend for TAWS-B terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-66).
Figure 6-66 TAWS Icon and Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
368
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-67).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-68).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-69).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
EAS
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-67 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-68 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-69 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TAWS-B Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TAWS-B Page is specialized to show terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to
the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other
NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect,
the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map
range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
EAS
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Select the VIEW Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View 120º’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
370
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Yellow Terrain
(Caution
- Terrain
Between
100’ and
1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
EAS
Black Terrain
(Terrain
More than
1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-70 TAWS-B Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Yellow Terrain
(Caution
- Terrain
Between
100’ and
1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
AFCS
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’
Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red Terrain
(Warning Terrain Above
or Within 100’
Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
APPENDICES
Annunciation Window
Figure 6-71 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TAWS-B Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-6 shows TAWS
alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-B
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EAS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-73 Navigation Map Page
TAWS Pop-up Alert
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-72 TAWS PFD Alert Annunciation with SVS
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-74 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
372
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
PFD/MFD TAWS-A
Page
Annunciation
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning
(IOI)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution
(IOI)
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
“Too Low, Terrain”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
*
None
None
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Premature Descent Alert Caution
(PDA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
EAS
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alert Type
“Don’t Sink”
“Five-Hundred”
Table 6-6TAWS-B Alerts
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Excessive Descent Rate Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-75 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
EAS
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
Descent Rate (FPM)
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
500
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-75 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
AFCS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-76. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-76.
374
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
700
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
500
400
300
EAS
Required Terrain Clearance (FT)
600
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-76 FLTA Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
Premature Descent Alerting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-77).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
AFCS
600
500
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
400
300
PDA Alerting Area
200
APPENDICES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-77 PDA Alerting Threshold
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
375
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PDA and FLTA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when
inhibiting TAWS and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When TAWS-B is inhibited, the alert
annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD (Figure 6-78).
Figure 6-78 TAWS Alerting Disabled
(TAWS-B Inhibited) Annunciation
EAS
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Select the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS (choice dependent on current state).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If TAWS-B alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS approach,
a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft altitude is at
least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments Section
for details.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Five-Hundred Aural Alert
The purpose of the aural alert message “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert that the aircraft is
500 feet above terrain or the destination runway elevation. When the aircraft reaches this altitude, the aural
message “Five-hundred” is generated. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany
the aural message.
AFCS
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff Alert
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The aural message “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up
terrain alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the
following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
APPENDICES
• Distance from the departure airport is 2 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
INDEX
Figures 6-79 and 6-80 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b.
376
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1000
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
700
600
500
“DON’T SINK”
400
300
EAS
200
100
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-79 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1000
800
700
600
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
500
400
“DON’T SINK”
300
200
AFCS
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-80 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
System Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also
be manually initiated. An aural alert is issued at test completion. TAWS-B System Testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
PFD/MFD Alert TAWS Page
Annunciation Annunciation
Alert Type
System Test in Progress
EAS
System Test Pass
None
TAWS-B System Test Fail
Aural Message
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-7 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-81).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select ‘Test TAWS’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
AFCS
Figure 6-81 TAWS-B Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
INDEX
APPENDICES
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The aural message “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal is re-established and the aircraft is within the database coverage
area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is generated.
378
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
“TAWS System Failure”
NO GPS
POSITION
Out of database coverage
area
None
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when sufficient GPS signal is
re-established.
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when aircraft enters database
coverage area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS FAIL
EAS
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, invalid
software configuration, TAWS
audio fault
No GPS position, excessively
degraded GPS signal
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aural Message
PFD/TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Alert Cause
Table 6-8 TAWS-B Abnormal Conditions
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.4 TAWS-A
Warning: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS-A is intended only to enhance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed when the aircraft latitude is greater than 75° North or 60° South.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
EAS
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-A (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class A) is an optional feature to increase situational awareness
and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-A provides visual and aural annunciations when
terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed alerts and warnings
are advisory in nature only.
TAWS-A satisfies TSO-C151b Class A and TSO-92c requirements for certification.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Class A TAWS requires the following components:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
• Valid flap and landing gear status inputs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• A valid radar altimeter
AFCS
TAWS-A uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-A are referenced to mean sea level (MSL). Using the GPS
position and GPS-MSL altitude, TAWS-A displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative
to the position and altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GPS-MSL altitude are used to
calculate and “predict” the aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this
manner, TAWS-A can provide advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
INDEX
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS-A uses information from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude, along with
additional altitude input from the radar altimeter. GPS altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS
altitude is converted to a mean sea level (MSL)-based altitude (GPS-MSL altitude) and is used in part to determine
TAWS-A alerts. GPS-MSL altitude accuracy is affected by factors such as satellite geometry, but it is not subject to
variations in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude devices. GPS-MSL altitude does not
require local altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. Therefore, GPS altitude provides a highly accurate and
reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
Class A TAWS incorporates radar altimeter input with the GPS-MSL altitude to provide a more accurate position
reference when at lower altitudes for certain alert types, and to retain a level of ground proximity warning capability
in the unlikely event of an airport, terrain or obstacle database failure.
380
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter setting
to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions seldom
match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where pressure,
temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read from the
altimeter) to differ from the GPS-MSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s true altitude differing from
the baro-corrected altitude.
TAWS-A provides the following alert types:
• Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) Alerting, which consists of:
EAS
• Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) / Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC) Alerting
• Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) / Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) Alerting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Ground Proximity Warning System (GPWS) Alerting, which consists of:
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) Alerting
• Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) to Terrain Alerting
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Into Terrain (FIT) Alerting
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR) after takeoff Alerting
• Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation (GSD) Alerting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Altitude Voice Call Out (VCO) Alerting
Displaying TAWS-A Data
AFCS
TAWS-A uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-82 and Table 6-9 are used to represent terrain,
obstacles, and potential impact points.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-82 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-A
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
Potential
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL Impact Points
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
EAS
Table 6-9 TAWS-A Obstacle Colors and Symbology
TAWS-A Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The TAWS-A Page shows terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point data in relation to the aircraft’s current
altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation data (airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed
for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically
zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the TAWS-A Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the TAWS-A Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-A Page.
Changing the TAWS-A Page view:
1) Select the VIEW Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select ‘View Arcº’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-A Page:
INDEX
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
382
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Yellow Terrain
(Caution
- Terrain
Between
100’ and
1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
EAS
Black Terrain
(Terrain
More than
1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Legend
Annunciation
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-83 TAWS-A Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Black Terrain
(Terrain More
than 1000’
Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Caution
- Terrain
Between
100’ and
1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red Terrain
(Warning Terrain Above
or Within 100’
Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
APPENDICES
Annunciation
Window
Figure 6-84 TAWS-A Page (ARC View)
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TAWS-A Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-A software algorithms.
TAWS-A alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, visual annunciations are displayed and aural alerts are simultaneously issued. Table 6-10 shows
TAWS-A alert types with corresponding annunciations and aural messages.
EAS
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-A Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter or upper right of the Airspeed indicator on the PFD and below the
Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-A Page is not already displayed on the MFD, a pop-up alert appears
on the MFD while an alert is active. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-A Page)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
PFD with TAWS-A Annunciations
INDEX
MFD Pop-Up Alert (on non-TAWS-A pages)
MFD TAWS-A Page with Alert Annunciation
Figure 6-86 TAWS-A Annunciations
384
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
PFD/MFD TAWS-A
Page
Annunciation
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning
(IOI)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“<whoop> <whoop> Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution
(IOI)
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Premature Descent Alert Caution
(PDA)
“Too Low, Terrain”
“Sink Rate”
Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR)
“Terrain, Terrain”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
“Don’t Sink”
*
“Too Low, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Gear”
Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Flaps”
Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution
(FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
“Glide Slope”
or
“Glide Path”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”, “Four-Hundred”, “Three-Hundred”*, “Two-Hundred”, “One-Hundred”
(depends on approach type)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
or
or
AFCS
Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution
(FIT)
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“<whoop> <whoop> Pull Up”
EAS
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
Glide Slope/Glide Path Deviation
Caution (GSD)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Alert Type
APPENDICES
Table 6-10 TAWS-A Alerts
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-87. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-A Page.
EAS
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle cell in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-A Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-87.
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
800
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
5
10
15
20
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance
From Runway (NM)
25
30
AFCS
Figure 6-87 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
386
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Premature Descent Alerting
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-88).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is below 700 feet AGL within 15 nm of the destination airport and
ends when the aircraft is 0.5 nm from the runway threshold.
800
600
EAS
500
400
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
300
PDA Alerting Area
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
Figure 6-88 PDA Alerting Threshold
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inhibiting FLTA and PDA Alerts
NOTE: The ‘Inhibit TAWS’ function only inhibits FLTA and PDA alerts. Alerting for GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR,
NCR, FIT) and GSD is controlled independently from FLTA and PDA alerts.
AFCS
FLTA and PDA aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting
alerts and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When PDA and FLTA alerts are inhibited, the
alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and on the TAWS-A Page annunciation window of the
MFD (Figure 6-89).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-89 TAWS-A Page Menu and Inhibit Annunciation
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Inhibiting/enabling FLTA and PDA alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-A Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the TAWS INH Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-A (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key. (Figure 6-89)
2) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
If PDA and FLTA alerts are inhibited when the Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint in a GPS WAAS
approach, a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation may appear on the PFD next to the Altimeter if the current aircraft
altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix. See the Flight Instruments
Section for details.
Excessive Descent Rate Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide suitable notification when the
aircraft is determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain at an excessive speed. Figure 6-90 shows the
parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4500
INK
n: “S
4000
”
RATE
io
Caut
3500
3000
2500
AFCS
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
Descent Rate (FPM)
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
0
0
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
500
APPENDICES
Figure 6-90 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
Excessive Closure Rate Alert
The Excessive Closure Rate (ECR) alert provides suitable notification when the aircraft is determined to
be closing upon terrain at an excessive speed for a given aircraft gear and flap configuration.
INDEX
Figures 6-91 and 6-92 show the ECR alerting criteria for flaps in the landing configuration and for all other
flight phases respectively.
388
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECR alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is 5 nm from the nearest airport, except when FLTA
is not available (causing the TAWS N/A or TAWS FAIL annunciation), in which case ECR alerting will remain
active until landing.
EAS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Closure Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-91 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps Up or Takeoff Configuration)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
AFCS
APPENDICES
Closure Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-92 Excessive Closure Rate Alert Criteria (Flaps in Landing Configuration)
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Flight Into Terrain Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
*
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Into Terrain (FIT) caution alerts occur when the aircraft is too low with respect to terrain and
the gear or flaps are not configured for landing. The aircraft may also be above or below the recommended
approach speed. FIT alerts are issued when flight conditions meet the criteria shown in Figure 6-93.
Altitude Rate (FPM)
*
* Flap position will not trigger alert if Flap Override option is enabled; see discussion below.
Figure 6-93 Flight Into Terrain Alert Criteria (Aircraft Configuration)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To reduce nuisance FIT alerts on approaches where flap extension is not desired (or is intentionally delayed),
the pilot may override FIT alerting based on the flap position, while all other FIT alerting remains in effect.
INDEX
Figure 6-94 TAWS-A Page Menu and FIT Flap Override Annunciation
390
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Overriding Flaps-based FIT alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-A Page
2) Select the FLAP OVR Softkey
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key. (Figure 6-94)
2) Select ‘Flap Override’ or ‘Disable Flap Override’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
EAS
When the Flaps Override option is enabled, the annunciation ‘FLAP OVR’ is annunciated on the PFD and
on the TAWS-A Page of the MFD (Figure 6-94). If GPWS alerts are also inhibited (which include FIT), the
‘FLAP OVR’ annunciation is not shown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FIT alerts also occur during takeoff or go-around if the aircraft’s height above ground level (as determined by
the radar altimeter) is too close to rising terrain. TAWS-A will issue the aural message “Too Low - Terrain”
and visual annunciations when conditions enter the caution alert area (Figure 6-95).
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
AFCS
Radio Altitude Loss (Feet)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-95 FIT Alerting After Takeoff
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Negative Climb Rate After Takeoff Alert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The aural message “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the MFD if the TAWS-A Page is not already displayed. NCR alerting for TAWS-A is only active when
departing from an airport and when the following conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
EAS
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
• Landing gear or flaps are configured for takeoff
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figures 6-96 and 6-97 show the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b
1000
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
900
800
700
600
500
“DON’T SINK”
400
300
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
AFCS
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-96 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
APPENDICES
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
900
800
700
600
500
“DON’T SINK”
400
300
200
INDEX
100
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
Figure 6-97 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
392
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Inhibiting GPWS Alerts (EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR)
NOTE: The ‘Inhibit GPWS’ function only affects GPWS alerts (EDR, ECR, NCR, and FIT). Alerting for FLTA,
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PDA, and GSD is controlled independently from the GPWS alerts listed below.
EDR, ECR, FIT, and NCR aural and visual alerts can be manually inhibited as a group. Discretion should be
used when inhibiting alerts and the GPWS system should be enabled when appropriate. When these alerts
are inhibited, the alert annunciation ‘GPWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and on the TAWS-A Page annunciation
window of the MFD (Figure 6-98).
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-98 TAWS-A Page Menu and GPWS Inhibit Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inhibiting/enabling GPWS alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-A Page.
2) Select the GPWS INH Softkey to inhibit or enable GPWS alerts (choice dependent on current state).
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key. (Figure 6-98)
b) Select ‘Inhibit GPWS’ or ‘Enable GPWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Excessive below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Radio Altitude (Feet)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Glideslope Deviation or Glidepath Deviation (GSD) caution alert is issued when the system detects
that the aircraft is significantly below the glidepath for the selected approach in relation to the aircraft’s height
above terrain (Figure 6-99).
“GLIDESLOPE”
or
“GLIDEPATH”
Number of Dots Below Glideslope/Glidepath
Figure 6-99 Excessive Below Glideslope/Glidepath Deviation Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GSD alerting is only active after departure and the following conditions are met:
• An ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach is active and vertical navigation indications are being
displayed.
• Aircraft is below 1000 feet AGL.
AFCS
• Gear is configured for landing.
When a GSD caution alert occurs on an ILS approach, the aural and visual annunciation ‘GLIDESLOPE’
is issued. If a GSD caution alert occurs on an LPV, LNAV/VNAV, or LNAV+V approach, the aural and visual
annunciation ‘GLIDEPATH’ is issued (Figure 6-100).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Inhbiting GSD Alerts
NOTE: GSD alerting may only be inhibited while a GSD alert is occurring. GSD alerts are inhibited
APPENDICES
independently from all other FLTA, PDA, and GPWS alerts.
INDEX
During a GSD alert, the PFD Softkeys are reconfigured as shown in figure 6-100 to provide an option to
inhibit the alert. A ‘GLIDESLOPE’ alert will display a GS INH Softkey to inhibit the alert. A ‘GLIDEPATH’
alert will display a GP INH Softkey to inhibit the alert. When an inhibit Softkey is pressed, the PFD
Softkeys return to the top-level display. Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level of the PFD
Softkeys without inhibiting the GSD alert.
394
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-100 GSD Alert and PFD Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GSD alerts may also be inhibited on the TAWS-A Page while a GSD alert is occuring.
Inhibiting/Enabling GSD alerting (only available during a GSD alert):
1) Select the TAWS-A Page.
AFCS
2) Select the GS INH or GP INH Softkey to inhibit or enable GSD alerts (softkey choice dependent on present GSD
alert type).
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key. (Figure 6-101)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the option to inhibit or enable the glideslope or glidepath alerting (choice dependent on present GSD
alert type) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-101 TAWS-A Page Menu and Glideslope Alerting Inhibited Annunciation
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
The annunciation ‘GS INH’ or ‘GP INH’ is displayed on the PFD and TAWS-A Page when GSD Alerting
is inhibited. Discretion should be used when inhibiting GSD alerts. Inhibiting GSD alerts has no effect the
Glideslope or VNV flight instruments.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)
EAS
TAWS-A provides aural advisory alerts as the aircraft descends, beginning at 500 feet. When the aircraft is
500 feet above terrain or the destination runway elevation, the aural alert message “Five-hundred” is issued.
By default, additional VCO alerts are enabled for 400, 300, 200, and 100 feet. Maintenance personnel may
enable or disable VCO alert altitudes with the exception of the “Five-hundred” aural alert, which is always
enabled. There are no display annunciations or pop-up alerts that accompany the aural VCO message(s).
System Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During power-up, TAWS-A conducts a self-test of its aural and visual annunciations. The system test can also
be manually initiated. A single chime is issued at test completion. TAWS-A System Testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots. TAWS-A terrain alerts will not be issued while a test is in progress.
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Aural Message
TAWS System Fail
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
GPWS System Fail
None
“GPWS System Failure”
System Test in progress
TAWS TEST
None
None
“TAWS System Test OK”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Alert Type
PFD/MFD TAWS-A
Page Status
Annunciation
System Test pass
None
AFCS
Table 6-11 TAWS-A System Test Status Annunciations
Manually testing the TAWS-A System:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the TAWS-A Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection. (Figure 6-102)
396
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Figure 6-102 TAWS-A Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-A Abnormal operations
TAWS-A continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, flap and landing gear
position, radar altimeter input, and GPS status.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the aural message “TAWS System Failure” is generated along
with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-A requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-A Page. The aural message “TAWS Not
Available” is generated, and some TAWS-A terrain alerts will not be issued (Table 6-13), while GPWS alerting
(which are not dependent on GPS position) will continue to operate. When the GPS signal is re-established and
the aircraft is within the database coverage area, the aural message “TAWS Available” is generated.
AFCS
Class A TAWS also requires radar altimeter input. Should the radar altimeter input fail or become degraded,
the annunciation ‘GPWS FAIL’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-A Page. The aural
message “GPWS System Failure” is also generated. The ‘GPWS FAIL’ annunciation will also occur if both GPS
altitude and barometric altitude are unavailable. If only the GPWS system has failed, GPWS-based alerts will
not be available (Table 6-13), while other TAWS-A alerting remains unaffected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Aural Message
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, invalid
software configuration, TAWS
audio fault
Radar Altimeter invalid,
Altitude and Vertical Speed
unavailable, invalid software
configuration, TAWS audio
fault
No GPS position
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
None
“GPWS System Failure”
NO GPS
POSITION
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
None
Out of database coverage
area
None
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when sufficient GPS signal is
received
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when sufficient GPS signal is
received
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when aircraft enters database
coverage area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Cause
PFD/
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Table 6-12 TAWS-A Abnormal Status Alerts
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the aircraft bank angle exceeds 30˚, TAWS-A will disable ECR alerts. ECR alert availability returns when
the bank angle is reduced for at least eight seconds.
398
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Table 6-13 shows TAWS-A status annunciations and their effects on TAWS-A alerts.
TAWS-A Status Annunciation Displayed
Alerting Not Available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLTA, PDA, EDR, ECR, NCR, FIT, GSD, VCO
FLTA, PDA, GSD, VCO
(Due to missing/invalid GPS position)
*
FLTA, PDA
EAS
*
(Due to no Terrain database coverage or
excessive vertical position error)
FLTA, PDA
*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLTA, PDA
EDR, ECR, NCR, FIT, GSD
GSD
GSD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FIT alerts based on flap position
* If both TAWS and GPWS systems are not available, VCO alerts will also not be issued.
Table 6-13 TAWS-A Status Annunciations
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.5 Traffic Information Service (TIS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Information Service (TIS) is intended for advisory use only. TIS is intended to help the
pilot locate traffic visually. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is available only when the aircraft is within the service volume of a TIS-capable terminal radar
EAS
site. Aircraft without an operating transponder will not be displayed. Aircraft without altitude reporting
capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb descent indication.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Information Service (TIS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TIS uses the
Mode S transponder for the traffic data link. TIS receives traffic information from ground stations, and is updated
every 5 seconds. The system displays up to eight traffic targets within a 7.5-nm radius, from 3000 feet below to
3500 feet above the requesting aircraft. Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology.
TIS Symbol
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Threat Traffic
Traffic Advisory (TA)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-14 TIS Traffic Symbols
AFCS
A Traffic Advisory (TA) indicates that the current track of the intruder could result in a collision. When traffic
meets the advisory criteria for the TA, a solid yellow circle symbol is generated. A TA which is detected, but is
outside the range of the map, is indicated with a message in the lower left corner of the map and a half TA symbol
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TIS also provides a vector line showing the direction in which the traffic is moving, to the nearest 45°. Traffic
information for which TIS is unable to determine the bearing (non-bearing traffic) is displayed in the center of the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-106) or in a banner at the lower left corner of maps other than the Traffic Map Page
on which traffic can be displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The altitude difference between the requesting aircraft and other intruder aircraft is displayed above/below the
traffic symbol in hundreds of feet. If the other aircraft is above the requesting aircraft, the altitude separation
appears above the traffic symbol; if below, the altitude separation appears below. Altitude trend is displayed as
an up/down arrow (for speeds greater than 500 fpm in either direction) to the right of the target symbol. Traffic
symbols for aircraft without altitude reporting capability appear without altitude separation or climb/descent
information.
400
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying TRAFFIC Data
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps (when TIS is operating):
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map
EAS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, an icon is shown to indicate the feature is
enabled for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Non-Threat
Traffic, 5000’
Above,
Descending
Traffic
Advisory,
1200’ Above,
Climbing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Display
Enabled
APPENDICES
Traffic Status
Banner
Figure 6-103 TIS Traffic on the Navigation Map Page
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
401
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
EAS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of traffic. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which traffic data (symbols
and labels) are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use settings based on those selected for the
Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Customizing traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-103).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Traffic’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-104).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-105).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
AFCS
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown (with the option to turn off)
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
402
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-103 Navigation Map Page Menu
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-104 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-105 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Traffic Map Page is specialized to show surrounding TIS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up
unless there is no valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated
by the map range rings.
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. Once the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches from Standby to
Operating Mode and the system begins to display traffic information. Refer to the System Status discussion for
more information.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Confirm TIS is in Operating Mode:
APPENDICES
Select the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ (shown if TIS is in Standby Mode) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic Mode Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“TIS Not Available”
Voice Alert Status
EAS
“Non-Bearing”
Traffic
(System Unable to
Determine Bearing)
Distance is 8.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Range Marking
Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory
400’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Status
Banner
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-106 Traffic Map Page
Select to
Mute “TIS Not
Available” Voice
Alert
TIS Alerts
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A single “Traffic” voice alert is generated.
AFCS
• A ‘TRAFFIC’ Annunciation appears to the top left of the Attitude Indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with traffic.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To reduce the number of nuisance alerts due to proximate aircraft, the “Traffic” voice alert is generated only
when the number of TAs increases. For example, when the first TA is displayed, a voice and visual annunciation
are generated. As long as a single TA remains on the display, no additional voice alerts are generated. If a second
TA appears on the display or if the number of TAs initially decreases and then subsequently increases, another
voice alert is generated.
404
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-107 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
A “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert is generated when the TIS service becomes unavailable or is out of
range. TIS may be unavailable in the radar coverage area due to the following:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Radar site TIS Mode S sensor is not operational or is out of service
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is beyond the maximum range of the TIS-capable Mode S radar site.
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is above the radar site in the cone of silence and out of range of an adjacent site.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Traffic or requesting aircraft is below radar coverage. In flat terrain, the coverage extends from about 3000
feet upward at 55 miles. Terrain and obstacles around the radar site can further decrease radar coverage in all
directions.
• Traffic does not have an operating transponder.
The “TIS Not Available” (TNA) voice alert can be manually muted to reduce nuisance alerting. TNA muting
status is shown in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.Muting the “TIS Available” voice alert:
AFCS
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the TNA MUTE Softkey. The status is displayed in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘‘’Not Available” Mute On’ (shown if TNA muting is currently off) and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
System Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system performs an automatic test of TIS during power-up. If TIS passes the test, TIS enters Standby
Mode (on the ground) or Operating Mode (in the air). If TIS fails the power up test, an annunciation is shown
in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
EAS
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Data is not being received from the transponder*
Data is being received from the transponder, but
a failure is detected in the data stream*
The transponder has failed*
UNAVAILABLE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Description
TIS is unavailable or out of range
* Contact a service center or Garmin dealer for corrective action
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-15 TIS Failure Annunciations
System Test has
Failed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data Not
Received
from
Transponder
APPENDICES
Figure 6-108 TIS Power-up Test Failure
INDEX
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page. When the aircraft is on the
ground, TIS automatically enters Standby Mode. If traffic is selected for display on another map while Standby
Mode is selected, the traffic display enabled icon is crossed out (also the case whenever TIS has failed). Once
the aircraft is airborne, TIS switches to Operating Mode and traffic information is displayed. The mode can be
changed manually using softkeys or the page menu.
406
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
TIS Operating
OPERATING
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Mode
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TIS Standby
FAIL
TIS Failed
EAS
Table 6-16 TIS Modes
Switching between TIS modes:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
2) Select the STANDBY or OPERATE Softkey to switch between modes. The mode is displayed in the upper left
corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Operate Mode’ or ‘Standby Mode’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key. The
annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner
of maps on which traffic can be displayed (Table 6-17).
TA OFF SCALE
TRFC COAST
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
TRFC UNAVAIL
Traffic is removed because it is too old for coasting (12 to 60 seconds since last message)
Traffic may exist within the selected display range, but it is not displayed
APPENDICES
TRFC RMVD
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending)
Appears if traffic data is not refreshed within 6 seconds
If after another 6 seconds data is not received, traffic is removed from the display
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced as the age increases
The displayed data is not current (6 to 12 seconds since last message)
The quality of displayed traffic information is reduced when this message is displayed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AGE MM:SS
Description
AFCS
TA X.X ± XX ↕
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
Traffic data has failed
Traffic has not been detected
The traffic service is unavailable or out of range
INDEX
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-17 TIS Traffic Status Annunciations
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
407
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.6 TCAS I TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The GTS 850 Traffic Collision Avoidance System (TCAS I) is intended for advisory use only to aid
the pilot in visually acquiring traffic. No avoidance maneuvers should be based solely upon TCAS I traffic
information. It is the responsibility of the pilot in command to see and maneuver to avoid traffic.
NOTE: TIS is disabled when TCAS I is installed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
The optional Garmin GTS 850 is a TSO-certified Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System (TCAS I). The
GTS 850 enhances flight crew situational awareness by displaying traffic information for transponder-equipped
aircraft. The GTS 850 also provides visual and aural traffic alerts including voice announcements to assist in
visually acquiring traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The GTS 850 is capable of tracking up to 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A or C transponders,
and up to 30 intruders equipped with Mode S transponders. A maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat
potential can be displayed simultaneously. No TCAS I surveillance is provided for aircraft without operating
transponders.
Theory of operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the GTS 850 is in Operating Mode, the unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft while
monitoring transponder replies. The GTS 850 uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing,
and if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range. The GTS 850 then
calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach (CPA). If the closure
rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and aural alerting is provided.
TCAS I Surveillance Volume
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The GTS 850 surveillance system monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude. Under ideal
conditions, the unit scans transponder traffic up to 40 nm in the forward direction, up to 25 nm to the
sides, and up to 14 nm to the aft of own aircraft using top and bottom-mounted antennas. In areas of
greater transponder traffic density or when TCAS II systems are detected, the GTS 850 automatically reduces
its interrogation transmitter power (and therefore range) in order to limit potential interference from other
signals.
408
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TCAS I Symbology
The GTS 850 uses symbology to depict intruding traffic on the displays using the symbols shown in Table
6-18.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TCAS I Symbol
Description
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
EAS
Proximity Advisory (PA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat Traffic
Table 6-18 TCAS I Intruder Symbol Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding
aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond
the selected display range is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of
the intruder.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond, indicates the intruding aircraft is within
±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, is displayed for all other traffic beyond 6 nm that
is neither a TA or PA.
AFCS
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet (Figure 6-109). When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a
minus sign ‘-’ indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol (Figure 6-109) indicates climbing or descending
traffic with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
APPENDICES
Figure 6-109 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
The unit automatically suppresses the display of on-ground traffic equipped with Mode S transponders.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
TA Alerting Conditions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The GTS 850 automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA alerting
during flight phases likely to be near airports. Level A (less) TA sensitivity is used when the aircraft’s
groundspeed is less than 120 knots. In all other conditions, Level B (greater) TA sensitivity is used to assess
TA threats.
A
Yes
A
No
B
Yes
B
No
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-19 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
410
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TCAS I Alerts
When the GTS 850 detects a new TA, the following occur:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing, relative
altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-33). The announcement
“Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own
altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-110).
EAS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined (Figure 6-112, Figure 6-113), a yellow text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA
symbol. The text will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the
TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the conditions that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Relative Altitude
Distance
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
APPENDICES
Bearing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-110 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Table 6-20 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
System Test
NOTE: GTS 850 traffic surveillance is not available during the system test. Use caution when performing a
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system test while in-flight.
EAS
The GTS 850 provides a system test mode to verify the TCAS I system is operating normally. The test takes
ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is displayed on the
Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-111). If the system test passes, the aural announcement “TCAS System Test Passed”
is heard, otherwise the system announces “TCAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete, the
GTS 850 enters Standby Mode.
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the Range knob to set the range to 2/6 nm.
4) Select the TEST Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
Test Mode
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Operating
Mode
Proximity
Traffic at
1 o’clock,
Distance
3.6 nm,
1000’ Below,
Descending
AFCS
Non-Threat
Traffic at
11 o’clock,
Distance 3.6
nm, 1000’
Above, Level
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA at 9 o’clock,
Distance 2.0
nm, 200’ Below,
Climbing
INDEX
Figure 6-111 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
412
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Operation
NOTE: The GTS 850 automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after takeoff.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The unit also automatically transitions from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after landing.
After power-up, the GTS 850 is in Standby Mode. The unit must be in Operating Mode for traffic to be
displayed and for TAs to be issued.
Selecting the OPERATE Softkey allows the GTS 850 to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Selecting the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
EAS
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY Softkey
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, select the OPERATE Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the ENT Key. The GTS 850 switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Traffic MAP Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TCAS I traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
Operating
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory,
Aircraft is
400’ Below,
Climbing
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 8.0 nm,
1100’ Above,
Descending
Proximity
Traffic, 1000’
Above,
Descending
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off Scale
Traffic
Figure 6-112 Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. OPERATING is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Select the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
414
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Display
The Pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. TAs
occurring outside of these limits will always be shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
EAS
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 2 above):
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
•
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic Map Page Display Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
INDEX
2 nm
APPENDICES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
•
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Additional Traffic Displays
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps on the MFD when the unit is operating:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Trip Planning Page
• System Pages
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
EAS
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic
is enabled for display (Figure 6-113).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Ensure the TCAS I system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, select the MAP Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in the figure.
AFCS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Proximity
Traffic
Proximity
Traffic
APPENDICES
TA Off Scale
Banner
Traffic Icon
“No Bearing”
Traffic Advisory
INDEX
Figure 6-113 TCAS I Traffic on Navigation Map
416
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-114).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-115).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-116).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-114 Navigation Map Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-115 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-116 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the INSET Softkey. A traffic map
will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation, topographic
and optional XM Weather data.
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
EAS
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
System Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TCAS I Self-test
Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TCAS I Operating
OPERATING
TCAS I Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TCAS I Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-22 for additional failure annunciations
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-21 TCAS I Modes
418
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TCAS I unit
Data is being received from the TCAS I unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TCAS I unit
EAS
Table 6-22 TCAS I Failure Annunciations
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TA X.X ± XX ↕
NO TCAS DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TCAS I unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TCAS I unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC FAIL
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA OFF SCALE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
AFCS
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-23 TCAS I Traffic Status Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6.7 TCAS II Traffic
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: The Traffic Alert and Collision Avoidance System II (TCAS II) is intended for advisory use only.
TCAS II is intended to help the pilot locate transponder-equipped traffic visually and to provide advisory
vertical maneuver guidance to avoid traffic. It is the responsibility of the pilot to see and maneuver to avoid
traffic, terrain, and obstacles.
EAS
NOTE: TIS is disabled when TCAS II is installed.
NOTE: Refer to the TCAS II documentation for a detailed discussion of the TCAS II system..
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TCAS II Symbology
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional TCAS II system is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TCAS II uses an
on-board interrogator-processor and the Mode S transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link. Traffic is displayed
according to TCAS II symbology using six different symbols.
TCAS Symbol
Description
Non-Threat Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity Advisory (PA)
Traffic Advisory (TA)
AFCS
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Resolution Advisory (RA)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Resolution Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-24 TCAS II Symbol Description
APPENDICES
A Non-threat Proximity Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at
greater than ±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 6 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
INDEX
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft closing to within 20-48
seconds of a potential collision area. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by
a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
420
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Resolution Advisory (RA) alerts the crew to intruding aircraft that are closing to within 15 to 35 seconds
of a potential collision area. RAs include vertical guidance maneuvers designed to increase or maintain vertical
separation from intruding aircraft. An RA that is beyond the selected display range is indicated by a half RA
symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TCAS II Alerts
NOTE: Refer to the TCAS II documentation for information on alerts generated by the TCAS II equipment.
When the TCAS II unit issues a TA or RA, the following occur:
EAS
• A voice alert is generated when a TA or RA is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed indicator on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds
and remaining displayed until no TAs or RAs are detected in the area. RA TRAFFIC annunciations are white
text with red backgrounds; TA TRAFFIC annunciations are black text with yellow backgrounds. If a TA and
RA occur simultaneously, only the red and white RA TRAFFIC annunciation is shown.
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA or RA traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• During an RA only, voice alert(s) provide vertical guidance to resolve the traffic conflict while the PFD displays
pitch and vertical speed cues (Figure 6-117). Additional voice alerts occur to denote changes in the RA
status.
RA Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TA Annunciation
Fly-To Vertical
Speed
No-Fly Pitch Cue
No-Fly Vertical
Speed Range
AFCS
Fly-To Pitch Cue
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Inset Map
Displays When TA
or RA is Detected
APPENDICES
Traffic/Map Inset
Softkey
Figure 6-117 Traffic Annunciation with Resolution Advisory (PFD)
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Resolution advisories
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During an RA, vertical guidance indications appear on the Attitude Indicator and Vertical Speed indicators
of the PFD to provide visual pitch cues for the flight crew to use to achieve (or maintain) vertical separation
from intruding traffic (Figure 6-118).
EAS
The Attitude Indicator will depict a range of pitch attitudes to avoid using no-fly pitch cues positioned on
the pitch ladder. The no-fly pitch cues are indicated by red open trapezoid-shaped areas encompassing the
range of pitch attitudes to be avoided during an RA. If an RA requires a change in existing pitch attitude, a
green rectangular fly-to pitch cue will appear above or below the no-fly pitch cue to indicate a recommended
pitch attitude. If multiple intruding aircraft limit available pitch travel in both directions, two no-fly pitch
cues will appear on the pitch ladder, indicating flight should occur between the two no-fly pitch cues.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While an RA is occurring, the Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) will show vertical speeds required to resolve
the traffic conflict. A red vertical bar appears on the VSI scale to indicate the range of vertical speeds to be
avoided during the RA. If the current aircraft vertical speed is within this red range, the pointer on the VSI
also turns red. When an RA directs the flight crew to fly to (or maintain) a vertical speed, a green vertical bar
will appear on the VSI scale at the recommended vertical speed range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch cues on the Attitude Indicator and vertical bars on the Vertical Speed Indicator are removed when the
RA condition has been resolved. In addition the TCAS II system will announce the aircraft is clear of the RA
conflict.
422
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Descend)
Climb
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Maintain, Don’t Climb and Don’t Descend
Adjust Vertical Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maintain, Don’t Descend
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Maintain, Don’t Climb
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-118 Example Resolution Advisory Visual Cues
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
System Test
The TCAS II system can be tested on either the PFD or MFD.
On the PFD:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the XPDR/TFC Softkey.
2) Press the TCAS Softkey.
3) Press the TEST Softkey.
On the MFD:
EAS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the Range knob to set the range to 2/6 nm.
2) Select the TEST Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When initiating the system test, the TCAS II unit issues the aural annunciation “TCAS Test”. A traffic test
pattern is displayed on the Traffic Map Page of the MFD, and on the Inset Map on the PFD (which pops up
if not already displayed.) A Resolution Advisory (RA) alert annunciation is shown on the PFD, and pitch
cues appear on the attitude indicator and vertical speed indicator indicating not to descend, and not to climb
greater than 2000’. The system test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. If the system test passes,
a voice alert “TCAS Test Pass” is heard. If the system test fails, a voice alert “TCAS Test Fail” is heard and a
visual annunciation ‘TCAS FAIL’ appears on the PFD. In addition, a visual annunciation ‘FAIL’ appears in the
Operating Mode box on the Traffic Map Page.
424
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Operation
To display TCAS II Traffic, the system must be in TA ONLY or TA/RA Mode. These modes can be accessed
on the PFD or on the Traffic Map Page of the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Switching from standby mode to TA only or TA/RA mode:
WARNING: While the TA/RA Softkey may be selected at any altitude, Resolution Advisory vertical guidance
will only by issued when the aircraft is at or above 1000’ AGL.
On the MFD:
EAS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select the TA ONLY or TA/RA Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘TA Only Mode’ or ‘TA/RA Mode’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. The unit switches from Standby Mode to TA Only or TA/RA Mode as necessary.
On the PFD:
1) Press the XPDR/TFC Softkey.
2) Press the MODE Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the TA Only or TA/RA Softkey
Switching from TA ONLY or TA/RA mode to standby mode:
On the MFD:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
AFCS
3) Select the TFC STBY Softkey
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Traffic Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
425
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Automatic Mode Selection
Condition
TCAS II Mode Automatically Selected
On ground, power up
Unit retains last mode used before power cycle.
In air, below 1000’ AGL
TA Only
At or above 1000’ AGL
TA/RA
After landing
TCAS Standby
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The TCAS II system automatically changes operating modes when the aircraft reaches the flight conditions
shown in Table 6-25.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-25 TCAS II Automatic Mode Selection
Traffic MAP Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TCAS II traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Operating
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range Rings
AFCS
Proximity
Traffic, 400’
Below, Level
Off Scale Traffic
Advisory
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Resolution
Advisory,
100’ Below,
Descending
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Above,
Climbing
APPENDICES
“Non-Bearing”
(Bearing Unknown)
Resolution Advisory,
Distance 3.1 nm,
4500’ Below,
Climbing
Non-Threat
Traffic, 400’
Below, Level
INDEX
Off Scale
Resolution
Advisory
Figure 6-119 Traffic Map Page
426
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the TA ONLY or TA/RA Softkey to begin displaying traffic. TA ONLY or TA/RA is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
4) Select the REL or ABS Softkey to display the relative or absolute altitude of other aircraft.
5) Select the TFC STBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. STANDBY is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
EAS
6) Turn the RANGE Knob clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Altitude Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. Traffic
Advisories (TAs) and Resolution Advisories (RAs) outside of these limits will always be shown.
Changing the altitude range:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD:
1) Press the XPDR/TFC Softkey.
2) Press the TCAS Softkey
3) Press the ALT RNG Softkey
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press one of the following altitude range Softkeys:
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9900 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
AFCS
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9900 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the BACK Softkey.
On the MFD:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT RNG Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys (see softkey description in step 4 above):
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
APPENDICES
•
INDEX
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
427
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see softkey description in step 4 above):
•
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
EAS
3) Select the ENT Softkey.
Traffic Map Page Display Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
RANGE Knob from 2 to 40 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Turn the RANGE Knob.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
•
24 and 40 nm
Additional Traffic Displays
AFCS
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps on the MFD when the unit is operating:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Traffic Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Trip Planning Page
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision System (SVS) option is
installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
APPENDICES
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
INDEX
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TCAS
II is enabled for display (Figure 6-120).
428
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map
1) Ensure the TCAS II system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in the figure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Proximity
Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Resolution
Advisory
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Threat
Traffic
TA Off Scale
Banner
Non-Bearing
Resolution
and Traffic
Advisories
Traffic Icon
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-120 TCAS II Traffic on Navigation Map
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
AFCS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-121).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-122).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-123).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
APPENDICES
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/RA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories, Resolution Advisories, and Proximity Advisories
- TA/RA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories and Resolution Advisories only
INDEX
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-121 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-122 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-123 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
AFCS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD Inset Map by pressing the TRFC/MAP Softkey. A
traffic map will appear in heading up orientation. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation,
topographic and optional XM Weather data.
Displaying additional information with Traffic on the PFD Inset Map.
1) Press the TRFC/MAP Softkey. Traffic map (TRFC-2) is displayed heading up.
APPENDICES
2) Press the TRFC-2 Softkey.
3) Press the Softkey(s) for the item(s) to be included on the PFD Inset Map (TRAFFIC, TOPO, NEXRAD, XM LTNG)
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey.
430
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Hazard Avoidance
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Status
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
PFD Mode
Annunciation
None
Traffic Advisory and
Resolution Advisory
(TA/RA)
None
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
TA/RA
Traffic Advisory Only
(TA ONLY)
EAS
TCAS II Self-test
Initiated (TEST)
MFD Traffic Map Page Mode
Annunciation
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ also shown in white on
top center of page)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Mode
TCAS II Standby
(TFC STBY)
STANDBY or STANDBY**
(also shown in white in center of page)
TCAS II Failed*
FAIL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TA ONLY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
* See Table 6-27 for additional failure annunciations.
** Annunciation appears yellow while in flight.
Table 6-26 TCAS II Modes
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
Data is being received from the TCAS II unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TCAS II unit
AFCS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-27 TCAS II Failure Annunciations
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Hazard Avoidance
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
RA OFF SCALE
EAS
TA OFF SCALE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
RA X.X ± XX ↕
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA X.X ± XX ↕
TRFC FAIL
NO TCAS DATA
Description
A Resolution Advisory is outside the selected display
range*. Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Resolution Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TCAS II unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-28 TCAS II Traffic Status Annunciations
432
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 7 Automatic Flight Control System
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The approved Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
The GFC 700 is a digital Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) that is fully integrated within the avionics
architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
GFC 700 AFCS functionality is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (3)
• GMC 715 AFCS Control Unit
• GSM 85A Servo Gearboxes (3)
EAS
• GDU 1240A Primary Flight Displays (PFDs) (2)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (IAUs) (2)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GFC 700 AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
• Flight Director (FD) — The GFC 700 flight director function can be coupled to either the pilot-side or
copilot-side PFD data. The CPL Key selects the PFD source for the Flight Director. Commands for the selected
flight director source are displayed on both PFDs. The flight director provides:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Pitch and roll commands to the autopilot
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch and roll servos. It provides automatic flight
control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS)
attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo provides Dutch roll damping and turn coordination in response to yaw
rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
AFCS
• Manual Electric Pitch Trim (MEPT) — The pitch trim system provides manual electric pitch trim
capability.
• Automatic Pitch Trim (APT) — The pitch trim system provides automatic pitch trim when the autopilot is
engaged
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.1 AFCS Controls
The AFCS Control Unit is positioned above the MFD, and has the following controls:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
10
FD Keys
Activate/deactivate the selected flight director (pilot- or copilot-side) in default
vertical and lateral modes
Press the other FD Key to toggle the corresponding PFD’s Command Bars off/on
2
NAV Key
HDG Key
4 AP Key
5 YD Key
6 ALT Key
7 VNV Key
8 VS Key
9 FLC Key
20 CRS Knobs
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
12
SPD SEL Knob
UP/DN Wheel
14 ALT SEL Knob
13
CSC Key
16 CPL Key
AFCS
15
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Selects/deselects Flight Level Change Mode
Adjust the Selected Course (while in VOR, LOC, or OBS Mode) in 1° increments on
the Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) of the corresponding PFD
Press to re-center the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) and return course pointer
directly TO the bearing of the active waypoint/station
Adjusts the Airspeed Reference and bug in 1-kt (0.01 M) increments
Press to toggle the Airspeed Reference units from IAS to Mach
Adjusts the Vertical Speed Reference and bug in 100-fpm increments
Adjusts the Selected Altitude and bug in 100-ft increments (a finer resolution of 10
feet is available under approach conditions)
Selects/deselects Current Speed Control (when Altitude Hold Mode is active)
Selects the PFD data source (pilot-side or copilot-side) for the Flight Director.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the flight director source is switched, the modes revert to default. An arrow
in the AFCS Status Box indicates the active FD source (pilot- or copilot-side).
17 HDG SEL Knob Adjusts the Selected Heading and bug in 1° increments on the HSI (both PFDs)
APR Key
19 BANK Key
INDEX
APPENDICES
18
Press to synchronize the Selected Heading to the current heading on the pilot-side PFD
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
Manually selects/deselects Low Bank Mode
434
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
3
20
19 18 17
4
5
6
15
14
7
8
9
10
13
12
11
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
EAS
16
Figure 7-1 GMC 715 AFCS Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
AP DISC Switch
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
Disengages the autopilot and yaw damper, and interrupts pitch trim operation
CWS Button
(Control Wheel
Steering)
While pressed, allows manual control of the aircraft while the autopilot is engaged and
synchronizes the flight director’s Command Bars with the current aircraft pitch (if not
in Glideslope or Glidepath Mode) and roll (if in Roll Hold Mode)
An AP DISC Switch is located on each control wheel.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
This switch may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute
the associated aural alert.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A CWS Button is located on each control wheel.
TO/GA Switch
(Go Around)
AFCS
Upon release of the CWS Button, the flight director may establish new pitch and
roll references, depending on the current vertical and lateral modes. CWS operation
details are discussed in the respective mode sections of this manual.
Disengages the autopilot, if engaged, and selects flight director Takeoff Mode (on
ground) or Go Around Mode (in air)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The TO/GA Switch is located on the throttle handle.
This switch also activates the missed approach when the selected navigation source
is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/LOC and a valid frequency has been
tuned.
APPENDICES
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
MEPT Switch
(Manual Electric An MEPT Switch is located on each control wheel.
Pitch Trim)
The pilot side MEPT Switch has priority over the copilot side MEPT Switch.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
This composite switch is split into left and right sides. The left switch is the ARM
contact and the right switch controls the DN (forward) and UP (rearward) contacts.
Manual trim commands are generated only when both sides of the switch are operated
simultaneously. Pushing either MEPT Switch disengages the autopilot, if engaged,
but does not affect yaw damper operation.
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.2 Flight Director Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFDs.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (±20°) and roll (30°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited to values
established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
Activating the Flight Director
EAS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 activates the flight director in the listed modes.
FD PFD Data
Source
Modes Selected
FD Key (pilot-side)*
FD Key (copilotside)*
AP Key
CWS Button
Pilot-side
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Pilot-side
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pilot-side
Pilot-side
GA Switch
Pilot-side
ALT Key
VS Key
Pilot-side
Pilot-side
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
ROL
ROL
ROL
ROL
ROL
PIT
PIT
TO
GA
ALT
VS
VNV Key
Pilot-side
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed
Vertical Path
Tracking**
NAV Key
Pilot-side
Navigation***
APR Key
Pilot-side
Approach***
HDG Key
Pilot-side
Heading Select
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
ROL
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
*Subsequent presses of the FD Key will toggle the flight director on/off on its respective side. However,
pressing the FD Key for the inactive flight director only removes the Command Bars from the corresponding
display. The FD Keys are disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
APPENDICES
** Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight director.
***The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course before NAV
or APR Key press activates flight director.
INDEX
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
436
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS Status Box
Lateral Modes
Yaw Current
Autopilot Damper Speed
Status Control
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFDs when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection, autopilot, yaw damper, and Current Speed Control statuses are shown in the center of the
AFCS Status Box. Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes
are displayed in white and active in green or magenta (if the mode reference is provided by the GPS navigation
function).
Vertical Modes
EAS
Armed
Active
Active
Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Director
Indicator Arrow
AFCS Status Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Command
Bars
AFCS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Flight Director Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode selection,
the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes(s).
EAS
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green or magenta (if the mode reference is provided by
the GPS navigation function) in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal operation, when the control for the active
flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the default mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic
transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white armed mode annunciation moving to the active
mode field and flashing for 5 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation indicates
loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, WAAS) required to compute commands. When
such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters Roll Hold Mode) or maintain
the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The flashing annunciation stops
when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected. After 5 seconds, if no action is
taken, the flashing annunciation stops and the flight director enters the default mode for the affected axis.
Figure 7-3 Loss of VOR Signal
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default flight
director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
Flight Director Selection
AFCS
The GFC 700 flight director can be coupled to either the pilot-side or copilot-side PFD data using the CPL
Key. When the pilot-side or copilot-side data source is changed, the vertical and lateral modes revert to default.
The autopilot follows the selected flight director only, indicated by an arrow pointing toward either the pilot or
copilot side, in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The currently active flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the displays
by pressing the active FD Key again. Pressing the FD Key for the inactive flight director only removes the
Command Bars from the corresponding display. The FD key for the selected flight director is disabled when
the autopilot is engaged.
APPENDICES
Pilot-side Flight Director Selected
Copilot-side Flight Director Selected
INDEX
Figure 7-4 Flight Director Selection Indications
438
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Command Bars
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFDs as single cues or
cross pointers. The aircraft symbol (in yellow) changes to accommodate the Command Bar format; the Command
Bars do not override the aircraft symbol. The single-cue Command Bars (Figure 7-5) move together vertically to
indicate pitch commands and bank left or right to indicate roll commands. Command Bars displayed as a cross
pointer (Figure 7-6) move independently to indicate pitch (horizontal bar) and roll (vertical bar) commands.
Both PFDs show the same Command Bar format.
Command Bars
EAS
Aircraft Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-5 Single-cue Command Bars
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars
Aircraft Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-6 Cross-pointer Command Bars
Changing Command Bar format:
AFCS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Format Active’ in the ‘Flight Director’ box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired format.
’SNGL CUE’ to display Command Bars as a single cue (Aircraft Symbol in figure 7-5).
Or:
’X-POINTER’ to display Command Bars as a cross pointer (Aircraft Symbol in Figure 7-6).
APPENDICES
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command Bars
are removed from the display. The flight director Command Bars also disappear if the pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚
or bank exceeds 65˚.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.3 Vertical Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the GFC 700’s vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode
reference is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level
Change modes. The UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under
Vertical Speed Mode.
Vertical Mode
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Pitch Hold
Description
Control Annunciation
Holds the current aircraft pitch attitude;
may be used to climb/descend to the (default)
PIT
Selected Altitude
Selected Altitude Capture
Captures the Selected Altitude
Altitude Hold
Holds the current altitude reference
ALTS
ALT Key
ALT
-1000 ft up to
+41000 ft
VS
±4000 fpm
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend to VS Key
the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft airspeed (in
Flight Level Change
IAS or Mach) while the aircraft is climbing/ FLC Key
descending to the Selected Altitude
Captures and tracks descent legs of an VNV
Vertical Path Tracking
active vertical profile
Key
Captures the Vertical Navigation (VNV)
VNV Target Altitude Capture
**
Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the WAAS glidepath
Glidepath
on approach
APR
Key
Captures and tracks the ILS glideslope on
Glideslope
approach
Commands a constant pitch angle and
Takeoff
wings level on the ground in preparation
for takeoff
TO/GA
Disengages the autopilot and commands a Switch
Go Around
constant pitch angle and wings level while
in the air
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
±20˚
*
Vertical Speed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reference Range
FLC
80 – 275 kt
0.4 – 0.7 M
VPTH
ALTV
GP
GS
TO
5.5 – 11˚ ***
GA
2 – 7.5˚ ***
APPENDICES
* ALTS is armed automatically when PIT, VS, FLC, TO, or GA is active, and under VPTH when the Selected Altitude is to be
captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude.
** ALTV is armed automatically under VPTH when the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of the Selected Altitude.
*** The specific reference value is based on the flap setting and the presence of icing conditions.
INDEX
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
440
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pitch Hold Mode (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (with the FD Key) or switched, Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default.
Pitch Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used for
climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is
automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude, the pitch reference. The pitch
reference is set to the aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude
exceeds the flight director pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the
nose-up/down limit.
EAS
Changing the Pitch Reference
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by pressing the CWS Button,
hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new pitch reference, then releasing the CWS Button.
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-7 Pitch Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
• Takeoff/Go Around (if the Selected Altitude is at
least 400 feet above the current aircraft altitude)
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNAV Target Altitude)
• Flight Level Change
EAS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-7 for example).
The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected Altitude
Capture Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-8). This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the Selected Altitude (when within 50 feet of the selected altitude
depending on vertical speed ALT mode may activate directly). As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 5 seconds to indicate the
automatic transition.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flash Up to 5 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
Figure 7-8 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
AFCS
Changing the Selected Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in Selected Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
Altitude Hold Mode (ALT)
Note: To serve as a visual reminder of a target airspeed, the pilot can adjust the cyan Airspeed Reference
Bug using the SPD SEL Knob when NOT in Flight Level Change Mode or Altitude Hold Mode (with CSC
engaged).
INDEX
If Altitude Hold Mode is activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current aircraft
altitude (to the nearest 10 feet). Altitude Hold Mode active is indicated by an ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS
Status Box.
442
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in either of the following modes:
• Selected Altitude Capture (see Figure 7-7)
• VNV Target Altitude Capture (see Figure 7-17)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The transition to Altitude Hold Mode automatically occurs when the altitude error is less than 50 feet. In
this case, the Selected or VNV Target Altitude becomes the flight director’s altitude reference. The active mode
annunciation ‘ALT’ appears in magenta if the transition was made from VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode.
Changing the Altitude Reference
EAS
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
flight director’s altitude reference, and does not cancel the mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
With the CWS Button pressed, the aircraft can be hand-flown to a new altitude reference. When the CWS
Button is released at the desired altitude, the new altitude is established as the altitude reference.
Current Speed Control
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Speed Control is available while the autopilot is engaged and Altitude Hold Mode (ALT) or VNV
Target Altitude Capture (ALTV) Mode is active. When the CSC Key is pressed, the Full Authority Digital Engine
Control (FADEC) varies engine thrust to maintain the desired Airspeed Reference (green Airspeed Reference
Bug), within a certain control range.
NOTE: For CSC engagement and disengagement detailed conditions, see the approved Pilot’s Operating
Current Speed
Control Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Handbook (POH).
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Selected
Altitude
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airspeed
Reference
APPENDICES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
to Maintain Altitude Reference
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 7-9 Altitude Hold Mode
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Vertical Speed Mode (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference (shown above
the Vertical Speed Indicator). Current aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical
Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent
to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically
armed when Vertical Speed Mode is selected.
EAS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS Status
Box. The Vertical Speed Reference is displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference
Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is shown on the indicator.
Changing the Vertical Speed Reference
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown above the Vertical Speed Indicator) may be changed by:
• Using the UP/DN Wheel
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Vertical Speed Reference, then releasing
the CWS Button
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Vertical
Speed
Reference
AFCS
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-10 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
444
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Level Change Mode (FLC)
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Flight Level Change Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Level Change Mode is selected by pressing the FLC Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (in IAS or Mach) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter). When Flight Level Change Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected
Altitude, airspeed, Mach, and altitude.
EAS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Flight Level Change Mode
is indicated by a green ‘FLC’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed Reference is displayed
directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a cyan Airspeed Reference Bug corresponding to the Airspeed
Reference along the tape.
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Level Change
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding
to the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference. The flight director
maintains the current altitude until either engine power or the Airspeed Reference are adjusted and does not
allow the aircraft to climb or descend away from the Selected Altitude.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airspeed
Reference
AFCS
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to Attain Selected Altitude
Figure 7-11 Flight Level Change Mode (IAS)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
445
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Changing the Airspeed Reference (FLC Mode)
The Airspeed Reference (shown above the Airspeed Indicator) may be adjusted by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Using the SPD SEL Knob
• Pressing the CWS Button, hand-flying the aircraft to attain a new Airspeed Reference, then releasing the
CWS Button
EAS
During climb, the Airspeed Reference units automatically change from IAS to Mach when either the altitude
or the airspeed listed in Table 7-3 are attained. For descent, the units switch back at the specified altitude
or airspeed. The system determines aircraft climb or descent by the relationship between the current and
Selected altitudes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspeed Reference Units
Default Units Change To:
Climb
IAS
Mach
Descent
Mach
IAS
Unit Type Changes At:
Altitude
Airspeed
> 31,500 ft > M 0.55
< 30,500 ft < 250 kt
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 7-3 FLC Mode Unit Changes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airspeed Reference units can be manually toggled between IAS and Mach units by pressing the SPD SEL
Knob. When the FLC Airspeed Reference is displayed in Mach, the Airspeed Reference Bug is displayed
on the Airspeed Indicator at the IAS corresponding to the selected Mach target speed and the current Mach
number is shown below the Airspeed Indicator.
Flight Level Change
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Airspeed
Reference
(Mach)
APPENDICES
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
Command Bars Indicate Climb
to attain Selected Altitude
INDEX
Figure 7-12 Flight Level Change Mode (Mach)
The Airspeed Reference Bug can be set at all times (to be used as a visual reference) except when CSC is
engaged. In CSC mode the Airspeed Reference Bug is fixed and set at the airspeed existing at the time of CSC
engagement. While the bug can be set during these modes it is only being controlled when in FLC mode,
when CSC is engaged, etc.
446
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Navigation Modes (VPTH, ALTV)
Note: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active. Refer to the flight Management
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Section for more information on VNV flight plans.
Note: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations when
VNV flight planning is available. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EAS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or direct-to (with vertical constraint) is
active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
• Parallel track is not active.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or direct-to (with vertical constraint). The appropriate
VNV flight control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile.
Upon reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode
and cancels any armed VNV modes.
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
AFCS
Note: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The
autopilot guides the aircraft back to the descent path upon release of the CWS Button.
APPENDICES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope Mode
is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable, the
appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the Selected
Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
INDEX
Figure 7-13 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. For the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode,
acknowledgment is required within five minutes of descent path interception by:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pressing the VNV Key
• Adjusting the Selected Altitude
EAS
If acknowledgment is not received within one minute of descent path interception, the white ‘VPTH’
annunciation starts to flash. Flashing continues until acknowledged or the descent path is intercepted. If
the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the PFD Navigation Status
Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, vertical deviation, and
vertical speed required) appear on the PFDs in magenta (Figure 7-14).
Vertical Path Tracking
Armed (Flashing Indicates
Acknowledgment Required
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target
Altitude
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-14 Vertical Path Capture
448
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a descent leg is captured (Figure 7-15), Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (magenta ‘VPTH’
annunciation shown) and tracks the descent profile. An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed
as appropriate.
VNV Target Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
EAS
VNV Target
Altitude
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-15 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
AFCS
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path (without
commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV vertical
deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the aircraft to reestablish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target Altitude,
the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Flight Control System
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director to
revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity (not due to an altimeter barometric setting adjustment) that
both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude.
Such discontinuities are usually caused by flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
EAS
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active direct-to with vertical constraint).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Flight Level Change modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or FLC Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode to
allow profile re-capture.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-16 Flight Level Change VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
450
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected Altitude.
The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target Altitudes are
shown in the active flight plan or direct-to (with vertical constraint), and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1 minute”
is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the Vertical
Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-14).
EAS
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the magenta
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation. The
active VNV Target Altitude is shown in magenta above the Vertical Speed Indicator.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes magenta for 5 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing upcoming
descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flash Up to 5 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-17 VNV Altitude Capture
Changing the VNV Target Altitude
AFCS
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while in VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode does not cancel the mode.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
APPENDICES
Current Speed Control
INDEX
Current Speed Control is available while the autopilot is engaged and Altitude Hold Mode (ALT) or VNV
Target Altitude Capture (ALTV) Mode is active. When the CSC Key is pressed, the Full Authority Digital Engine
Control (FADEC) varies engine thrust to maintain the desired Airspeed Reference (green Airspeed Reference
Bug), within a certain control range.
NOTE: For CSC engagement and disengagement detailed conditions, see the approved Pilot’s Operating
Handbook (POH).
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Glidepath Mode (GP) (WAAS Only)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glidepath Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
guides the aircraft back to the glidepath upon release of the CWS Button.
Glidepath Mode is used to track the WAAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
EAS
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV+V) is loaded into the active flight plan.
The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
AFCS
Figure 7-18 Glidepath Mode Armed
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured (magenta ‘GP’ annunciation):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF)
• Vertical deviation is valid
• The CDI is at less than full scale deviation
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
452
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GPS Approach
Mode Active
Glidepath
Mode Active
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Figure 7-19 Glidepath Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LPV Approach
Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS is Selected
Navigation
Source
Glidepath
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Glideslope Mode (GS)
NOTE: Pressing the CWS Button while Glideslope Mode is active does not cancel the mode. The autopilot
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
guides the aircraft back to the glideslope upon release of the CWS Button.
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed, LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
EAS
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-20 Glideslope Mode Armed
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the glideslope,
the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
INDEX
NAV2 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
on Localizer/Glideslope Path
Figure 7-21 Glideslope Mode
454
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
Glideslope
Indicator
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Takeoff (TO) and Go Around (GA) Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Go Around and Takeoff modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude. The TO/GA
Switch is used to select both modes. The mode entered by the flight director depends on whether the aircraft
is on the ground. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when the aircraft is at least 400 feet
below the Selected Altitude at the time Takeoff or Go Around Mode is selected. When Takeoff or Go Around
mode is activated, the lateral mode is annunciated as ‘ROL’.
EAS
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the TO/GA Switch. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude. Autopilot engagement while Takeoff Mode is active is inhibited while the aircraft is on the
ground.
Go Around
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Autopilot Disconnect
Annunciation Flashes
Red 5 sec
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the TO/GA Switch while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Selecting Go Around Mode disengages the
autopilot; however, subsequent autopilot engagement is allowed. Attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e.,
with the CWS Button) result in reversion to Pitch Hold Mode.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate Climb
APPENDICES
Takeoff
Mode Active
Figure 7-22 Takeoff and Go Around Modes
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.4 Lateral Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table relates each GFC 700 lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around mode.
NOTE: The GFC 700 may generate a lower bank angle than the maximum roll command limit in degrees
indicated in Table 7-4 by the amount needed to produce a turn rate equal to or less than standard rate.
Description
EAS
Lateral Mode
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Limits the maximum commanded BANK
roll angle
Key
Captures and tracks the Selected
HDG Key
Heading
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Roll Hold
30˚
*
15˚
HDG
30˚
Navigation, GPS **
GPS
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track ** Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
VOR
30˚
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
30˚
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
25˚ Capture
10˚ Track
Heading Select **
NAV Key
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(No Glideslope)
Navigation, Backcourse Arm/Capture/Track
Captures and tracks a localizer
signal for backcourse approaches
LOC
BC
Approach, GPS
GPS
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
AFCS
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
ROL
Low Bank
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Control Annunciation
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
APR Key
VAPP
LOC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* No annunciation appears in the AFCS Status Box. The acceptable bank angle range is indicated in green along the Roll
Scale of the Attitude Indicator.
** The Heading, Navigation GPS and Navigation VOR mode maximum roll command limit will be limited to the Low Bank
mode value if it is engaged.
APPENDICES
Table 7-4 Flight Director Lateral Modes
INDEX
The CWS Button does not change lateral references for Heading Select, Navigation, Backcourse, or Approach
Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading/Course upon release of the CWS Button.
456
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Roll Hold Mode (ROL)
Note: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls wings level.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank angle
condition.
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 30°
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 30°
> 30°
EAS
Figure 7-23 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
Table 7-5 Roll Hold Mode Responses
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Changing the Roll Reference
The roll reference can be changed by pressing the CWS Button, establishing the desired bank angle, then
releasing the CWS Button.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Bank Mode
When in Low Bank Mode, the flight director limits the maximum commanded roll angle to 15°. Low bank
arc limits are displayed in green along the Roll Scale. Low Bank Mode can be manually selected/deselected by
pressing the BANK Key while in Heading Select or Navigation Modes (GPS and VOR).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 7-24 Low Bank Mode Limits
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Heading Select Mode (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains the
Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the upper
left of the HSI.
Changing the Selected Heading
Note: Pressing the HDG SEL Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EAS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG SEL Knob. Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the
aircraft does not change the Selected Heading. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Heading
upon release of the CWS Button.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Turns are commanded in the same direction as Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned
more than 180° from the present heading (e.g., a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes
of more than 330° at a time result in turn reversals.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Heading Select
Mode Active
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-25 Heading Select Mode
458
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Navigation Modes (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering commands
from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision GPS and LOC
approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
EAS
Backcourse Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The mode may be selected
by pressing the NAV Key. When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front
course. The flight director creates roll steering commands from the Selected Course and deviation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the selected
mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the NAV Key
is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active lateral mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-26 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed automatically when the navigation source switch takes place if the APR Key is not pressed prior
to the automatic source switch.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
AFCS
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
Changing the Selected Course
APPENDICES
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the
CWS Button is released.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
GPS is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Left
Turn to Track GPS Course
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-27 Navigation Mode
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Backcourse
Mode Active
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
Figure 7-28 Backcourse Mode
INDEX
LOC2 is Selected
Navigation Source
460
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Approach Modes (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected navigation
receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the CDI is greater
than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active lateral mode). If
the CDI is less than one dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
EAS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
Figure 7-29 GPS Approach Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC Approach
Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the difference
between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
EAS
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
4) Press the APR Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Vectors-to-Final is activated
• Navigation source is manually switched
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
Changing the Selected Course
AFCS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob corresponding to the selected flight director (CRS1 for the pilot
side, CRS2 for the copilot side).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the CWS Button and hand-flying the aircraft does not change the Selected Course while in
Approach Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft back to the Selected Course (or GPS flight plan) when the
CWS Button is released.
intercepting and flying a dme arc
APPENDICES
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
INDEX
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
462
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
7.5 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation
NOTE: Refer to the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot and yaw damper operate the flight control surface servos to provide automatic flight control. The
autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands received from the flight director. Pitch
autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim actuator to relieve any sustained effort required by the pitch
servo.
EAS
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies and coordinates turns. It can operate independently of the
autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited by the yaw
damper.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Control
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw damping
is provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
gearboxes are equipped with slip-clutches that allow the servos to be overridden in case of an emergency (i.e.,
a failure event when the servo motor and slip clutch remain abnormally engaged).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pitch Axis and Trim
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during upsets and flight
director maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with pitch
damper control, and sent to the pitch servo motor.
When the autopilot is engaged, the automatic pitch trim (APT) function commands the pitch trim actuator
to reduce the average pitch servo effort.
AFCS
Manual electric pitch trim (MEPT) functionality is available at any time via the pilot and copilot MEPT
Switches. Manual trim commands are generated only when both halves of the MEPT Switch are operated
simultaneously. Operating the MEPT Switches when the autopilot is engaged will cause the autopilot to
disconnect. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide more consistent response.
Roll Axis
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during upsets and flight director
maneuvers. The flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper
control, and sent to the roll servo motor.
Yaw Axis
APPENDICES
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response.
It also uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns. Yaw damper operation is independent of autopilot
engagement.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Engaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper
NOTE: Autopilot engagement/disengagement is not equivalent to servo engagement/disengagement. Use
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the CWS Button to disengage the pitch and roll servos while the autopilot remains active.
EAS
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are activated.
The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated. When the YD Key is pressed,
the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot. Autopilot and yaw damper status are
displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations,
respectively.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot
Engaged
Yaw Damper
Engaged
Figure 7-30 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Control Wheel Steering
During autopilot operation, the aircraft may be hand-flown without disengaging the autopilot. Pressing and
holding the CWS Button disengages the pitch and roll servos from the flight control surfaces and allows the
aircraft to be hand-flown. At the same time, the flight director is synchronized to the aircraft attitude during the
maneuver. Pitch trim operation is interrupted during CWS activity; yaw damper engagement is unaffected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The ‘AP’ annunciation is temporarily replaced by ‘CWS’ in white for the duration of CWS maneuvers.
Control Wheel Steering
AFCS
Figure 7-31 CWS Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In most scenarios, releasing the CWS Button re-engages the autopilot with a new reference. Refer to flight
director mode descriptions for specific CWS behavior in each mode.
464
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Disengaging the Autopilot and Yaw Damper
Note: Pressing the AP Key does not disengage the yaw damper.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manual autopilot disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing red ‘AP’ annunciation and an autopilot
disconnect aural alert, “Autopilot”. The autopilot is manually disengaged by pushing the AP Key on the AFCS
Control Unit, the TO/GA Switch, or the AP DISC Switch (also disengages the yaw damper, if engaged). Pressing
the YD Key disengages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot. The ‘YD’ annunciation is removed upon
disengagement.
EAS
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert and flashing ‘AP’ annunciation may be
cancelled by pushing the AP DISC Switch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-32 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
• System failure
• Invalid sensor data
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
• Stall warning (YD also disengages)
• Backup pitch trim channel selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and the autopilot
disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC Switch. Automatic
autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Pushing the MEPT switches
AFCS
Automatic yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. The
yaw damper automatically disengages when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also
affecting the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the autopilot
automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data also cause yaw
damper disengagement.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-33 Automatic Autopilot and
Yaw Damper Disengagement
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.6 Example Flight Plan
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EAS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles
B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
24
27
24
27
24
30
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
15
27
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
21
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
12
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
KMKC
27
30
6
KCOS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
30
3
6
0
33
3
30
33
9
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
33
0
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using a GPS flight
plan. The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a missed
approach is executed.
12
21
15
18
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-34 Flight Plan Overview
466
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Departure
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Before takeoff:
a) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
b) Push the TO/GA Switch to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up
attitude to follow.
EAS
c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Flight Level Change Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed and Roll Hold modes and arm Selected Altitude Capture Mode.
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the UP/DN Wheel or
pushing the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to establish a new Vertical Speed Reference.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Use the HDG SEL Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EAS
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Flight Control System
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 5 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
HD
GM
od
e
TO M
o
de
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
KMKC
1
2
VS
e
Mod
ode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
M
TO
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-35 Departure
468
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Intercepting a VOR Radial
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario, VOR
Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
EAS
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS1 or CRS2 Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the
flight director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
33
30
Hd
29 g
0o
AFCS
3
V4
6
27
3
24
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
NA
V
Mo
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
9
o
255
VO
R
de
2
HD
G
12
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
APPENDICES
15
1
21
18
Figure 7-36 Intercepting a VOR Radial
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Flying a Flight Plan/GPS Course
Note: Changing the navigation source cancels the Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
EAS
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot steers the aircraft toward the active flight
plan leg.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
0
33
3
V4
6
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
33
3
30
0
o
075
30
e
V Mod
PS NA
6
27
G
15
21
18
24
2
12
12
AFCS
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
1
24
27
076
Mode
9
o
260
o
AV
VOR N
15
21
18
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-37 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
470
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to KCOS.
Three methods are presented for descent:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Flight Level Change descent – Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EAS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled however, Pitch Hold, Vertical
Speed, or Flight Level Change Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to reaching the
planned TOD. Flight Level Change Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Level Change descent:
1) Select Flight Level Change Mode:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the FLC Key to activate Flight Level Change Mode. The annunciation ‘FLC’ appears in the AFCS Status Box
and the Airspeed Reference (above the Airspeed Indicator) defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected
Altitude Capture Mode is armed automatically.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) If desired press the SPD SEL Knob to change the Airspeed Reference units to Mach.
2) Use the SPD SEL Knob or push the CWS Button while hand-flying the aircraft to adjust the commanded
airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode
while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 5 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
APPENDICES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
FLC
Mod
e
3
INDEX
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
Figure 7-38 FLC Descent
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
b) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EAS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director commands descent
to the Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active
(ALTS is armed rather than ALTV).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following
•
Press the VNV Key
•
Turn the ALT SEL Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the magenta ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The magenta ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 5 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
1
ALT Mode
TOD
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
APPENDICES
VPT
HM
ode
3
BOD
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
INDEX
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm
Figure 7-39 VPTH Descent
472
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Non-path descent using Flight Level Change Mode:
1) Using Flight Level Change Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
b) Press the FLC Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
EAS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Flight Level Change Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 5 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the magenta ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Flight Control System
EAS
The magenta ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 5 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
VP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TH
M
od
e
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
ALT Mode
1
FL
C
Pla
nn
M
od
e
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
3
ed
De
sce
nt
Pa
th
ALT Mode
TOD
4
VP
TH
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
Mo
de
5
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3 nm
OPSHN
HABUK
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-40 Non-path Descent
474
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Approach
Note: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation Mode with the GFC 700.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
EAS
b) Use the HDG SEL Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Use the TO/GA Switch to execute a missed approach.
3
LOC APR/
GS Mode
EAS
KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PETEY
2
G
HD
e
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
od
M
PYNON
1
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-41 ILS Approach to KCOS
476
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate approach into the flight plan.
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
EAS
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Switch at the decision height and land the aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Use the TO/GA Switch to execute a missed approach.
KCOS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
AFCS
2
FALUR
HABUK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PYNON
1
APPENDICES
GPS NAV Mode
INDEX
Figure 7-42 LPV Approach to KCOS
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Go Around/Missed Approach
Note: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
EAS
1) Push the TO/GA Switch at the decision height and apply go around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach, the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
Note that when the TO/GA Switch is pushed, the missed approach is activated and the autopilot disconnects,
indicated by the ‘AP’ annunciation flashing red for 5 seconds.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flashes 5 sec
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
a) Press the AP Key to re-engage the autopilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
AFCS
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the FLC Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 5 seconds.
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 5 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
478
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
EAS
MOGAL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
3
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Mode
KCOS
1
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-43 Go Around/Missed Approach
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
7.7 AFCS Annunciations and Alerts
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AFCS CAS Messages
Crew Alerting System (CAS) messages related to the AFCS are listed in Table 7-6. CAS messages appear on
the PFDs in the window to the right of the Altimeter (see Figure 7-44). Refer to the EAS Section for details.
CAS Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
AP FAIL
Loss of AP function
AUTO PTRIM FAIL
Auto pitch trim failure; other pitch trim functions still available
AP PITCH MISTRIM
Airplane mistrimmed in pitch axis when AP is engaged
AP ROLL MISTRIM
Airplane mistrimmed in roll axis when AP is engaged
YD FAIL
YD MISTRIM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Description
Loss of yaw damper function
Airplane mistrimmed in yaw axis when YD is engaged
PTRIM NML FAIL
Loss of normally-operating pitch trim actuator
PTRIM BKP FAIL
Loss of backup pitch trim actuator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PTRIM DISCONNECT Pitch trim disconnected
PTRIM SW1 FAIL
Failure of pilot pitch trim switch
PTRIM SW2 FAIL
Failure of copilot pitch trim switch
AFCS
Table 7-6 AFCS CAS Messages
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CAS
Window
CAS Scrolling Softkey
(Softkey Becomes
Disabled When Less
Than 14 Messages
are Displayed)
INDEX
Figure 7-44 CAS Display
480
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Automatic Flight Control System
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS Voice Alerts
The voice alerts listed in Table 7-7 relate to the AFCS; for a complete list of voice alerts, see Appendix A.
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Voice Alert
“Autopilot”
EAS
Warning – Autopilot is disengaged
Single alert for manual AP disengagement
Continuous alert for automatic AP disengagement; cancelled with AP DISC Switch
“Flight Director” Single warning – Flight director has reverted to a default mode
“Trim, Trim, Trim” Continuous advisory (stops after 6 seconds) – MEPT Switch malfunction
“Thrust Thrust” CSC disengages abnormally
Table 7-7 AFCS Voice Alerts
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Overspeed Protection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Flight Level Change, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director and pitch commands are limited for overspeed protection.
Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and maintain the mode
reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot airspeed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, a flashing yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation appears above the
Airspeed Indicator and the voice alert “High Speed” is generated. Engine power should be reduced and/or the
pitch reference adjusted to slow the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is
resolved.
AFCS
Airspeed
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-45 Overspeed Annunciation
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
481
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Automatic Flight Control System
Blank Page
482
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Section 8 Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi, ChartView, or FliteCharts in electronic form, it is still advisable to
carry another source of charts on board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Synthetic Vision System (SVS)
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
EAS
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• AOPA’s Airport Directory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Data Link Services
• Iridium satellite telephone
• XM Radio entertainment
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Scheduler
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features on
the PFD. SVS imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as the
flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
AFCS
The FliteCharts and optional ChartView provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
AOPA’s Airport Directory offers detailed information for a selected airport, such as available services, hours of
operation, and lodging options.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Telephone and Data Link Services are optional subscription services offered through Garmin Flight Data
Services and Iridium Satellite LLC. Voice communications are through the Iridium Satellite Network. Data
communications are through Iridium Data Services, or a wireless network (Wi-Fi) when the aircraft is on the
ground. Incorporated in this feature set is a System Data Logging function which records aircraft system parameters
specified by the aircraft manufacturer. This data is then uploaded to Garmin Flight Data Services through one of
the data communications options.
APPENDICES
The optional XM Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles more than 170
channels of music, news, and sports. XM Radio offers more entertainment choices and longer range coverage
than commercial broadcast stations.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.1 Synthetic Vision System (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVS is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVS terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed
even if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid
with lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the
terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
The optional Synthetic Vision System (SVS) is a visual enhancement to the G1000 Integrated Flight Deck. SVS
depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft. The field of
view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVS information is shown on the Primary Flight Display
(PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑118). The depicted imagery is
derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second database of
terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning that
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVS. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVS to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
The Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) is integrated within SVS to provide visual and auditory
alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the projected flight path. Terrain alerts
are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the TAWS terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVS.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVS enhancements appear on the PFD:
484
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVS Operation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVS is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVS functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function Softkeys,
including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVS feature softkeys. The softkeys are
labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, and APTSIGNS. The BACK Softkey returns to the previous
level of softkeys. Synthetic Terrain must be active before any other SVS feature may be activated.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is
activated (gray with black characters). After activating the SYN TERR Softkey, the HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS,
and PATHWAY softkeys may be activated in any combination to display desired features. When system power
is cycled, the last selected state (on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY
softkeys is remembered by the system.
APPENDICES
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits.
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
SYN VIS
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
EAS
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
Figure 8-2 SVS Softkeys
Activating and deactivating SVS:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVS display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Activating and deactivating Pathways:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
AFCS
Activating and deactivating Horizon Headings:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Activating and deactivating Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
486
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVS Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Airport
Runway
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source
Flight
Path
Marker
Airplane
Symbol
EAS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-3 SVS on the Primary Flight Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS
Softkeys
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the CDI, VSI, and VDI.
AFCS
NOTE: Pathways are not available when the cross-pointer (X-Pointer) flight director format is selected.
Pathways
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
APPENDICES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and navigation
source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that correspond to
the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI. An inactive
leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the Inset map or
MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Programmed
Altitudes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
AFCS
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, and
some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be used
independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from the
display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction. Pathways are also automatically removed from the
display in the event a Resolution Advisory (RA) is issued by the optional TCAS II system. Pathways may then
be re-displayed by pressing the PATHWAY Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVS
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
488
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight plan
includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided that the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVS Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVS Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
490
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Flight Path Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation. The FPM represents the
direction of the flight path as it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol
represents the aircraft heading.
EAS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path and distant terrain or
obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the FPM could indicate
a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS. However, decisions regarding terrain and/or
obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
Wind
Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
Zero Pitch Line
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the aircraft attitude with respect
to the horizon. It may not align with the terrain horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or
when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Horizon Heading
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the zero pitch line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Traffic
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVS display or may appear as a
EAS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVS
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVS display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Signs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
492
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Runways
WARNING: Do not use SVS runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
EAS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed. Not all airports have
runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Runway
Selected for
Approach
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Other
Runway
on Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
TAWS Alerting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts. In addition to the yellow terrain shading for a caution alert and the red shading for a warning alert,
TAWS-B alerting will also indicate potential impact points. These potential impact points correspond to red
and/or yellow X symbols on the PFD Inset Map (as shown in Figure 8-10), MFD map displays, and TAWS-B
Page on the MFD. Terrain shading will only occur on the synthetic terrain display on the PFD and TAWS-A
Page on the MFD when using the optional TAWS-A system. No terrain shading nor potential impact points
will be displayed on the PFD inset map or the MFD map display. For more detailed information regarding
TAWS, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVS field of view to the left or right of the
aircraft.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TERRAIN
Annunciation
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain
Caution
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
494
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. When employing a TAWS-B system, unlike the Inset
map and MFD moving map display, obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn
of potential conflict with the aircraft’s flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert.
Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the
airspeed and altitude displays.
As with terrain alerting on a TAWS-A system, obstacle alerting is limited to the synthetic terrain display on
the PFD and the TAWS-A Page on the MFD.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Obstacle
Warning
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
AFCS
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Field of View
APPENDICES
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
495
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Field of
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Map Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
APPENDICES
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
INDEX
SVS View on the PFD
Field of View on the MFD
Figure 8-13 PFD and MFD Field of View Comparison
496
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.2 SafeTaxi
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The SafeTaxi feature gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The maximum map ranges
for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to show the airport detail,
the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport landmarks including
ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at lower map ranges. When
the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport provides enhanced position
awareness.
EAS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Navigation Map Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
Taxiway
Identification
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Aircraft
Position
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Features
Figure 8-14 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes
Taxiway
Markings
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
selected for easy recognition of decluttering level. Selecting the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings
and airport feature labels. Selecting the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR station ID, the VOR symbol, and
intersection names if within the airport plan view. Selecting the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport runway
layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Selecting the DCLTR-3 Softkey cycles back
to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
498
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-15 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
SAFETAXI
Option
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-16 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
SafeTaxi Database Cycle Number and Revision
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
SafeTaxi Database
Figure 8-17 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-18.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
500
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in Figure 8-18, 09S3, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3 – Indicates the third issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 07–MAY–09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 02–JUL–09 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-18 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑18 and 8-19). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑19). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for PFD1. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Select the PFD1 DB Softkey. The softkey label will change to PFD2 DB. The DATABASE window will now
display database information for PFD2. Again, scroll through the listed information by turning the FMS Knob
or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 8-19 illustrates possible SafeTaxi database conditions that may appear on the AUX - System Status
Page. The EFFECTIVE date is the beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the
effective date, the EFFECTIVE date appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date
is the revision date for the next database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-19 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Expired, SafeTaxi Not Available
502
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 ChartView
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView resembles the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed in full
color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving map in the plan view
of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Departure Procedures (DP)
• NOTAMs
EAS
• Approaches
ChartView Softkeys
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, selecting the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SHW CHRT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
AFCS
CHRT OPT
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALL
BACK
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-20 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Terminal Procedures Charts
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, select the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-21 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-22 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-23 Unable To Display Chart Banner
504
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by selecting the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is the one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
EAS
Selecting a chart:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, select the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Select the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Scroll Through
Entire Chart
With the
Joystick
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-24 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. Once the desired chart
is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑28). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Selecting the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the DeKalb Peachtree (KPDK) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
Figure 8-25 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
506
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is
within the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Bravo on the Charlotte,
NC (KCLT) airport.
EAS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected
using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates, and
Airline Parking Gate Location. (The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-26 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-26, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-27).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-27 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
Selecting the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Not
To Scale
INDEX
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-28 Departure Information Page
508
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
EAS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-29 Arrival Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 8-30 Approach Information Page
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such
as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-31 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Selecting
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled. The NOTAM Softkey may appear
on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
510
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-32 NOTAM Softkey Enabled
NOTAM Softkey
Appears When
NOTAMS are
Available for
Selected Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Local
NOTAM on
Selected
Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
NOTAM Softkey
Selected
Figure 8-33 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
INDEX
Selecting the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Chart Options
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-20).
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the ALL Softkey shows the entire approach chart on the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entire Chart
Shown
Figure 8-34 Approach Information Page, ALL View
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selecting the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-35 Approach Information Page, Header View
512
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Approach
Chart Plan
View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page, Plan View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-37 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-38 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, selecting the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
514
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Select FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-39 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Selecting the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, select the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
EAS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Available
Information
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Select FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full Screen
and Chart with Info
Window
INDEX
Figure 8-40 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Selecting the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
516
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-41 Page Menus
Day/Night View
AFCS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
517
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-42 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑43).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
518
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-43 Arrival Information Page, Day View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-44 Arrival Information Page, Night View
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView Database
Figure 8-45 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
520
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EAS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 0904, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
04 – Indicates the fourth issue of the ChartView database for the year
The EXPIRES date 06–MAR–09 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DISABLES date 15–MAY–09 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ChartView
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-46 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
The ChartView database is obtained directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-47. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-47 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Expired, ChartView Disabled, ChartView Not Available
522
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 FliteCharts
• Departure Procedures (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of National Aeronautical Charting Office (NACO) terminal procedures
charts. The charts are displayed with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. FliteCharts database
subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FliteCharts Softkeys
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, selecting the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart
and advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
WX
APR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SHW CHRT
GO BACK
AFCS
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ALL
Selecting the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-48 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Terminal Procedures Charts
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, select the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-49 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-50 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-51 Unable To Display Chart Banner
524
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by selecting the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, selecting the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EAS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, select the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Select the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pan Entire
Chart With
the Joystick
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-52 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. Once the desired chart is
selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the Joystick
centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Selecting the CHRT Softkey switches between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Select CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and WPT Airport Information Page
INDEX
Figure 8-53 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
526
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-53) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-54) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or
INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the softkeys are blank. The Charlotte,
NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate Minimums, and
Take-off Minimums.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Info Box
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-54 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
527
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-54, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
IFR Alternate Minimums Chart (Figure 8-55).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-55 Airport Information Page, ALTERNATE MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Selecting the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-56 Departure Information Page
528
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-57 Arrival Information Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Figure 8-58 Approach Information Page
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Selecting the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the XM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, select the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EAS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the softkeys are blank.
If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to
complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WX Info
When
Available
AFCS
Info Available
on This Airport
Chart Not
To Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
APPENDICES
Figure 8-59 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
WX Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Selecting the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
530
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Chart Options
Selecting the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-48).
Selecting the ALL Softkey shows the entire chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Entire Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-60 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Select FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-61 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
532
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Select FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full Screen
Chart and Chart with
Info Window
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
Selecting the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-63 Page Menus
534
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Day/Night View
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-64 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑65).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
535
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-65 Approach Information Page, Day View
INDEX
Figure 8-66 Approach Information Page, Night View
536
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays
the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
Figure 8-67 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
AFCS
Definition
Blank Line. System is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-68. ‘FliteCharts Expires’ plus a
date in white, indicates the chart database is current. ‘Chart data is out of date!’ in yellow, indicates charts are
still viewable, but approaching the disable date.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates that the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
EAS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 0905, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
05 – Indicates the fifth issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 07–MAY–09 is the first date that this database is current.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 04–JUN–09 is the last date that this database is current.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The DISABLES date 01–DEC–09 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
INDEX
APPENDICES
FliteCharts
Data
Figure 8-68 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
538
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. REGION and CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate that FliteCharts database
is not available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
Figure 8-69 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Expired, FliteCharts Disabled, FliteCharts Not Available
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.5 AOPA Airport Directory
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) Airport Directory database offers detailed information
regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information is viewed on the Airport
Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in Figure 8-70.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-70 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
540
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AOPA Database Cycle Number and Revision
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AOPA Airport Directory database is revised four times per year. Check fly.garmin.com for the current
database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date. When turning on the
system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or not available.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AOPA Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-71 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
Power-up Page Display
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Definition
Normal operation. AOPA Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
AOPA Airport Directory database has expired.
Database card contains no AOPA Airport Directory data.
AFCS
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
541
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-72.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information
is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 09D2, is deciphered as follows:
09 – Indicates the year 2009
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
EAS
2 – Indicates the second issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 15–APR–09 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 14–JUL–09 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
AFCS
Airport Directory
Data
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-72 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in
blue when data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the
REGION field if Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
542
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 Satellite Telephone and Data Link Services
NOTE: Separate accounts must be established to access the Iridium satellite network for voice and low
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
speed data transmission, and high speed data transmission for the maintenance reports.
EAS
The optional GDL 59 Data Link provides an aircraft systems data logger for communication of potential
maintenance issues and, while the aircraft is on the ground, a high speed (IEEE 802.11g) Wi-Fi data link between
the aircraft and a ground computer network. The GDL 59 can also be paired with up to two optional GSR 56
Iridium Transceivers providing an airborne low speed data link and Iridium Satellite Telephone service. Iridium
telephone is available to the flight crew through the audio panel and headset. The system provides a telephone
handset interface to be used for voice communication between the aircraft cabin and the cockpit and for Iridium
telephone service in the aircraft cabin. A low speed (2400 baud) internet connection is also provided for limited
personal computer use in the cabin.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Operation of these features in the cockpit is accomplished through the AUX-AUXILIARY COMMUNICATIONS
Pages. For operation using the cabin handset, consult the instructions provided with the handset.
Registering the Iridium Satellite System
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System for telephone and low
speed data services. Contact Garmin Flight Data Services at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States or 913-3978200. After this account has been established, the system must be registered.
To register the system for telephone and low speed data services:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select SYSTEM STATUS. Note the System ID number in the AIRFRAME field as seen
in Figure 8-72.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select Auxiliary COMMUNICATIONS.
AFCS
4) Select the REPORTS Softkey. The Report Status Page is now displayed as shown in Figure 8-73.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
543
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Figure 8-73 Report Status Page Selected Prior to System Registration
5) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed as seen in Figure 8-74.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Iridium Internet’ in the menu list.
Figure 8-74 Select Iridium Internet
7) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) Select CONNECT Softkey. Momentarily, IRIDIUM 1 will display ‘CONNECTED’ in the Connection Status
Window.
INDEX
9) Press the MENU Key to again display the Page Menu window.
544
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
10) Select ‘Register With GFDS’ in the menu list.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
Figure 8-75 Select Register With GFDS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11) Press the ENT Key. The Garmin Flight Data Service Registration window is now displayed as shown in Figure
8-76.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-76 Enter Access Code
12) Enter the last four digits of the System ID number in the Access Code field.
INDEX
13) Press the ENT Key. REGISTER will now be highlighted as in Figure 8-76.
14) Press the ENT Key. System registration is complete when ‘REGISTERED’ is displayed in the STATUS field.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
545
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Disable/Enable Iridium Transceiver
Iridium telephone and data communications may be turn on of off by performing these simple steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To disable/enable telephone and low speed data services:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select Auxiliary COMMUNICATIONS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
3) Select the REPORTS Softkey. The Report Status Page is now displayed as shown in Figure 8-77.
Figure 8-77 Report Status Page
AFCS
4) Press the MENU Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed as seen in Figure 8-78.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’ in the menu list.
Figure 8-78 Select Disable Iridium Transmission
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key. The Iridium transceiver is now disabled.
7) To enable the Iridium transceiver, repeat steps 1 through 4, then select ‘Enable Iridium Transceiver’.
546
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Telephone Communication
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network as well as to or from the
telephone handset in the cabin. Calls can also be answered or made from the cabin phone, however, only
actions initiated from the cockpit phone will be discussed here. See the cabin handset user guide for more
information. Control and monitoring of telephone functions are accomplished through the AUX-TELEPHONE
Page.
To view the Telephone Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
EAS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select Auxiliary COMMUNICATIONS.
3) If necessary, select the TEL Softkey to display the AUX-TELEPHONE Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The phone status display, as shown in Figure 8-79, gives a graphical representation of the current
disposition of voice and/or data transmissions. Table 8-5 describes symbology used on Phone Status
display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Satellite
Signal
Strength
External
Phone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Internal
Phones
AFCS
Figure 8-79 Phone Status Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
547
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Internal
Phone
External
Phone
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Phone is Idle
Phone is ringing
EAS
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone has failed
Phone status not known
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone is disabled
Phone is reserved for data transmission
AFCS
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 8-5 Telephone Symbols
548
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Incoming Calls
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TELEPHONE Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure 8-80 will
be displayed. If the call is from the cabin, CABIN will be displayed as seen in this figure. If the incoming call
is an Iridium network call, IRIDIUM will be displayed. In addition to the pop-up alert, a voice alert, “Incoming
Call”, will be heard on the selected cockpit audio.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-80 Incoming Call From Cabin
To answer an incoming call in the cockpit:
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select the ANSWER Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the call unanswered. Selecting
the TEL Softkey will display the AUX-TELEPHONE allowing additional call information to be viewed before
answering.
To mute incoming call alerts:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mute Incoming Call Alerts’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
549
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Outgoing Calls
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit to the handset in the cabin, or to an external phone through the
Iridium Satellite Network.
To make a call to the cabin:
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
2) Select the DIAL Softkey on the MFD. A display similar to Figure 8-81 will be shown.
AFCS
Figure 8-81 Initiating a Cabin Call
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor will move from ‘CABIN’ to ‘OK’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key again. The cabin phone will now be ringing as seen in Figure 8-82.
550
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-82 Cabin Phone Ringing
When the cabin phone is answered, the connection is established as shown in Figure 8-83. To exit the call,
select the HANGUP Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-83 Cabin Phone Answered
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
551
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
To make an external call from the cockpit using the Iridium satellite network:
1) Press the TEL Key on the appropriate audio panel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the DIAL Softkey on the MFD. A display similar to Figure 8-84 will be shown.
Figure 8-84 Initiating an External Call
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘IRIDIUM’ as seen in Figure 8-85.
Figure 8-85 Selecting the Iridium Satellite System
552
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor has now moved to the phone number entry field as shown in Figure 8-86.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-86 Enter Phone Number
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Enter the desired telephone number (country code first) by selecting the number softkeys on the MFD or by
pressing the numeric keys on the MFD Control Unit.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted as in Figure 8-87.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-87 Make the Call
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
553
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number, as in Figure 8-88.
Figure 8-88 System is Making the Connection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the phone is answered, the connection is established as shown in Figure 8-89. To exit the call, select
the HANGUP Softkey.
Figure 8-89 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
554
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Placing The Cockpit Phone on Hold
To place a call on hold:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select the HOLD Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Put Current Call On Hold’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
EAS
The cockpit phone is now isolated from the call as seen in Figure 8-90. This figure illustrates a conference
call between the cockpit, cabin, and an external phone in which the cockpit phone has been put on hold.
Select the HOLD Softkey again to resume the call.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-90 Cockpit Phone on Hold
Transferring a Call from the Cockpit
APPENDICES
From the cockpit phone, a external call can be transferred to the cabin phone, or a call with the cabin phone
can be transferred to an external phone, or (when two Iridium Transceivers are installed) an external call can
be transferred to another external phone.
To transfer a call:
1) Select the TRANS Softkey on the MFD.
INDEX
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Transfer Current Call’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
555
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A window similar to that shown in Figure 8-91 will be displayed. In this example, an active call to the cabin
will be transferred to an external number. Therefore, the window shows the ‘Iridium’ option. If the active
call is with an external phone, ‘CABIN’ would be the option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-91 Enter Phone Number to Receive Transferred Call
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor now highlights the phone number entry field.
3) Enter the phone number as discussed earlier for making an external call on the Iridium satellite network.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is now highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key again to place the call as shown in Figure 8-92.
556
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-92 Call Transfer to an External Phone
When the external phone is answered, the call connection is indicated as in Figure 8-93.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-93 Call Transfer Complete
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
557
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Making a Conference Call from the Cockpit
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The cabin or an external phone (two external phones if two Iridium Transceivers are installed) can be added
to a call already in progress.
To add another phone to an active call:
1) Select the CONF Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
EAS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Conference Current Call’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A window similar to that shown in Figure 8-94 will be displayed. In this example, an external phone will
be added to an active call to the cabin. Therefore, the window shows the ‘Iridium’ option. If the active call
is with an external phone, ‘CABIN’ would be the option.
Figure 8-94 Initiate a Conference Call
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor now highlights the phone number entry field.
3) Enter the phone number as discussed earlier for making an external call on the Iridium satellite network.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is now highlighted.
INDEX
5) Press the ENT Key again to place the call as shown in Figure 8-95.
558
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-95 Conference in External Phone
When the external phone is answered, the call connection is indicated as in Figure 8-96.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-96 External Phone Added
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
559
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
WI-FI Connections
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can connect to a IEEE 802.11g compatible network provided the aircraft is on the ground and
located within range of the network. The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK
encryption formats. WPA-Enterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web
proxies, captive portals, or other elements that require user credentials, including a username and password or
a redemption or access code; or require action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
Control and monitoring of Wi-Fi functions are accomplished through the AUX-WI-FI SETUP Page.
To view the Wi-Fi Setup Page:
EAS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select Auxiliary COMMUNICATIONS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, select the WI-FI Softkey to display the AUX-WI-FI SETUP Page.
To set up a new Wi-Fi connection:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the AVAIL Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the AVAILABLE NETWORKS
window as shown in Figure 8-97. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as security requirements
and whether the network has been saved in the system’s memory.
Figure 8-97 Available Wi-Fi Networks
2) If necessary, select the RESCAN Softkey to have the system scan again for available networks.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
560
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network. See Figure 8-98.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-98 Desired Network Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Select the CONNECT Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect To Selected Network’.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key.
6) If the network is secured, a window similar to Figure 8-99 will be displayed in order to enter the necessary
passcode. Use the FMS Knobs to enter the desired alpha numeric characters. Select the CAP LOCK Softkey to
enter upper case letters. If there is no security associated with the network, proceed to step 9.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-99 Enter Security Code
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
561
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key again.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) The SAVE SETTINGS window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘SAVE CONNECTION’.
Figure 8-100 Save Option
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make re-connection easier at a later time.
To connect the selected network without saving:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to highlight ‘CONNECT’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
b) Press the ENT Key.
To save and connect the selected network:
a) Press the ENT Key. A checkmark is placed in the checkbox and the cursor moves to the airport field as shown
in Figure 8-100.
AFCS
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter an airport identifier to be associated with the saved network. This aids in identifying
the network later in the event of duplicate network names.
c) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to ‘CONNECT’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
d) Press the ENT Key again to connect to the selected network.
Figure 8-101 Save Connection
562
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To edit a saved network:
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor as seen in Figure 8-102.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the AUTO CONNECT checkbox. When a checkmark is
present, the system will automatically connect to the network when within range.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-102 Select Network to be Edited
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
563
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Select the EDIT Softkey. The cursor now appears in the CONNECTION SETTINGS window as shown in Figure
8-103.
Figure 8-103 Select Attributes to Edit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘SAVE’ is highlighted.
AFCS
9) Press the ENT Key.
To disconnect a Wi-Fi network:
Select the DISCNCT Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
APPENDICES
c) Press the ENT Key.
To delete a saved Wi-Fi network:
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
INDEX
3) Select the DELETE Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
564
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
System Data Logging
NOTE: An account must be established with Garmin Flight Data Services to make full use of the System Data
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Logging feature.
EAS
The system provides recording of CAS and CMC messages that occur while the aircraft is on the ground or in
flight, including engine trend and exceedance data and flight phase transition logs. The logged data will include
the message time and the message state (active, inactive or inhibited).
Additionally, the system is capable of logging data packets from the High Speed Data Bus.
The recorded data is then assembled into reports that can be transmitted to Garmin Flight Data Services
using any of three data transmission methods (Wi-Fi, Iridium RUDICS, and Iridium Short Burst Data). The
system selects the appropriate transmission method based on parameters set by the aircraft manufacturer and
communication network availability. Data transmission may be initiated manually when the airplane is on the
ground.
If report transmission is interrupted for some reason (e.g. networks unavailable, hardware failure, loss of
power), the system will attempt to resume sending the reports at the next opportunity. The system ensures the
complete data set is transmitted.
Transmitted reports remain in the system’s memory until they are overwritten by newer data.
Control and monitoring of report transmissions is accomplished through the AUX-REPORT STATUS Page as
seen in Figure 8-104.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To view the Report Status Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select Auxiliary COMMUNICATIONS.
3) If necessary, select the REPORT Softkey to display the AUX-REPORT STATUS Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-104 Report Status Page
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
565
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
To change transmission method:
1) While viewing the Report Status Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the 1st or 2nd transmit method for the desired data report.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired option (SAT SHORT BURST, SAT RUDICS, WI-FI, or NONE) as
shown in Figure 8-105. Sat Short Burst is generally used for transmission of data packets less than 300 bytes.
Wi-Fi is used only when the aircraft on the ground.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Figure 8-105 Select Transmission Method
To enable/disable automatic send for Automatic Test Reports:
1) While viewing the Report Status Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the AUTOMATIC SEND field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ENABLED of DISABLED.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
To enable/disable periodic send for Periodic Test Reports:
1) While viewing the Report Status Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the PERIODIC SEND field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ENABLED of DISABLED.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key.
566
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To send a transmission manually:
NOTE: Manual transmission of data can only be performed while the aircraft is on the ground.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Report Status Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the SEND button on the desired data report.
3) Press the ENT Key.
To restore Reports Page options to default settings:
EAS
1) While viewing the Report Status Page, press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Restore Defaults’ in the menu list as shown in Figure 8-106.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-106 Restore Defaults
4) A confirmation window as shown in Figure 8-107 is now displayed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-107 Restore Defaults Confirmation
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘YES’ or ‘NO’.
APPENDICES
6) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
567
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.7 XM Radio Entertainment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about XM Weather products.
The optional XM Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for the pilot’s and
passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive XM Satellite Radio® entertainment services at any altitude
throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is not available on the GDL 69 Data Link Receiver.
EAS
XM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
XM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.xmradio.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Activating XM Satellite Radio Services
The service is activated by providing XM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on the
equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to XM Satellite Radio
to activate the entertainment subscription.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. XM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
These IDs are located:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-108)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (Auxiliary Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
activation data when the XM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal XM Radio operation,
but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently selected during flight. Refer to the GDL 69/69A XM
Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further information.
APPENDICES
Activating the XM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact XM WX Satellite Radio through the e-mail address listed on their website (www.xmradio.com) or by the
customer service phone number listed on the website. Follow the instructions provided by XM Satellite Radio
services.
2) Select the Auxiliary Page Group.
INDEX
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
4) Select the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
568
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Verify that the desired services are activated.
6) Select the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Weather
Products
Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial
Setup
Figure 8-108 XM Information Page
AFCS
If XM weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM Information
Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data Link Page (Map
Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for subscription.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
569
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Using XM Radio
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the XM Satellite
Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Auxiliary Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
EAS
3) Select the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active
Channels
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Channel
List
AFCS
Categories
Field
Figure 8-109 XM Radio Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active Channel and Channel List
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel that the XM Radio
is using.
APPENDICES
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the CHNL Softkey.
INDEX
2) Select the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
Or:
570
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While on the XM Radio Page, select the CHNL Softkey.
2) Select the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Select the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
EAS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Category
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Select the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-110 Categories List
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
571
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Presets
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
selecting the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, select the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
EAS
2) Select the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Selecting the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Select any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Select the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Select PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Select MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Select SET
to Save Each
Preset Channel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-111 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Selecting the BACK Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
Volume
AFCS
Radio volume is shown as a percentage. Volume level is controlled by selecting the VOL Softkey, which
brings up the MUTE Softkey and the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, select the VOL Softkey.
2) Select the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or select the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is selected, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
APPENDICES
3) Select the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Select the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
INDEX
Radio volume may also be adjusted at each passenger station.
Figure 8-112 Volume Control
572
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 Scheduler
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Hot Section Inspection or
Phase 1 Maintenance Check) in the Messages Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on a
specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-113 Scheduler (Utility Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Entering a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
APPENDICES
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
573
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
EAS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message text.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
MSG Softkey label flashes. Selecting the MSG Softkey opens the Messages Window and acknowledges the
scheduler message. Selecting the MSG Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the
scheduler message is deleted from the message queue.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-114 PFD Messages Window
574
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.9 Electronic Checklists
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
for the Phenom 100. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist
information described in the POH.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
EAS
The optional checklist functions are displayed on two levels of softkeys that are available on any MFD page.
(Optional)
SYSTEM
MAP
DCLTR
EXIT
CHECK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
EMERGCY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The CHECK Softkey label changes to UNCHECK
when the checklist item is already checked.
Figure 8-115 Checklist Softkeys
• Gray - General notes
• Yellow - Caution notes
• Red - Warning notes
AFCS
The following colors are used for checklist items:
• Light Blue - Items not selected or checked
• White - Item is selected
• Green - Item has been checked
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow the pilot to quickly find the proper
procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card
inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist,
the Power-up Page messages display ‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the
CHKLIST Softkey is not available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page on the MFD, select the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist
Page.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘Checklist’ field.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key or select the CHECK Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or select the UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
575
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window and ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is highlighted. If ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is selected
prior to checking all the checklist items, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be displayed in yellow text.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key. If ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is displayed when pressing the ENT Key, the next checklist in
the group will be displayed. If ‘EXIT CHECKLISTS?’ is displayed when pressing the ENT Key, the system will exit
the Checklist Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
9) Select the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed. When returning to the
Checklist Page after pressing the EXIT Softkey, the system will return to the last select checklist item.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-116 Sample Checklist
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD, select the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to select the Checklist
Page.
INDEX
2) Select the EMERGCY Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
576
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key or select the CHECK Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item
turns green and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for
checking.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
Press the CLR Key or select the UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window and ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is highlighted. If ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ is selected
prior to checking all the checklist items, ‘*Checklist Not Finished*’ will be displayed in yellow text.
EAS
6) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
7) Select the RETURN Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
8) Select the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-117 Emergency Checklist Page Example
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
577
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
8.10 Abnormal Operation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVS Troubleshooting
SVS is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVS is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVS data, the PFD
display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVS becomes disabled without the following data resources:
EAS
• Attitude data
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
Reversionary Mode
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVS can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVS will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVS PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
Figure 8-118 SVS Reversionary Mode
578
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Unusual Attitudes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-119 Unusual Attitude Display
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blue Band
AFCS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-120 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
579
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Troubleshooting
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to XM
• Ensure the XM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
• Ensure that nothing is plugged into the Music jack(s) because this would prevent XM radio from being
heard
EAS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page (the last page in the AUX Page Group).
INDEX
Figure 8-121 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
580
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Additional Features
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
NO SIGNAL
LOADING
OFF AIR
---
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
EAS
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
WEATHER DATA LINK FAILURE Weather Datalink Page - center of page
within last 5 minutes
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Weather Datalink Page - center of page XM subscription is not activated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 8-6 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
581
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional Features
Blank Page
582
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Annunciations and Alerts
CAS Messages
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Warning Messages
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions. Accompanied by a triple chime tone
which repeats until acknowledged.
Description
Cabin altitude pressure altitude high
Emergency door open
Passenger door open
Fire in engine 1
Fire in engine 2
Low oil pressure in engine 1
Low oil pressure in engine 2
Generators offline
Generators offline and electrical emergency transfer has failed
Landing gear position and control lever disagreement
No takeoff configuration
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message
CAB ALTITUDE HI
DOOR EMER OPEN
DOOR PAX OPEN
E1 FIRE
E2 FIRE
E1 OIL LO PRES
E2 OIL LO PRES
ELEC EMERGENCY
ELEC XFR FAIL
LG LEVER DISAG
NO TO CONFIG
Caution Messages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions. Accompanied by a single chime
tone which repeats until acknowledged.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Description
ADS 1 offline or failed
ADS 2 offline or failed
Pitot heater 1 offline or heater element failed
Pitot heater 2 offline or heater element failed
AHRS 1 failure
AHRS 2 failure
Anti-ice system failue in engine 1
Anti-ice system failue in engine 2
Anti-skid function lost; main brake still available
Loss of AP function
Airplane mistrimmed in pitch axis when AP is engaged
Airplane mistrimmed in roll axis when AP is engaged
Audio panel 1 is offline
Audio panel 2 is offline
Aural warning system failure due to non-communicating LRUs
Auto pitch trim failure; other pitch trim functions still available
Battery discharging under normal operation
AFCS
Message
ADS 1 FAIL
ADS 2 FAIL
ADS 1 HTR FAIL
ADS 2 HTR FAIL
AHRS 1 FAIL
AHRS 2 FAIL
A-I E1 FAIL
A-I E2 FAIL
ANTI-SKID FAIL
AP FAIL
AP PITCH MISTRIM
AP ROLL MISTRIM
AUDIO PNL 1 FAIL
AUDIO PNL 2 FAIL
AURAL WRN FAIL
AUTO PTRIM FAIL
BATT DISCHARGE
583
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
Description
BATT 1 OFF BUS Battery 1 offline
BATT 2 OFF BUS Battery 2 offline
BATT EXCEEDANCE Battery voltage has exceeded 29 VDC
Bleed 1 system not under control
BLEED 1 FAIL
Bleed 2 system not under control
BLEED 2 FAIL
Bleed 1 hot air leakage at some region of the ducting
BLEED 1 LEAK
Bleed 2 hot air leakage at some region of the ducting
BLEED 2 LEAK
Main brake system lost
BRK FAIL
CAB DELTA-P FAIL Excessive cabin pressure differential
CLUTCH PIT FAIL Slip clutch maintenance test failed
CLUTCH ROL FAIL Slip clutch maintenance test failed
CLUTCH YAW FAIL Slip clutch maintenance test failed
CONFIG MDL FAIL Master Configuration Module failed or non-communicative
D-I WINGSTB FAIL Deice system in wings and tail failure
DOORBAG AFT OPEN Crew baggage door open
DOORBAG FWD OPEN Forward baggage door open
DUCT 1 OVERTEMP Duct 1 temperature over specified safe value
DUCT 2 OVERTEMP Duct 2 temperature over specified safe value
E1 CTRL FAULT Engine 1 responds slowly or not at all to thrust commands
E2 CTRL FAULT Engine 2 responds slowly or not at all to thrust commands
Uncommanded shutdown detected for engine 1
E1 FAIL
Uncommanded shutdown detected for engine 2
E2 FAIL
E1 FIRE DET FAIL Fire detection system failure in engine 1
E2 FIRE DET FAIL Fire detection system failure in engine 2
Fire extinguisher failure in engine 1
E1 FIREX FAIL
Fire extinguisher failure in engine 2
E2 FIREX FAIL
E1 FUEL IMP BYP Fuel filter impending bypass condition for engine 1
E2 FUEL IMP BYP Fuel filter impending bypass condition for engine 2
Thrust Lever Angle failure for engine 1
E1 TLA FAIL
Thrust Lever Angle failure for engine 2
E2 TLA FAIL
E1 TT0 HTR FAIL Heater failure in engine 1
E2 TT0 HTR FAIL Heater failure in engine 2
Electrical bay over temperature
EBAY OVHT
EMER BRK LO PRES Emergency accumulator pressure below 1800 psi. Few emergency brake functions available.
ENG NO TO DATA No takeoff data entered
Loss of flaps deployment or retraction
FLAP FAIL
FUEL 1 LO LEVEL Low fuel level in tank 1
FUEL 2 LO LEVEL Low fuel level in tank 2
FUEL 1 LO PRES Fuel pressure low in engine 1 feed line
FUEL 2 LO PRES Fuel pressure low in engine 2 feed line
FUEL 1 SOV FAIL Fuel feed SOV 1 closed or unavilable
FUEL 2 SOV FAIL Fuel feed SOV 2 closed or unavilable
FUEL IMBALANCE Fuel is imbalanced between the tanks
584
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
Description
Fuel tank overfilled
Fuel transfer failure
Generator 1 offline
Generator 2 offline
Generator(s) overload
Generator start fault
Failure of GIA 1
Failure of GIA 2
GIA 1 over temperature
GIA 2 over temperature
Hydraulic temperature high
Hydraulic pressure low
Landing gear weight-on-wheels system failure
MFD configuration error
Fault with the MFD
MFD over temperature
Oxygen system pressure low
Parking brake not released
Cabin altitude high and passenger oxygen system pressure low
PFD 1 configuration error
PFD 2 configuration error
Fault with PFD 1
Fault with PFD 2
PFD 1 over temperature
PFD 2 over temperature
Pressurization controller failure
Loss of backup pitch trim actuator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pitch trim disconnected
Loss of normally-operating pitch trim actuator
Stall Warning & Protection System pusher has failed
Stall Warning Pusher is off
Failure of standby heater
Stall Warning & Protection System inoperative
Stall Warning & Protection System activation angles anticipated to conservative settings
Stall Warning & Protection System heater 1 failure
Stall Warning & Protection System heater 2 failure
Stall Warning & Protection System has not been tested
TCAS I or TCAS II is unavailable
Windshield 1 heater failure
Windshield 2 heater failure
Loss of yaw damper function
Airplane mistrimmed in yaw axis when YD is engaged
APPENDICES
INDEX
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message
FUEL OVERFILL
FUEL XFR FAIL
GEN 1 OFF BUS
GEN 2 OFF BUS
GEN OVLD
GEN START FAULT
GIA 1 FAIL
GIA 2 FAIL
GIA 1 OVHT
GIA 2 OVHT
HYD HI TEMP
HYD LO PRES
LG WOW SYS FAIL
MFD CONFIG
MFD FAULT
MFD OVHT
OXY LO PRES
PARK BRK NOT REL
PAX OXY NO PRES
PFD 1 CONFIG
PFD 2 CONFIG
PFD 1 FAULT
PFD 2 FAULT
PFD 1 OVHT
PFD 2 OVHT
PRESN AUTO FAIL
PTRIM BKP FAIL
PTRIM DISCONNECT
PTRIM NML FAIL
PUSHER FAIL
PUSHER OFF
STBY HTR FAIL
SWPS FAIL
SWPS FAULT
SWPS HTR 1 FAIL
SWPS HTR 2 FAIL
SWPS UNTESTED
TCAS FAIL
WSHLD 1 HTR FAIL
WSHLD 2 HTR FAIL
YD FAIL
YD MISTRIM
585
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Advisory Messages
See the Airplane Flight Manual (AFM) for recommended pilot actions.
Description
De-ice system on in engine 1
De-ice system on in engine 2
Fault in ADS 1 heater
Fault in ADS 2 heater
ADS - Angle-of-attack heater on
Fault with AHRS 1
Fault with AHRS 2
Fault with audio panel 1
Fault with audio panel 2
Partial loss of aural warning function
Avionics fan failure
Bleed pressure regulator 1 and shut-off valve closed
Bleed pressure regulator 2 and shut-off valve closed
Pitch slip clutch maintenance test passed
Pitch slip clutch maintenance test in progress
Roll slip clutch maintenance test passed
Roll slip clutch maintenance test in progress
Yaw slip clutch maintenance test passed
Yaw slip clutch maintenance test in progress
DC bus 1 offline
DC bus 2 offline
Deice system in wings and tail ON
Chip detected by engine 1 oil chip detector
Chip detected by engine 2 oil chip detector
FADEC fault in engine 1
FADEC fault in engine 2
Emergency accumulator pressure between 1800 and 2300 psi. System still operative, but servicing
EMER BRK CHECK
will be necessary in the near future.
ELEC SYS FAULT Electrical system fault
EMER BUS OFF Emergency bus OFF
ENG EXCEEDANCE Limit exceeded in engine(s) during flight
ENG FIREX DISCH Engine fire extinguisher discharge
ENG NO DISPATCH FADEC detected no dispatch fault condition in engine(s)
FLAP NOT AVAIL Flaps not available
FUEL EQUAL
Fuel quantity asymmetry corrected; XFEED SOV is open
FUEL1 FEED FAULT DC pump on due to low fuel pressure
FUEL2 FEED FAULT DC pump on due to low fuel pressure
FUEL 1 PSW FAIL Fuel pressure switch stuck in “high” position
FUEL 2 PSW FAIL Fuel pressure switch stuck in “high” position
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
A-I E1 ON
A-I E2 ON
ADS 1 HTR FAULT
ADS 2 HTR FAULT
ADS-AOA HTR ON
AHRS 1 FAULT
AHRS 2 FAULT
AUDIO PNL1 FAULT
AUDIO PNL2 FAULT
AURAL WRN FAULT
AVNX FAN FAIL
BLEED 1 OFF
BLEED 2 OFF
CLUTCH PIT PASS
CLUTCH PIT PROG
CLUTCH ROL PASS
CLUTCH ROL PROG
CLUTCH YAW PASS
CLUTCH YAW PROG
DC BUS 1 OFF
DC BUS 2 OFF
D-I WINGSTB ON
E1 CHIP DETECTED
E2 CHIP DETECTED
E1 FADEC FAULT
E2 FADEC FAULT
586
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Description
Fuel pump 1 failure
Fuel pump 2 failure
Failure of GEA 1
Failure of GEA 2
Failure of GEA 3
Ground power unit connected to the aircraft
GSD non-communicative
An LRU has stopped communicating over an HSDB
HSDB switch in reversionary position
Failure of MFD fan
Oxygen system switch in manual mode
Failure of PFD 1 fan
Failure of PFD 2 fan
Failure of pilot pitch trim switch
Failure of copilot pitch trim switch
Ram air valve failure
Shed bus off
Stall Warning System activation angles anticipated due to ice conditions
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message
FUEL PUMP 1 FAIL
FUEL PUMP 2 FAIL
GEA 1 FAIL
GEA 2 FAIL
GEA 3 FAIL
GPU CONNECTED
GSD FAIL
HSDB FAULT
HSDB SW REV POS
MFD FAN FAIL
OXY SW NOT AUTO
PFD 1 FAN FAIL
PFD 2 FAN FAIL
PTRIM SW1 FAIL
PTRIM SW2 FAIL
RAM AIR FAIL
SHED BUS OFF
SWPS ICE SPEED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
587
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Comparator Annunciations
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Comparator monitors critical values generated by redundant sensors. If differences in the sensors
exceed a specified amount, this discrepancy will be annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’
(miscompare) as seen in Figure A-1. Note that operating the system in the vicinity of metal buildings or other
metal structures can cause sensor differences that may result in nuisance miscompare annunciations during
start up, shut down, or while taxiing. If one or both of the sensed values are unavailable, it will be annunciated
as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare). The following is a list of the possible annunciations:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Comparator
Window
Figure A-1 Sensor Comparator Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Comparator Window Text
Condition
Difference in altitude sensors is > 200 ft.
ALT MISCOMP
If both airspeed sensors detect < 35 kts, this is inhibited.
IAS MISCOMP
If either airspeed sensor detects > 35 kts, and the difference in sensors is > 15 kts.
If either airspeed sensor detects > 80 kts, and the difference in sensors is > 10 kts.
HDG MISCOMP
Difference in heading sensors is > 10º.
PIT MISCOMP
Difference in pitch sensors is > 5º.
ROL MISCOMP
Difference in roll sensors is > 6º.
ALT NO COMP
No data from one or both altitude sensors.
IAS NO COMP
No data from one or both airspeed sensors.
HDG NO COMP
No data from one or both heading sensors.
PIT NO COMP
No data from one or both pitch sensors.
ROL NO COMP
No data from one or both roll sensors..
588
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Reversionary Sensor Annunciations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in the Reversionary Sensor Window, as shown in Figure A-2.
These annunciations reflect reversionary sensors selected on one or both PFDs. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey
gives access to ADC1, ADC2, ADCSTBY, AHRS1, AHRS2, and ATTSTBY Softkeys. These softkeys allow manual
switching of sensors. In the case of certain types of sensor failures, the system may make some sensor selections
automatically. The GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
EAS
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure A-2 Reversionary Sensor Windows
Condition
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 Air Data Computer.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the standby air data input.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 AHRS.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the standby attitude and heading reference input.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #1 GPS receiver.
Both PFDs are displaying data from the #2 GPS receiver.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 Air Data Computer.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 Air Data Computer.
PFD1 or PFD2 is displaying data from the standby air data input.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 AHRS.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 AHRS.
PFD1 or PFD2 is displaying data from the standby attitude and heading reference input.
PFD2 is displaying data from the #1 GPS.
PFD1 is displaying data from the #2 GPS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Reversionary Sensor
Window Text
BOTH ON ADC1
BOTH ON ADC2
BOTH ON ADCSTBY
BOTH ON AHRS1
BOTH ON AHRS2
BOTH ON ATTSTBY
BOTH ON GPS1
BOTH ON GPS2
USING ADC1
USING ADC2
USING ADCSTBY
USING AHRS1
USING AHRS2
USING ATTSTBY
USING GPS1
USING GPS2
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
589
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Prodigy™ System Annunciations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a new message is issued, the MSG Softkey will flash to alert the flight crew of a new message. It
will continue to flash until acknowledged by pressing the softkey. Active messages are displayed in white
text. Messages that have become inactive will change to gray text. The MSG Softkey will flash if the state of
a displayed message changes or a new message is displayed. The inactive messages can be removed from the
Message Window by pressing the flashing MSG Softkey.
Messages are conveyed to the flight crew regarding problems with the system. Typically, a large red “X”
appears in a window when a related LRU fails or detects invalid data.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red “X” is typically displayed on windows associated with the
failed data. The following section describes various system annunciations. Refer to the AFM for additional
information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
NOTE: Upon power-up of the system, certain windows remain invalid as equipment begins to initialize. All
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
windows should be operational within one minute of power-up. Should any window continue to remain
flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
AFCS
System
Annunciation
Red ‘X’
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Messages Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure A-3 System Messages
Message Softkey
Annunciation
590
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
GRS 77 AHRS
Or
GMU 44
Magnetometer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FADEC
EAS
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
GDC 74B Air
Data Computer
Figure A-4 System Failure Annunciations
Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
System Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FADEC
GTX 33/D Transponder
Or
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressure Controller
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
& GSD 71 Data
Concentrator
GIA 63W Integrated
Avionics Units
Attitude and Heading Reference System is aligning.
AFCS
Display system is not receiving attitude information from the AHRS.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Indicates a configuration module failure.
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
Display system is not receiving airspeed input from air data computer.
591
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
System Annunciation
Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Display system is not receiving valid heading input from AHRS.
EAS
Display system is not receiving altitude input from the air data computer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Display system is not receiving vertical speed input from the air data computer.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Display system is not receiving valid transponder information.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS information is either not present or is invalid for navigation use.
Note that AHRS utilizes GPS inputs during normal operation. AHRS operation may be degraded if
GPS signals are not present (see AFM).
AFCS
Other Various Red X
Indications
A red “X” through any other display field (such as engine instrumentation display) indicates that
the field is not receiving valid data.
Prodigy™ System Message Advisories
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Note: This Section provides information regarding message advisories that may be displayed by the
system. Knowledge of the aircraft, systems, flight conditions, and other existing operational priorities must
be considered when responding to a message. Always use sound pilot judgment. The Phenom 100 Airplane
Flight Manual (AFM) takes precedence over any conflicting guidance found in this section.
INDEX
APPENDICES
This section describes various system message advisories. Certain messages are issued due to an LRU or an
LRU function failure. Such messages are normally accompanied by a corresponding red “X” annunciation as
shown previously in the Prodigy™ System Annunciation section.
592
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD & PFD Message Advisories
The PFD and/or MFD self-test has detected a problem. The system should be serviced.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The PFD and/or MFD has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The PFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The system
should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The system
should be serviced.
The MFD and PFDs have different software versions installed. The system should be
serviced.
AFCS
The PFD and/or MFD is overheating and is reducing power consumption by dimming the
display. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
A key is stuck on the PFD and/or MFD bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
APPENDICES
The PFD1 configuration module backup memory has failed. The system should be
serviced.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Comments
The pilot profile data was lost. System reverts to default pilot profile and settings. The
pilot may reconfigure the MFD & PFDs with preferred settings, if desired.
The MFD and PFDs are not communicating with each other. The system should be
serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
DATA LOST – Pilot stored data was
lost. Recheck settings.
XTALK ERROR – A flight display
crosstalk error has occurred.
PFD1 SERVICE – PFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
PFD2 SERVICE – PFD2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MFD1 SERVICE – MFD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – PFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – PFD2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – MFD1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
PFD1 CONFIG – PFD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
PFD2 CONFIG – PFD2 config error.
Config service req’d.
MFD1 CONFIG – MFD1 config
error. Config service req’d.
SW MISMATCH – GDU software
version mismatch. Xtalk is off.
PFD1 COOLING – PFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD2 COOLING – PFD2 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
MFD1 COOLING – MFD1 has poor
cooling. Reducing power usage.
PFD1 KEYSTK – PFD1 [key name]
Key is stuck.
PFD2 KEYSTK – PFD2 [key name]
Key is stuck.
MFD1 KEYSTK – MFD [key name]
Key is stuck.
CNFG MODULE – PFD1
configuration module is inoperative.
PFD1 VOLTAGE – PFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
The PFD1 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
593
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
MFD & PFD Message Advisories (Cont.)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
PFD2 VOLTAGE – PFD2 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
MFD1 VOLTAGE – MFD1 has low
voltage. Reducing power usage
Comments
The PFD2 voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
The MFD voltage is low. The system should be serviced.
Database Message Advisories
Comments
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the navigation database. Attempt to reload the
navigation database. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the basemap database.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the terrain database. Ensure that the terrain
card is properly inserted in display. Replace terrain card. If problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
The terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the obstacle database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 navigation
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 navigation
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 basemap
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 basemap
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 terrain
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 terrain
database missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 terrain
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 obstacle
database error exists.
594
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Database Message Advisories (Cont.)
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The obstacle database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified LRU.
EAS
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the airport terrain database. Ensure that the
data card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should
be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The airport terrain database is present on another LRU, but is missing on the specified
LRU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 obstacle
database missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 obstacle
database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport
terrain database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport
terrain database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 airport
terrain database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 airport
terrain database missing.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 airport
terrain database missing.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 airport
terrain database missing.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD1 DB ERR – PFD1 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
PFD2 DB ERR – PFD2 Safe Taxi
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Chartview
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 FliteCharts
database error exists.
MFD1 DB ERR – MFD1 Airport
Directory database error exists.
DB MISMATCH – Navigation
database mismatch. Xtalk is off.
The MFD and/or PFD detected a failure in the Safe Taxi database. Ensure that the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
190-00728-02 Rev. A
AFCS
The MFD detected a failure in the ChartView database (optional feature). Ensure the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the FliteCharts database (optional feature). Ensure the data
card is properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, system should be serviced.
The MFD detected a failure in the Airport Directory database. Ensure that the data card is
properly inserted. Replace data card. If problem persists, the system should be serviced.
The PFDs and MFD have different navigation database versions or types (Americas,
European, etc.) installed. Crossfill is off. Install correct navigation database version or
type in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Standby
The PFDs and MFD have different standby navigation database versions or types
Navigation database mismatch.
(Americas, European, etc.) installed. Install correct standby navigation database version
or type in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Terrain database The PFDs and MFD have different terrain database versions or types installed. Install
mismatch.
correct terrain database version or type in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Obstacle
The PFDs and MFD have different obstacle database installed. Install correct obstacle
database mismatch.
database in all displays.
DB MISMATCH – Airport Terrain
The PFDs and MFD have different airport terrrain databases installed. Install correct
database mismatch.
airport terrain database in all displays.
595
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Database Message Advisories (Cont.)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
NAV DB UPDATED – Active
navigation database updated.
TERRAIN DSP – [PFD1, PFD2 or
MFD1] Terrain awareness display
unavailable.
Comments
System has updated the active navigation database from the standby navigation
database.
One of the terrain, airport terrain, or obstacle databases required for TAWS in the specified
PFD or MFD is missing or invalid.
GMA 1347D Message Advisories
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
Message
GMA1 FAIL – GMA1 is inoperative.
GMA2 FAIL – GMA2 is inoperative.
GMA XTALK – GMA crosstalk error
has occurred.
GMA1 CONFIG – GMA1 config
error. Config service req’d.
GMA2 CONFIG – GMA2 config
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GMA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GMA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
GMA1 SERVICE – GMA1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
GMA2 SERVICE – GMA2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
Comments
The audio panel self-test has detected a failure. The audio panel is unavailable. The
system should be serviced.
An error has occurred in transferring data between the two GMAs. The system should be
serviced.
The audio panel configuration settings do not match backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
The audio panel has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The audio panel self-test has detected a problem in the unit. Certain audio functions may still
be available, and the audio panel may still be usable. The system should be serviced when
possible.
AFCS
GIA 63W Message Advisories
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GIA1 CONFIG – GIA1 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA2 CONFIG – GIA2 audio config
error. Config service req’d.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1
temperature too low.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2
temperature too low.
GIA1 COOLING – GIA1 over
temperature.
GIA2 COOLING – GIA2 over
temperature.
596
Comments
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 configuration settings do not match backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 have an error in the audio configuration. The system should be
serviced.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too low to operate correctly. Allow units to warm
up to operating temperature.
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 temperature is too high. If problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
The GIA1 and/or GIA2 self-test has detected a problem in the unit. The system should be
serviced.
A GIA mismatch has been detected, where only one is WAAS capable.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GIA1 and/or GIA 2 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Incorrect servo software is installed, or gain settings are incorrect.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system has detected an over temperature condition in COM1 and/or COM2. The
transmitter is operating at reduced power. If the problem persists, the system should be
serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system has detected a failure in COM1 and/or COM2. COM1 and/or COM2 may still
be usable. The system should be serviced when possible.
The COM1 and/or COM2 external push-to-talk switch is stuck in the enable (or
“pressed”) position. Press the PTT switch again to cycle its operation.
If the problem persists, the system should be serviced.
AFCS
The COM1 and/or COM2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”) position.
Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the system
should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS integrity is insufficient for the current phase of flight.
APPENDICES
Loss of GPS navigation due to insufficient satellites.
Loss of GPS navigation due to position error.
Loss of GPS navigation due to GPS failure.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Comments
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
GIA1 SERVICE – GIA1 needs
service. Return the unit for repair.
GIA2 SERVICE – GIA2 needs
service. Return the unit for repair.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA1 communication
halted.
HW MISMATCH – GIA hardware
mismatch. GIA2 communication
halted.
MANIFEST – GIA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GIA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GFC software
mismatch, communication halted.
COM1 TEMP – COM1 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM2 TEMP – COM2 over temp.
Reducing transmitter power.
COM1 SERVICE – COM1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM2 SERVICE – COM2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
COM1 PTT – COM1 push-to-talk
key is stuck.
COM2 PTT – COM2 push-to-talk
key is stuck.
COM1 RMT XFR – COM1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
COM2 RMT XFR – COM2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
LOI – GPS integrity lost. Crosscheck
with other NAVS.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Insufficient satellites.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. Position error.
GPS NAV LOST – Loss of GPS
navigation. GPS fail.
ABORT APR – Loss of GPS
navigation. Abort approach.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GIA 63W Message Advisories (Cont.)
Abort approach due to loss of GPS navigation.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
597
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
GIA 63W Message Advisories (Cont.)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
APR DWNGRADE – Approach
downgraded.
TRUE APR – True north approach.
Change HDG reference to TRUE.
GPS1 SERVICE – GPS1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
GPS2 SERVICE – GPS2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
NAV1 SERVICE – NAV1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
NAV2 SERVICE – NAV2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
NAV1 RMT XFR – NAV1 remote
transfer key is stuck.
NAV2 RMT XFR – NAV2 remote
transfer key is stuck.
G/S1 FAIL – G/S1 is inoperative.
Comments
Vertical guidance generated by WAAS is unavailable, use LNAV only minimums.
Displayed after passing the first waypoint of a true north approach when the nav angle
is set to ‘AUTO’.
A failure has been detected in the GPS1 and/or GPS2 receiver. The receiver may still be
available. The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the NAV1 and/or NAV2 receiver. The receiver may still be
available. The system should be serviced.
The remote NAV1 and/or NAV2 transfer switch is stuck in the enabled (or “pressed”)
state. Press the transfer switch again to cycle its operation. If the problem persists, the
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The system should
be serviced.
G/S2 FAIL – G/S2 is inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
G/S1 SERVICE – G/S1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
G/S2 SERVICE – G/S2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
A failure has been detected in glideslope receiver 1 and/or receiver 2. The receiver may
still be available. The system should be serviced when possible.
AFCS
GSD 41 Message Advisories
Comments
GSD1 and the CDU have different copies of the GSD1 configuration.
GSD1 is reporting a low temperature condition.
GSD1 is reporting an over-temperature condition.
GSD1 is reporting an internal error condition. The GSD may still be usable.
GSD1 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message
GSD1 CONFIG – GSD1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GSD1 COOLING – GSD1
temperature too low.
GSD1 COOLING – GSD1 over
temperature.
GSD1 SERVICE – GSD1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – GSD1 software
mismatch. Communication halted.
598
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GEA 71 Message Advisories
Comments
The GEA1 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The GEA2 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
The GEA3 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The #1 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
EAS
The #2 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Message
GEA1 CONFIG – GEA1 config error.
Config service req’d.
GEA2 CONFIG – GEA2 config error.
Config service req’d.
GEA3 CONFIG – GEA3 config error.
Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GEA1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GEA2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GEA3 software
mismatch, communication halted.
The #3 GEA 71 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GTX 33 Message Advisories
Comments
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
The transponder configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration
memory. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message
XPDR1 CONFIG – XPDR1 config
error. Config service req’d.
XPDR2 CONFIG – XPDR2 config
error. Config service req’d.
MANIFEST – GTX1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GTX2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
XPDR1 SRVC – XPDR1 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
XPDR2 SRVC – XPDR2 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
XPDR1 FAIL – XPDR1 is
inoperative.
XPDR2 FAIL – XPDR2 is
inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The transponder has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The #1 transponder should be serviced when possible.
AFCS
The #2 transponder should be serviced when possible.
There is no communication with the #1 transponder.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There is no communication with the #2 transponder.
GRS 77 Message Advisories
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS relies
on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving true airspeed from the air data computer. The AHRS relies
on GPS information to augment the lack of airspeed. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
The #2 AHRS is using the backup GPS path. Primary GPS path has failed. The system
should be serviced when possible.
APPENDICES
Message
AHRS1 TAS – AHRS1 not receiving
airspeed.
AHRS2 TAS – AHRS2 not receiving
airspeed.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 using backup
GPS source.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 using backup
GPS source.
599
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
GRS 77 Message Advisories (Cont.)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving
any GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 not receiving
backup GPS information.
AHRS1 GPS – AHRS1 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS2 GPS – AHRS2 operating
exclusively in no-GPS mode.
AHRS MAG DB – AHRS magnetic
model database version mismatch.
AHRS1 SRVC – AHRS1 Magneticfield model needs update.
AHRS2 SRVC – AHRS2 Magneticfield model needs update.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS1 too far
North/South, no magnetic compass.
GEO LIMITS – AHRS2 too far
North/South, no magnetic compass.
MANIFEST – GRS1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GRS2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
The #1 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving any or any useful GPS information. Check AFMS
limitations. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is not receiving backup GPS information. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS is operating exclusively in no-GPS mode. The system should be serviced.
The #1 AHRS and #2 AHRS magnetic model database versions do not match.
The #1 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model when
practical.
The #2 AHRS earth magnetic field model is out of date. Update magnetic field model when
practical.
The aircraft is outside geographical limits for approved AHRS operation. Heading is
flagged as invalid.
The #1 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
The #2 AHRS has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GMU 44 Message Advisories
Comments
A fault has occurred in the #1 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
A fault has occurred in the #2 GMU 44. Heading is flagged as invalid. The AHRS uses
GPS for backup mode operation. The system should be serviced.
The GMU 44 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message
HDG FAULT – AHRS1
magnetometer fault has occurred.
HDG FAULT – AHRS2
magnetometer fault has occurred.
MANIFEST – GMU1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GMU2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
600
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GSR 56 Message Advisories
Message
GSR1 FAIL – GSR1 has failed.
Comments
A failure has been detected in the #1 GSR 56. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GDL 59 Message Advisories
Message
GDL59 CONFIG – GDL 59 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL59 FAIL – GDL 59 has failed.
EAS
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59. The system should be serviced.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59 router. The system should be serviced.
The GDL 59 is not registered with Garmin Flight Data Services, or it’s current registration
data has failed authentication.
The GDL 59 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDL59 SERVICE – GDL 59 needs
service. Return unit for repair.
GDL59 RTR FAIL – The GDL 59
router has failed.
REGISTER GFDS – Data services
are inoperative, register w/GFDS.
MANIFEST – GDL software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GDL 59 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 59. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced.
GDL 69A Message Advisories
MANIFEST – GDL software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GDL 69 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory. The
system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GDL 69. The receiver is unavailable. The system
should be serviced
The GDL 69 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Message
GDL69 CONFIG – GDL 69 config
error. Config service req’d.
GDL69 FAIL – GDL 69 has failed.
AFCS
GWX 68 Alert Messages
A failure has been detected in the GWX 68. The GWX 68 may still be usable.
APPENDICES
GWX SERVICE – GWX needs
service. Return unit for repair.
MANIFEST – GWX software
mismatch, communication halted.
WX ALERT – Possible severe
weather ahead.
Comments
GWX 68 configuration settings do not match those of the GDU configuration. The
system should be serviced.
The GDU is not receiving status packet from the GWX 68 or the GWX 68 is reporting a
fault. The GWX 68 radar system should be serviced.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message
GWX CONFIG – GWX config error.
Config service req’d.
GWX FAIL – GWX is inoperative.
The GWX 68 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
Possible severe weather detected within +/- 10 degrees of the aircraft heading at a
range of 80 to 320 nm.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
601
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
GDC 74B Message Advisories
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
ADC1 ALT EC – ADC1 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 ALT EC – ADC2 altitude error
correction is unavailable.
ADC1 AS EC – ADC1 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
ADC2 AS EC – ADC2 airspeed error
correction is unavailable.
MANIFEST – GDC1 software
mismatch, communication halted.
MANIFEST – GDC2 software
mismatch, communication halted.
Comments
GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the altitude error correction is unavailable.
GDC1 or GDC2 is reporting that the airspeed error correction is unavailable.
The GDC 74B has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
GCU 475 Message Advisories
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message
GCU CNFG – GCU Config error.
Config service req’d.
GCU FAIL – GCU is inoperative.
MANIFEST – GCU software
mismatch, communication halted.
GCU KEYSTK – GCU [key name]
Key is stuck.
Comments
GCU 475 configuration settings do not match those of backup configuration memory.
The system should be serviced.
A failure has been detected in the GCU 475. The GCU 475 is unavailable.
The GCU 475 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the GCU 475 bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
GMC 715 Message Advisories
Comments
Error in the configuration of the GMC 715.
A failure has been detected in the GMC 715. The GMC 715 is unavailable.
The GMC 715 has incorrect software installed. The system should be serviced.
A key is stuck on the GMC 715 bezel. Attempt to free the stuck key by pressing it
several times. The system should be serviced if the problem persists.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Message
GMC CONFIG – GMC Config error.
Config service req’d.
GMC FAIL – GMC is inoperative.
MANIFEST – GMC software
mismatch. Communication halted.
GMC KEYSTK – GMC [key name]
Key is stuck.
602
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Miscellaneous Message Advisories
A steep turn is 15 seconds ahead. Prepare to turn.
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft will penetrate the airspace within
10 minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
The system notifies the pilot that the loaded approach is not active. Activate approach
when required.
The system notifies the pilot to load the approach frequency for the appropriate NAV
receiver. Select the correct frequency for the approach.
The system notifies the pilot to set the CDI to the correct NAV receiver. Set the CDI to
the correct NAV receiver.
APPENDICES
Bad parallel track geometry.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Arriving at waypoint [xxxx], where [xxxx] is the waypoint name.
AFCS
WPT ARRIVAL – Arriving at
waypoint -[xxxx]
STEEP TURN – Steep turn ahead.
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near – less
than 2 nm.
APR INACTV – Approach is not
active.
SLCT FREQ – Select appropriate
frequency for approach.
SLCT NAV – Select NAV on CDI for
approach.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
bad geometry.
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LOCKED FPL – Cannot navigate
locked flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FPL TRUNC – Flight plan has been
truncated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify stored airways.
EAS
FPL WPT MOVE – Flight plan
waypoint moved.
TIMER EXPIRD – Timer has expired.
DB CHANGE – Database changed.
Verify user modified procedures.
Comments
Upon power-up, the system detects that a stored flight plan waypoint is locked. This
occurs when an navigation database update eliminates an obsolete waypoint. The
flight plan cannot find the specified waypoint and flags this message. This can also
occur with user waypoints in a flight plan that is deleted.
Remove the waypoint from the flight plan if it no longer exists in any database,
Or
update the waypoint name/identifier to reflect the new information.
The system has detected that a waypoint coordinate has changed due to a new navigation
database update. Verify that stored flight plans contain correct waypoint locations.
The system notifies the pilot that the timer has expired.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains procedures that have been manually
edited. This alert is issued only after an navigation database update. Verify that the
user-modified procedures in stored flight plans are correct and up to date.
This occurs when a stored flight plan contains an airway that is no longer consistent
with the navigation database. This alert is issued only after an navigation database
update. Verify use of airways in stored flight plans and reload airways as needed.
This occurs when a newly installed navigation database eliminates an obsolete
approach or arrival used by a stored flight plan. The obsolete procedure is removed
from the flight plan. Update flight plan with current arrival or approach.
This occurs when the pilot attempts to activate a stored flight plan that contains locked
waypoint. Remove locked waypoint from flight plan. Update flight plan with current
waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
FPL WPT LOCK – Flight plan
waypoint is locked.
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
603
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Miscellaneous Message Advisories (Cont.)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
PTK FAIL – Parallel track unavailable:
past IAF.
UNABLE V WPT – Can’t reach
current vertical waypoint.
EAS
VNV – Unavailable. Unsupported
leg type in flight plan.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive track
angle error.
VNV – Unavailable. Excessive
crosstrack error.
VNV – Unavailable. Parallel course
selected.
NO WGS84 WPT – Non WGS 84
waypoint for navigation -[xxxx]
TRAFFIC FAIL – Traffic device has
failed.
FAILED PATH – A data path has
failed.
MAG VAR WARN – Large magnetic
variance. Verify all course angles.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Out of
available terrain region.
SVS – SVS DISABLED: Terrain DB
resolution too low.
SCHEDULER [#] – <message>.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC1 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
CHECK CRS – Database course for
LOC2 / [LOC ID] is [CRS]°.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD
1 REM – Card 1 was removed.
Reinsert card.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD
2 REM – Card 2 was removed.
Reinsert card.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 1
ERR – Card 1 is invalid.
[PFD1, PFD2, or MFD1] CARD 2
ERR – Card 2 is invalid.
604
Comments
IAF waypoint for parallel offset has been passed.
The current vertical waypoint can not be reached within the maximum flight path angle
and vertical speed constraints. The system automatically transitions to the next vertical
waypoint.
The lateral flight plan contains a procedure turn, vector, or other unsupported leg
type prior to the active vertical waypoint. This prevents vertical guidance to the active
vertical waypoint.
The current track angle error exceeds the limit, causing the vertical deviation to go
invalid.
The current crosstrack exceeds the limit, causing vertical deviation to go invalid.
A parallel course has been selected, causing the vertical deviation to go invalid.
The selected waypoint [xxxx] does not use the WGS 84 datum. Cross-check position
with alternate navigation sources.
The system is no longer receiving data from the traffic system. The traffic device should
be serviced.
A data path connected to the GDU, GSD 41, or the GIA 63/W has failed.
The GDU’s internal model cannot determine the exact magnetic variance for geographic
locations near the magnetic poles. Displayed magnetic course angles may differ from
the actual magnetic heading by more than 2°.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because the aircraft is not within the boundaries of the
installed terrain database.
Synthetic Vision is disabled because a terrain database of sufficient resolution (9 arcsecond or better) is not currently installed.
Message criteria entered by the user.
Selected course for LOC1 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
Selected course for LOC2 differs from published localizer course by more than 10
degrees.
The SD card was removed from the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The SD
card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card was removed from the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD. The
SD card needs to be reinserted.
The SD card in the top card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
The SD card in the bottom card slot of the specified PFD or MFD contains invalid data.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-A Alerts
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Warning
(ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“<whoop><whoop> Pull Up”
Excessive Closure Rate Warning (ECR)
“<whoop><whoop> Pull Up”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
“Too Low, Terrain”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
“Sink Rate”
Excessive Closure Rate Caution (ECR)
“Terrain, Terrain”
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
“Don’t Sink”
“Too Low, Terrain”
Flight Into Terrain Gear Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Gear”
Flight Into Terrain Flaps Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Flaps”
Flight Into Terrain Takeoff Caution (FIT)
“Too Low, Terrain”
or
None
None
“Glide Slope”
or
“Glide Path”
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
or
AFCS
Flight Into Terrain High Speed Caution (FIT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Caution
(ROC)
Altitude Voice Callout (VCO)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
EAS
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
Glide Slope/Glide Path Deviation Caution (GSD)
(depends on approach type)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Alert Type
APPENDICES
“Five-Hundred”
“Four-Hundred”
“Three-Hundred”
“Two-Hundred”
“One-Hundred”
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
605
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
TAWS-A System Status Annunciations
PFD/MFD
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Additional
TAWS-A Page
Annunciation
Aural Message
TAWS System Fail
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
GPWS System Fail
None
“GPWS System Failure”
System Test in progress
TAWS TEST
None
None
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Test OK”
“TAWS System Failure”
None
“GPWS System Failure”
NO GPS
POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” will be heard when
sufficient GPS signal is received.
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when aircraft
enters database coverage area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
System Test pass
Terrain or Obstacle database unavailable, invalid
software configuration, or audio unavailable.
GPWS System Fail, Radar Altimeter invalid,
Altitude or Vertical Speed unavailable
No GPS position, excessively degraded GPS signal
None
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Out of database coverage area
None
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-A Alert Availability
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
TAWS-A Alert Type Available
*
TAWS-A Status
Annunciation RTC
Displayed
ITI
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*Yes **Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
*Yes **Yes
No
No
No
No
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
No
No
No
No
**Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
No
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
Yes
#Yes
Yes
Yes
ROC IOI PDA EDR ECR NCR
FIT
GSD VCO
No
Alert available unless GPS signal is invalid or unavailable.
** VCO alerts are not issued if both TAWS and GPWS systems have failed or are not available.
INDEX
#
606
Only the portions of FIT Alerting based on flap position are disabled when FLAP OVR annunciation is displayed.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B Alerts
Annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. Pop-up alerts appear only on the MFD.
Alert Type
MFD Map Page
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
Excessive Descent Rate Warning (EDR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD/MFD
TAWS Page
Annunciation
“Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Warning
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Warning
(ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
EAS
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance Caution
(RTC)
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance Caution
(ROC)
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
Premature Descent Alert Caution (PDA)
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
None
Negative Climb Rate Caution (NCR)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitude Callout “500”
Excessive Descent Rate Caution (EDR)
“Don’t Sink”
MFD
Pop-Up Alert
Aural Message
TAWS System Test Fail
None
“TAWS System Failure”
TAWS Alerting is disabled
None
None
No GPS position or excessively
degraded GPS signal
None
System Test in progress
None
Alert Type
None
None
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” will be heard when sufficient
GPS signal is received.
None
APPENDICES
System Test pass
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD/MFD
TAWS Page
Annunciation
AFCS
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations
“TAWS System Test OK”
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
607
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TCAS I Alerts and Annunciations
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TCAS I Self-test Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
OPERATING
TCAS I Operating
EAS
TCAS I Standby
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
FAIL
TCAS I Failed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TCAS I Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Map Page Annunciation
Description
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TCAS I unit
DATA FAILED
Data is being received from the TCAS I unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
FAILED
Incorrect data format received from the TCAS I unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TCAS I Failure Annunciations
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
AFCS
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TRFC FAIL
NO TCAS DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and
altitude trend arrow (climbing/descending).
TCAS I unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TCAS I unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
TCAS I Traffic Status Annunciations
608
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TCAS II Alerts and Annunciations
PFD Mode
Annunciation
Mode
None
Traffic Advisory and
Resolution Advisory (TA/RA)
None
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TCAS II Self-test Initiated
(TEST)
MFD Traffic Map Page Mode
Annunciation
TEST
(‘TEST MODE’ also shown in white on
top center of page)
TA/RA
Traffic Advisory Only (TA
ONLY)
EAS
TA ONLY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STANDBY or STANDBY*
(also shown in white in center of page)
TCAS II Standby
(TFC STBY)
FAIL
TCAS II Failed
* Annunciation appears yellow while in flight.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TCAS II Modes
Description
Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
Data is being received from the TCAS II unit, but the unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TCAS II unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
TCAS II Failure Annunciations
RA OFF SCALE
RA X.X ± XX ↕
INDEX
TRFC FAIL
NO TCAS DATA
A Resolution Advisory is outside the selected display range*. Annunciation is removed when traffic
comes within the selected display range
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Resolution Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending).
TCAS II unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TCAS II unit
APPENDICES
TA X.X ± XX ↕
Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA OFF SCALE
AFCS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
TCAS II Traffic Status Annunciations
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
609
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Other Prodigy™ Aural Alerts
Message
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
“Autopilot”
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
“Cabin”
“Fire, Fire”
“Flight Director”
“High Speed”
“Landing Gear”
“Minimums, minimums”
“No Takeoff Brake”
“No Takeoff Flaps”
“No Takeoff Trim”
“Stall, Stall”
“Timer Expired”
“Thrust Thrust”
“Altitude”
“Traffic”
“Trim Trim Trim”
“Vertical track”
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
“Aural Warning OK”
“Aural Warning One Channel”
“Incoming Call
“SelCal”
“Takeoff OK”
“TIS not available”
Priority
Description
Warning – Autopilot is disengaged
Single alert for manual AP disengagement
Continuous alert for automatic AP disengagement; cancelled with AP DISC Switch
High cabin altitude
Engine fire
Flight director has reverted to pitch or roll default mode
Maximum operating speed exceeded
Warning Gear up in landing condition
The aircraft has descended below the preset barometric minimum descent altitude.
No Takeoff Configuration due to brake status
No Takeoff Configuration due to flap status
No Takeoff Configuration due to trim status
Airplane in stall condition
Countdown timer on the PFD has reached zero
CSC disengaged abnormally
Aircraft has deviated ±200 feet of the selected altitude
The Traffic Information Service (TIS) has issued a Traffic Advisory alert.
Advisory Trim switch malfunction
The aircraft is one minute from Top of Descent. Issued only when vertical navigation is
enabled.
Aural warning system test passes
Aural warning system test detects failure in one channel
Satellite telephone is receiving a call
Status
Incoming communication through the HF radio
Takeoff configuration test passed
The aircraft is outside the Traffic Information Service (TIS) coverage area.
AFCS
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages
In some circumstances, some messages may appear in conjunction with others.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
‘Flight plan successfully imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only. User
waypoints imported successfully. No stored
flight plan data was modified.’
‘No flight plan files found to import.’
‘Flight plan import failed.’
‘Flight plan partially imported.’
‘File contained user waypoints only.’
INDEX
‘Too many points. Flight plan truncated.’
610
Description
A flight plan file stored on the SD card was successfully imported as a stored flight plan.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. These
waypoints have been saved to the system user waypoints. No flight plans stored in the
system have been modified.
The SD card contains no flight plan data.
Flight plan data was not successfully imported from the SD card.
Some flight plan waypoints were successfully imported from the SD card, however others
had errors and were not imported. A partial stored flight plan now exists in the system.
The file stored on the SD card did not contain a flight plan, only user waypoints. One or
more of these waypoints did not import successfully.
The flight plan on the SD card contains more waypoints than the system can support. The
flight plan was imported with as many waypoints as possible.
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight Plan Import/Export Results
Description
‘Some waypoints not loaded. Waypoints
The flight plan on the SD card contains one or more waypoints that the system cannot find
locked.’
in the navigation database. The flight plan has been imported, but must be edited within
the system before it can be activated for use.
‘User waypoint database full. Not all loaded.’ The flight plan file on the SD card contains user waypoints. The quantity of stored user
waypoints has exceeded system capacity, therefore not all the user waypoints on the SD
card have been imported. Any flight plan user waypoints that were not imported are
locked in the flight plan. The flight plan must be edited within the system before it can be
activated for use.
‘One or more user waypoints renamed.’
One or more imported user waypoints were renamed when imported due to naming
conflicts with waypoints already existing in the system.
‘Flight plan successfully exported.’
The stored flight plan was successfully exported to the SD card.
‘Flight plan export failed.’
The stored flight plan was not successfully exported to the SD card. The SD card may not
have sufficient available memory or the card may have been removed prematurely.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
611
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix A
Blank Page
612
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SD Card Use
The system uses Secure Digital (SD) cards to load and store various types of data. For basic flight operations,
SD cards are required for database storage as well as Jeppesen navigation and ChartView database updates.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Loading a database in the system prior to its effective date will result in the expiration date on the
power-up screen and the effective date on the AUX-System Status Page being displayed in yellow.
Jeppesen Databases
EAS
The Jeppesen navigation database is updated on a 28-day cycle. The ChartView database is updated on a 14day cycle. If the ChartView database is not updated within 70 days of the expiration date, ChartView will no
longer function. Both of these databases are provided directly from Jeppesen.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Note: The Jeppesen aviation navigation database is now referred to as the ‘navigation database’. Previously
this database had been referred to as the ‘aviation database’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The ChartView database should be copied to the Garmin supplied Supplemental Data Card which will reside
in the bottom card slot on the MFD. The navigation database must be installed from the Jeppesen or user
supplied SD data card. Contact Jeppesen (www.jeppesen.com) for subscription and update information.
NOTE: After the navigation database is installed, the card may be removed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Updating the active Jeppesen navigation database (not using the Dual Navigation Database or
Automatic Database Synchronization Features):
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the top card slot of the
display (PFD or MFD) to be updated (label of SD card facing left).
2) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed in the upper left corner of the display:
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure B-1: Standby Navigation Database Prompt
3) Press the NO Softkey to proceed to the active database update.
4) A prompt similar to the following is displayed, press the YES Softkey to update the active navigation
database.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
613
EAS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure B-2 Database Update Confirmation
5) After the update completes, the display starts in normal mode.
6) Turn the system OFF and remove the SD card.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Repeat steps 1 through 4 for the other PFD and the MFD. The MFD and PFD databases are now updated.
Remove the SD card when finished.
8) During MFD startup, verify that the correct update cycle is loaded.
Dual Navigation Database Feature
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The dual navigation database feature allows each display to store an upcoming navigation database on the
bottom SD card so that the system can automatically load it to replace the active database when the new
database becomes effective (the next cycle becomes available seven days prior to its effective date).
AFCS
If a navigation database loader card is inserted into the top SD card slot of a display, and an SD card is in the
bottom slot, the system will prompt the user (upon on-ground power up) as to whether the database should
be stored on the bottom SD card as the standby database. If the user responds affirmatively, the system will
copy the navigation database from the top SD card to the bottom SD card. As long as the bottom SD card
remains in the card slot, this standby navigation database will be available for the system to use as the active
database as soon as it becomes effective.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The system checks the active and standby databases upon (on-ground only) power-up. If the standby
database is current and the active database is out of date, the display will upload the standby database into the
active internal database location. Uploading the standby database to the active location takes approximately 4555 seconds. The pilot is alerted that the update is complete by a system alert message, ‘NAV DB UPDATED’.
APPENDICES
Loading a standby navigation database:
1) With the system OFF, insert the SD card containing the navigation database update into the top card slot of the
desired PFD or MFD.
2) Verify that an SD card is inserted in the bottom slot.
INDEX
3) Turn the system ON. A prompt similar to the following is displayed.
614
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure B-3 Standby Navigation Database Prompt
EAS
4) Press the YES Softkey, to start the update.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) After the navigation database files are copied to the bottom SD card. A prompt similar to the following is
displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure B-4 Active Navigation Database Prompt
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the NO Softkey to allow the system to automatically update the active navigation database as applicable
per database effectivity.
7) After the update, the display starts in normal mode.
AFCS
8) Repeat steps 1-7 for each PFD and the MFD, if updating manually.
9) Verify the effectivity of the active navigation database in each PFD and the MFD on the AUX-System Status
Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: The Prodigy™ system compares the active databases on each PFD and the MFD, and displays a
APPENDICES
system alert message ‘DB Mismatch’ if they are not identical. Similarly, if the standby databases on each
PFD and the MFD are not identical, the Prodigy™ system will display a ‘DB Mismatch’ alert for the standby
navigation databases. Garmin recommends enabling the automatic database synchronization feature to
protect against database mismatches.
INDEX
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
615
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
Garmin Databases
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following databases are stored on Supplemental Data Cards provided by Garmin:
• Expanded basemap
• Airport terrain
• SafeTaxi
• Terrain
• Obstacle
• FliteCharts
• Airport Directory
(AOPA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EAS
After subscribing to the desired database product, these database products will be downloaded to three
Supplemental Data Cards (with the exception of FliteCharts, which is loaded on only one card). Insert each
Supplemental Data Card into the correct location shown in Figure B-5. These cards must not be removed
except to update the databases stored on each card.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD1
MFD
PFD2
Figure B-5 Correct Database Locations
AFCS
Since these databases are not stored internally in the displays, a Supplemental Data Card containing identical
database versions must be kept in each display unit.
The basemap database contains data for the topography and land features, such as rivers, lakes, and towns.
It is updated only periodically, with no set schedule. There is no expiration date.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The terrain database contains the terrain mapping data. The airport terrain database contains increased
resolution terrain data around airports. These databases are updated periodically and have no expiration date.
APPENDICES
The obstacle database contains data for obstacles, such as towers, that pose a potential hazard to aircraft.
Obstacles 200 feet and higher are included in the obstacle database. It is very important to note that not all
obstacles are necessarily charted and therefore may not be contained in the obstacle database. This database is
updated on a 56-day cycle.
NOTE: The data contained in the terrain and obstacle databases comes from government agencies. Garmin
INDEX
accurately processes and cross-validates the data, but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of
the data.
The AOPA Airport Directory provides data on airports and heliports throughout the U.S., and offers detailed
information for over 5,300 U. S. airports, along with the names and phone numbers of thousands of FBOs. This
database is updated four times per year and has no expiration date
616
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The SafeTaxi database contains detailed airport diagrams for selected airports. These diagrams aid in following
ground control instructions by accurately displaying the aircraft position on the map in relation to taxiways,
ramps, runways, terminals, and services. This database is updated on a 56-day cycle.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The FliteCharts database contains procedure charts for the United States only. This database is updated on a
28-day cycle. If not updated within 180 days of the expiration date, FliteCharts will no longer function.
Updating Garmin Databases
EAS
The Garmin database updates can be obtained by following the instructions detailed in the ‘Aviation
Databases’ section of the Garmin website (fly.garmin.com). Once the updated files have been downloaded
from the website, a PC equipped with an appropriate SD card reader is used to unpack and program the
new databases onto the existing Supplemental Data Cards. Equipment required to perform the update is as
follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Windows-compatible PC computer (Windows 2000 or XP recommended)
• SD Card Reader: SanDisk SDDR-93, SanDisk SDDR-99, Verbatim #96504, or equivalent
• Updated database obtained from the Garmin website
• Existing Supplemental Database SD Cards (010-00330-41, -42, or -43) from both PFDs and MFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In some cases it may be necessary to obtain an unlock code from Garmin in order to make the database
product functional. It may also be necessary to have the system configured by a Garmin authorized service
facility in order to use some database features.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the data has been copied to the appropriate data cards, perform the following steps:
1) Insert one SD card in the bottom card slot of the MFD and one in the bottom card slot of each PFD. The SD card
containing the ChartView or FliteCharts database must be inserted into the bottom slot on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Apply power to the system. View the MFD power-up screen. Check that the databases are initialized and
displayed on the power-up screen. When updating the terrain and FliteCharts databases, an ‘in progress’
message may be seen. If this message is present, wait for the system to finish loading before proceeding to
step 3.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure B-6 Database Information on the Power-up Screen
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
617
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Appendix B
3) Acknowledge the Power-up Page agreement by pressing the ENT Key or the right most softkey.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page group on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Status Page.
Unselected
MFD1 DB Selected PFD1 DB Selected
Figure B-7 Display Database Softkey
EAS
6) Press the Display Database Softkey (Figure B-7) to place the cursor in the ‘Database’ box.
7) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the database list and check that all databases are current and there are
no errors.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the Display Database Softkey to view the Database info pertaining to the desired PFD or MFD.
9) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the database list and check that all databases are current and there are
no errors.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10) Repeat steps 8 and 9 until all the databases in each applicable display have been verified.
11) Power down the system.
Automatic Database Synchronization Feature
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The automatic database synchronization feature automatically transfers the database from a single SD
database card to the SD cards on each PFD and the MFD to ensure that all databases are synchronized
throughout the system. After power-up, the Prodigy™ system compares all copies of each applicable database.
If similar databases do not match, the most recent valid database is automatically copied to each card in the
system that does not already contain that database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The following databases are checked and synchronized: Standby Navigation, Basemap, Safetaxi, Airport
Terrain, Obstacle, Airport Directory (AOPA), and Terrain. This feature applies only to databases that are
stored on the SD card that resides in the bottom slot of each display. This feature does not apply to the active
navigation database which is stored internally in each display, or to the charts databases (FliteCharts and
ChartView) which are only required to be present on the MFD. The typical procedure would be to download
new databases to the MFD card, then synchronize the data to the PFD(s).
NOTE: The 9-arc second terrain database may take as long as 100 minutes to synchronize using this method.
APPENDICES
Therefore the user may want to transfer the data using a PC, or connect the Prodigy™ system to a ground
power source while performing the database synchronization.
INDEX
If the automatic database synchronization feature is enabled, the standby navigation database can be loaded
onto a single SD card (using the Dual Navigation Database Feature) and placed in the bottom card slot of
the MFD. After power-up, the system will transfer the standby navigation database from that card to the
bottom SD card in each PFD. After the sync completes, if the active navigation database is out-of-date and the
standby database is effective, the standby database will be transferred and used as the internal active database
upon the next power cycle.
618
Embraer Prodigy™ Flight Deck 100 Pilot’s Guide
190-00728-02 Rev. A
Appendix B
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The synchronization progress may be monitored on the AUX-System Status Page in the Sync Status section
of the Database Window (Figure B-8). This section shows the synchronization status of each applicable
database, including the percent complete, time remaining, and to which displays the databases are being
copied. When the synchronization is complete, the status is listed as ‘Complete’, followed by the displays to
which the databases were copied. This sub-section is only present when a sync is occurring or has occurred
on the current power-up.
An indication of ‘Complete’ still requires a power cycle before the synchronized databases will be used by
the Prodigy™ system.
EAS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure B-8 AUX-System Status Page, Database Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Display Database Softkey (Figure B-7) is used to place the cursor in the Database Window. Upon
first press of the Display Database Softkey, the so